THE LAST PROPHECY (BOOK 2)

THE LAST PROPHECY – II / SCIENCE-FICTION Original Name of the Book: SON KEHANET – II Author: MURAT UKRAY Turkish to English Translator: Çiğdem Nur Döşoğlu Cover Artwork: Noyan Karaman Interior and Graphic Design: Azra Erol Content and Typesetting: This book was prepared by: E-Kitap Projesi & Cheapest Books Cover image: “Pi Number Going to Infinity, Temple and End of Time” https://www.cheapestboooks.com www.facebook.com/EKitapProjesi ISBN: 978-625-7287-38-8 eISBN: 978-625-7287-37-1 Istanbul, 2020 Publisher: E-KİTAP PROJESİ & CHEAPEST BOOKS Publisher Certificate No: 45502 All Rights Reserved © Copyright, All Right Reserved All publishing rights to this book belong to the E-Kitap Projesi & Cheapest Books. Unauthorized reproduction other than promotional citations is considered a crime according to our laws. Instead of taking such an action, if you ask us, we would appreciate it on behalf of the civilized and sharing world. ..................................................................................................... 7 ............................................................................................................................ 9 ................................................................................................................... 13 ..................................... 59 ................................................................................................... 71 ................................................................................................... 77 ................................................................................................... 83 ................................................................................................... 87 ................................................................................................... 99 ................................................................................................. 131 ................................................................................................. 140 ................................................................................................. 147 ................ 147 ................................................................................................. 193 .................................................................................................. 199 .................................................................................................. 205 ................................................................................................. 211 ................................................................................................. 223 ................................................................................................. 227 ................................................................................................. 239 ................................................................................................. 245 ................................................................................................. 253 ................................................................................................. 259 ................................................................ 259 ................................................................................................. 271 ................................................................................................. 275 ................................................................................................. 279 ................................................................................................. 285 ................................................................................................. 289 ................................................................................................. 295 ................................................................................................. 299 ................................................................................................. 307 ................................................................................................. 361 ......................................................................... 361 ................................................................................................. 396 ................................................................................................. 421 ................................................................................................................ 421 ................................................................................................. 435 .............................................................................................. 435 *** M urat Ukray, an author who is also a publisher, was born in Istanbul in 1976. After studying Electronics Engineering at the University, he was thrown into writing and publishing. He has 15 published books. The Last Prophecy is the 14th Book of the Author. *** Other published books written by the author: 1 - The Reality of Doomsday (Fiction Novel) (2006) 2 - Unified Field Theory (Theory - Physics & Mathematics) (2007) 3 - Signs of Jesus (Research) (2008) 4 - The Reality of Creation- 2 Volume (Atlas of Biochemistry) (2009) 5 - 40 Rules of Love of Masnawi (Fiction Novel) (2010) 6 - Owners of the Time (Essay) (2011) 7 - Religious Guide for Women (Catechism) (2012) 8 - Tales of the Ancients (Research) (2013) 9 - Messenger Dreams (Essay) (2014) 10- Infinity of Eternity (114 Codes) (Theory & Practice) (2015) 11- Canon (A New Interpretation of the Holy Books) (Theory & Research) (2016) 12- Little Elisa (A Time Traveler) (Children's Book) (2017) 13- Lights of God (The Story That Began In The Desert) (Science-Fiction Novel) (2018) 14- The Last Prophecy - 2 Volume (Science-Fiction Novel) (2019) 15- The Medusa Code (Science-Fiction Novel) (2020) www.ekitaprojesi.com/authors/murat-ukray www.kiyametgercekligi.com *** Do the number Pi (π) contain everything within? Such as your date of birth, your date of death, even the date of the Doomsday. Well, what if someone knew that a long time ago and coded it somewhere? Could someone else have discovered America in the Middle Ages before Columbus? Well, what if this mysterious person is really a great Oracle who has to hide his talent, and what if his purpose of going there is not to discover a new continent, but to solve one of the world's greatest secrets, the Secret of a Mayan prophetic calendar that explains when the Doomsday in a Mayan pyramid is coming? The Mayans actually calculated the date of the Doomsday as 13.0.0.0.0 Baktun and they encoded it into a giant calendar. Well, what did that actually mean? 13 Baktun was actually a giant code in which the Mayans, who were also adept at mathematics, placed the true date of the Doomsday into the number Pi (π), and it indicated a date that was not 2012 but further. Did the Mayans come up with this information themselves, or did they get it from a lost civilization far more advanced than themselves, called Atlantis? Oracle Bruno realized at the end of his 22 years of work that all this could not be a coincidence, and it was all about to fall into place. “It's all over, we can't go back now, it's too late!" he said to himself and removed the sarcophagus lid of the temple and placed the last of the three large stone disks in place. Now everything was ready, he was about to find out which date actually 13th Baktun coincide with that is the biggest secret of human history hidden in the Mayan Calendar, which is impossible to solve, by calculating the hidden code in the number of Pi: 13th Baktun: 13,3333 × 366,6666 (day) = 4903rd code The 4903rd number of the Pi number coincide with the year 2222. *** In 1500, on a dark night in a farmhouse near Granada in Southern Spain, a gray-colored 1-meter extraterrestrial creature who called himself 'Alien' in his notes; stood in front of the door with two letters containing a series of prophecies about the future of the world and a mysterious map with a place marked on it, and with a huge picture that consisted of 100 scrambled numbers of some cryptic complex numbers and writing of future dates; and he was staring at Bruno with his big black eyes. In fact, this number picture, which is a giant 'Anagram', was a small piece of a giant spiral that began with 3.14... and extending to infinity, in which the histories of all the past and future events in the world were encoded. Alien suddenly threw the things in his hand towards him and began to run rapidly through the cornfield towards the lights descending from the sky 1 km away. As he began to run, the flying object began to quickly descend from the sky and disappeared into the darkness. Bruno first glanced toward the direction of the alien and went with fearful eyes, he had neither seen nor heard anything like this in his entire life, except in the stories of Satan and Jinn, told by people in the Church. He was frozen with fear, he wanted to follow him in that direction, but he didn't dare. He then reached out to the papers on the ground and slowly picked them up from where the alien had left them. These two prophetic letters that Oracle Bruno received that night, and a map that shows the location of a mysterious ‘Mayan calendar' in a temple in the middle of a great continent marked with “America” in Latin-like language, across Spain, and with “Atlantis” written in the middle, would in fact be the beginning of a struggle between God and Satan, which began with the expulsion of mankind from Heaven, and continuing until the Doomsday. So that, Bruno would realize before it was too late that this bloody struggle, which would cost him and all his loved ones lives, was in fact the beginning of a great prophecy that concerned not only him but the end of all mankind. The chain of events that began in medieval Spain with a dramatic and bitter life and death struggle in the Inquisition led Bruno and his sister Sofia on a dangerous and long journey from Andalusia to a Mayan temple in Mexico, the center of the Mayan civilization, and it would eventually end with their execution. But the Great Prophecy that was announced would bring an end not only for the church or for them, but also the whole world this time. Because The Last Prophecy was leading humanity to the end of its story, the Doomsday, which started with the expulsion from Heaven. Where did humanity come from, where are we going? You will find the answer to this question in The Last Prophecy. *** To be or not to be, that is the question! Whether 'tis nobler in the mind to suffer The slings and arrows of outrageous fortune, Or to take arms against a sea of troubles And by opposing end them? To die, to sleep! (William Shakespeare, Hamlet) THREE MYSTERIOUS EVENTS UNEXPLAINED IN HISTORY: How Was America Founded? Who Were the Secret Organizations that Ruled the World and the Count of Saint Germain? 1-THE FALL OF ANCIENT AMERICA: THE FOUNDING OF THE NEW AMERICA AND "NEW ATLANTIS” A merican territory was not first discovered by Columbus, but it is true that Mexico was first captured by a Spanish explorer named Hern|ndo Cortés, and he was the first sailor to invade Mexico on behalf of Spain. So, who was this mystery man really? First explorer to invade Mexican territory: Cortez (Hern|ndo Cortés (1485-1547), one of the pioneers of Spanish colonization Cortés was born in Medellin, Spain in 1485. He is also known as Hernando or Fernando, but he signed all his letters under the name Hern|n Cortés. He is second degree cousin of Francisco Pizarro, who occupied the Inca Lands of present-day Peru. When Cortés went to Mexico to invade, the natives welcomed him very well, because according in their legend; in very ancient times, the white “Gods” had come from the east on ships and had taught them civilization. Then they returned to their homes in the east, promising that they would return. Although them all of the Indians were crooked, the “Gods" were bearded, blond-haired, white-skinned, and blue-eyed, just like Pedro de Alvarado, captain of the Cortes. The Indians thought him as their God "Quetzalcoatl" and prostrated before him. For the same reason, Pizarro, who went to Peru and invaded, won an easy victory with a handful of men against the Incas of 10 million people, because their god, Viracocha, meant "White Man". Eventually, though sooner or later, the Indians learned over time that these invaders from the East had nothing to do with the civilized, humane, and instructive “White Gods”. They saw that they came not to give, but to steal. In a short time, the white man with the mask of religion would rob the gold, silver and precious stones of the Indians; they would destroy artworks, statues, literature of them; they would do everything to erase the culture of Indians. A soulless emptiness had collapsed on the Indians, their memories, traditions and cultures, which they had been proud of throughout history, had been brazenly crushed underfoot. These ruthless people, who had just arrived, were settling in their holy land, destroying the nature they embraced. Their ancient, very ancient civilization was fading. Manico Serra de Leguicamo, who reported to the Spanish King Philip II of the Incas in Peru, said that they did not know what crime and immorality were until the white man came, but that they changed rapidly, pattern themselves after the white man: “Once there was no evil, but now there is almost no good left!” But why? What was the truth? *** 2- FROM TEMPLARS TO MASONS TO THE PRESENT DAY: WHAT WAS THE "NEW ATLANTIS" IDEOLOGY ACTUALLY? [A brief and unknown history of the New World from 1500 to 2000s] SECRET LINKS TO QUEEN ELIZABETH, AMERICA'S FOUNDING FATHERS, SIR FRANCIS BACON, COUNT OF SAINT GERMAIN AND THE RUSSIAN KREMLIN This is a long story spanning the entire 6,000-year-old Kali Yuga age, and in this second book we will unravel several very important and never-before-known secrets that date back to these ancient times of human history, along with our hero, Oracle Bruno. The Age of Kali Yuga, also known as the Age of Struggle or Chaos, which began with the Great Calendar of Prophecies of the Mayans around 3122 BC, is similar to the current Iron Age. There have been so many epic battles in this dark age, and the true history of the current era, defined by long-standing conflicts, is not only very long and extremely complex; many of the most important events and personalities hide their dark past somewhere deep. What is known and written in the history of this era is very few and limited. It's like the top of an iceberg above water. Well, this second book will also allow us to understand this important fact. So much so that this story continues to the present day. In order for us to understand the current age of conflict, we need to understand several important connections intertwined in human history throughout these multifaceted millennia of epics that graphically reflect the events there. The most important of these are Egypt, Sumer, Persia, Ancient Greece, the Roman Empire, the British Empire, and finally the United States of America. However, what is written here in this book will primarily deal with the latest Anglo-American chapter in modern history. So, we'll start our story here. *** In the 1500s, a new era begins with a new century in the Middle Ages, while everything will start again with its own enslaved colonies in Spain and Britain. As with what has happened in the past, it is colonization that provides the center of what is written here, and the beginning of the path and events to the new world is the Elizabethan era and Queen Elizabeth I of England. Because, 15. and 16. during the century, there was a significant change and break in the world, and during the two critical and formative periods that shaped these events to this day, The New Atlantis project had to be designed and greatly advanced. To put it simply, the seeds of the desire for personal freedom and national sovereignty that flourished in 16th century England; two hundred years later would completely germinate and establish a new world on another continent known as the New World, on American territory. A history leap from the Elizabethan and Jacobean periods (1558 to 1625) to the ten colonies before and after the American War of Independence (1770 to 1783) and unexpected great developments in world history are still no better understood even by the most knowledgeable historians. The deep mutual relationship between the many great characters of the court that led to the execution of Queen Elizabeth (and King James) and the Founding Fathers of the American Republic has never been fully drawn or adequately accepted by history. As a result, much of real history has been lost, blurred in the fog of time, or deliberately misrepresented by these winners who write the history books. Just like, after 100 AD, with the dispersal of Jews around the world, the closing of an era that had continued since King Solomon, and the beginning of the Golden Age of the Roman era, as in Jerusalem; London effectively became the center of the world after the decisive defeat of the Spanish Armada in 1588. Well, that was the path to the creation of the British Empire. Of course, this process would have prepared a path to the creation of America even 200 years later. This power would symbolize the dazzlingly rich potential of the institution, described by both contemporaries and historians as “the largest community of merchants in the universe” and described in English as the “British East-India Company” and new business methods that could be both cruel and exploitative. Now this historical evidence is also clear evidence of why Britain was evolved as the center of the world by the elites so early to become the British Empire, where the sun never set, spreading all over the world. It should therefore be understandable that the English-speaking nations of the world eventually emerge as the most powerful and wealthy and influential elements on earth. Well, the extraordinary fate of the United States also stands in the middle as strong evidence of the vision and determination, planning and execution of these large-letter men and religious scholars of the Elizabethan era. The substitution of the United States as the “NEW ATLANTIS” to the world as a little-known fact is the result of a highly secret, a hundred of years “MASTER PLAN” initiated by key members of Queen Elizabeth's court. This same “MASTER PLAN” continued later, gaining more power during the “Jacobean” “Jacob” period that immediately followed, with America's official declaration of establishment confirmed by the kingdom of Britain in 1776. It is already clear that Queen Elizabeth's reign, in many ways extraordinary and unique, was distinguished from other kingdoms and empires around the world. But it was the advisers who acted unusually wisely and indeed skillfully in his court who laid the groundwork for the development of the plans of these secret societies. Well, in the first place among these talented advisers was Sir Francis Bacon (1561-1626), who was considered by some of the world's great writers to be directly responsible for many of William Shakespeare's works. As we mention in detail in our first book, three centuries before the Elizabethan era, there was Roger Bacon (1214-1294), an English philosopher and Franciscan priest, often regarded as the “Father of the Scientific Method”. The fact that both Francis Bacon and Roger Bacon share the same surname can come as no surprise when their true connection is revealed. Just who were these two giants of British history to understand the facts is enough to look at this? How and why did these two people influence the founding of the United States, namely New Atlantis? We understand today that these two Bacon, Francis Bacon and Roger Bacon, are two proofs of this and, given the whole medieval process, it seems to be two cornerstones. *** Why was this connection between these two mysterious men living in the Middle Ages, the two Bacon – Roger Bacon and Francis Bacon – so important? Because they both played very important roles in the formation of the New Atlantis. Each envisioned a time when the New World of the West would be found by its own citizens and colonized in time. Both understood the importance of whether these new lands remained intact to be re-unearthed from the “ashes” of the original Atlantis, which had sunk at sea 12,000 years ago. In some esoteric people, it seems that the original Atlantis, advanced in both scientific knowledge and applied technology compared to our post-modern civilization, was – self – doomed and destroyed by the widespread abuse of various technologies by the societies living on it over the ages. In fact, it was claimed that Atlantis sank into the Atlantic Ocean due to heavy and disastrous abuse of its extremely powerful asteroid deflector technologies. The three points of the Bermuda Triangle still stand before our eyes as permanent evidence of the regions of Atlantis, which are home to the centers of its crystalline energy- generated superhuman technology. The crystal-based highenergy grid was not only used to power Atlantis, it was also abused by malicious rulers whose population eventually increased excessively, leading to a tendency to rebel against God, and who eventually began to worship Satan and led corruption to control them, and as a result, Atlantis was buried in the waters. For the last 400 years, all the nations that have tried to claim and steal the Atlantic Ocean have been home to the same souls from Atlantis who have come back today to fix it. According to some esoteric information, it is understood that the Kings and Queens of the British monarchy that ruled before and during the British Empire were actually the reincarnated souls of the Roman Empire, but all this is actually for the newly established lower, that is, the New Atlantis. So, everything from the Middle Ages to the present day was prepared for the New Atlantis. It can be easily seen today that the modern nations surrounding the North Atlantic want to be filled again with the reborn souls that lived in Atlantis before it sank into the sea about 12,000 years ago, and this is the main big project that needs to be realized. Well, Roger and Francis Bacon, with the exception of the count of Saint Germain, together with Christopher Columbus, make much more sense in the establishment of this new world order than any other historical figure of the previous millennium. They are directly responsible for setting the stage for the New Age of Aquarius – The Age of Science and Technology. In his book "The New Atlantis", Francis Bacon's contributions to the establishment of this civilization were described as follows: "Bacon is also called the father of the idea known in philosophy as empiricism (experimentalism is the idea of achieving scientific truth and knowledge through experimental studies). His work was to establish and popularize inductive methodologies for scientific research, with the method often referred to as the Baconian method or simply the scientific method. His every scientific and philosophical request for a planned procedure that explores everything natural was the basis for a new transformation in the rhetorical and theoretical framework for science, which still surrounds most appropriate concepts of methodology today. Now, more than beliefs and feelings, according to this new human model, Bacon had built a rational, questioning and always critical mind foundation, that is, the ‘new human’ model. This new human would question and criticize everything he encountered in a skeptical manner and try to reach the knowledge of truth by using his pure reason, in a materialistic manner and in an irreligious way..” *** Just as we described in the first book, Isabella I The Queen of Spain, started the colonization process of America by helping Columbus with all her financial support, while the civil war was continuing at full speed in her country; similarly Francis Bacon, who was of more importance to Elizabeth than any other royal adviser, was actually engaged in the “processing of the land” of the new world, rather than philosophical thought and scientific method. His plans were part of a plan to establish the New Atlantis in the virgin regions of North America, in many and various works of Literature originally written under the name “William Shakespeare”. Every Shakespearean comedy and tragedy, history and composition of poetry was coded to spread this secret knowledge to its many secret collaborators in this new realm, which they described as The New Atlantis, as was the case throughout the planetary realm. Not only that, he also wrote the first English translation of the Bible –the Revolutionary King James Version. In other words, Bacon is personally responsible for producing two of the most important literary works in British history. After all, now the King James Version of the Bible and the whole Bible has become the most liberating work of religious literature in the whole Christian world (Christendom). Ultimately, the papacy (or inquisition decisions related to the papacy, judicial processes, courts, etc.) the process of getting rid of the doctrinal authority of mysticism and Christian occultism (Magisterium), as well as the Christian world and the whole world with it, significantly accelerated in this direction with Bacon's preparation and publication of the King James Bible. So, as for the non-competitors of literary non-dying masterpieces of "William Shakespeare" ? Do you think all this and the similarities could be a coincidence? The artistic beauty and spiritual wisdom of almost every play and sonnet of Shakespeare has inspired countless souls over the centuries! Shakespeare's works can now be called works written under the influence of bacon and The New Atlantis in which he conducted his project. He also used these literary masterpieces as a means of service to educate, organize, empower and enlighten people in their quest for personal and national sovereignty, respectively, of citizens and nations of other nations. But in later centuries, he led great rebellions that pushed him to seek independence for each nation, until the great French Revolution. Now, let's look at his famous strings in this direction (From Hamlet): To be, or not to be: that is the question: Whether 'tis nobler in the mind to suffer The slings and arrows of outrageous fortune, Or to take arms against a sea of troubles, And by opposing end them? To die: to sleep; No more; and by a sleep to say we end The heart-ache and the thousand natural shocks That flesh is heir to, 'tis a consummation Devoutly to be wish'd. To die, to sleep; To sleep: perchance to dream: ay, there's the rub; For in that sleep of death what dreams may come When we have shuffled off this mortal coil, Must give us pause: there's the respect That makes calamity of so long life; For who would bear the whips and scorns of time, The oppressor's wrong, the proud man's contumely, The pangs of despised love, the law's delay, The insolence of office and the spurns That patient merit of the unworthy takes, When he himself might his quietus make With a bare bodkin? who would fardels bear, To grunt and sweat under a weary life, But that the dread of something after death, The undiscover'd country from whose bourn No traveller returns, puzzles the will And makes us rather bear those ills we have Than fly to others that we know not of? Thus conscience does make cowards of us all; And thus the native hue of resolution Is sicklied o'er with the pale cast of thought, And enterprises of great pith and moment With this regard their currents turn awry, And lose the name of action.—Soft you now! The fair Ophelia! Nymph, in thy orisons Be all my sins remember'd. (William Shakespeare-1564-1616, Hamlet, Act III, Scene I) *** 3-INTRODUCTION TO THE UNKNOWN HIDDEN HISTORY OF THE WORLD Secret Sects, Organizations That Rule The World 1 - Great White Brotherhood WHAT IS THE GREAT WHITE BROTHERHOOD, WHAT ARE ITS ACTIVITIES? Throughout history, faith sages all over the world are said to have been in contact with the “Rising Leaders” of a top-secret underground sect or organization that ruled the world, supposedly hiding in the Himalayas. In 1876, the founder of Theosophy, the famous mystic Helena P. Blavatsky claimed that he communicated with these "Leaders of Wisdom and Compassion" and received messages about the process of evolution of the human spirit. Blavatsky believed that all beliefs spread from a very old world religion, and the Great Leaders wanted us to explore this religion and abandon Western philosophy and practice the mysterious sides of the east. This structure, which the Great Leaders, Madame Blavatsky, also stated, communicated with, existed on earth for thousands of years, and it was thought that they have raised important people who influenced world history, including philosophers such as Buddha and Confucius and prophet Jesus. This secret doctrine and school to which these great leaders were attached was part of a very secret structure that could connect with an extraterrestrial race, which had been on Earth for millennia, and was just like a part of an ice mountain that appeared on the surface of the water: -GREAT WHITE BROTHERHOOD- In fact, Blavatsky's faith depends on an old belief that these eternal leaders are based on the tradition of choosing a new member as a leader, which appears every century, demonstrating their material and spiritual achievements. Perhaps one of the most well-known names of these mysterious leaders is the Count of St. Germain. This mysterious man, called the Count of St. Germain, was a member of these great leaders and appeared in many places fifty years after his death, spreading the work of this community around the world. Modern Organization of the Rose Cross claimed that the Count of St. Germain was the person responsible for spreading these magical works around the world. It is also believed that he was seen in Paris in the 1920s under the name Fulcanelli, warning people about the progress of atomic science. Other leaders also made connections to the present at some critical times, at unexpected moments. Where Are The 100 Underground Cities? There were also some other famous people who were in contact with this secret structure. Napoleon Hill, for example, was an important bestseller writer in America from the 1940s to the 1960s. In his last book, he wrote that he had received messages from an unnamed leader and admitted that he had written his works because of him. This unnamed leader was someone in the Himalayas who taught mystical knowledge at the school of immortal leaders and was proficient in dealing with the subject of Spiritualism. In the book, this school is clearly mentioned, these studies are explained. As a matter of fact, this information was also used in Bram Stoker's worldfamous book “Dracula”. Apart from these, recently found in an ancient book in a used bookstore in Europe, India-located on the border of Nepal, in the Himalayas on a mountain secret, “Scholomance” referred to a school every year, ten were students, and at the end of the training period, a person elected to serve the devil it was. Education in this mystical school was based on the mystical teaching of King-Prophet Solomon, as well as magic. In addition, it was reported that some world-renowned writers and artists and even statesmen in ancient times were interested in these works, including, for example, the Roman emperors and the great philosophers known as Plato and Aristotle. This school has been presented to humanity throughout history by changing its name, and its last name was given by Sir George King, who was also the founder of the Aetherius Society. Sir George King (1840 - 1909), a member of the British royal science academy, was the 20th century founder of the "Great White Brotherhood" society of 144 leaders. According to Madame Blavatsky, this community lived in the mountains, studied the spiritual development of humanity, and even studied the solar system, the astrological alignment of stars and planets, and galaxies. It was also claimed that the community of Aetherius produced cosmic energy to create sacred places. Already, some sacred places in the ancient world radiated energy (For example, “Gobekli Tepe”, located in southeast Turkey, the oldest known historical relic, or Ancient Egypt, the Himalayan mountains, or the Mayan pyramids. Atlantis, on the other hand, was the largest of these energy centers), and therefore it was always a debated fact in history that they were energy centers. Again, an American astrologer named Linda Goodman in her third book Star Signs wrote that; in 1970 Christmas, in a hotel room in Los Angeles a man who had an Oxford accent, that said he lived in a private training center in the Himalayas had come, and his name was Nathan and he was a Zen, Buddhism and Yoga expert. Nathan's goal was to find and educate reasonable people. If these leaders or teachers are still alive and prefer bodily life rather than spiritual world life, we need to know their goals and where they come from? Above all, these immortal leaders, according to the narrative, used underground passages in 100 underground cities that they had established in untouched areas of the Himalayas, and these passages went all the way to the inner world. And there they believed that there lived a superior race with technology far superior to us. They also said that in these schools, they welcomed and connected visitors from there. Some people and leaders who were associated with these people also said that the day was approaching when they would explain their secret technologies and some work of spiritualism. They were going to explain all this openly to the world one day. Maybe 500 years after the Middle Ages, in other words after the 2000s. *** THE MYSTERIOUS MAN WHOM THE HISTORY BOOKS NEVER MENTIONED BUT WHO PLAYED THE GREATEST ROLE IN THE FOUNDING OF MODERN AMERICA: WHO WAS THE COUNT OF SAINT GERMAIN? As with the story of the discovery and founding of America, history books are often silent when it relates to the latest events that led to the creation of the New Atlantis on this new continent. However, the lost and distinguished members of world history who carried out this great project are the overseers of the Great White brothers, who still lie in the shadow of history and stand behind the curtain. And no one has heard of such unique great ascended masters as the count of Saint Germain in the history books? Who has heard the names of Kuthumi and El Morya, Maria Blavatsky, Maha Chohan and Djwal Khul, Lady Nada and Lady Portia, apart from the few? Indeed, who were these and other ascended masters, who assumed great responsibility for the physical well-being and spiritual development of the current human race, and what were they actually working for? FIs it for the good of mankind or for the service of another master, Satan? Even only by understanding the Great White Brotherhood and its indispensable role in saving the present race of humanity can we fully understand the true story of the New Atlantis. For this purpose, when viewed from an esoteric point of view, there is no more prominent and important person, such as the count of Saint Germain, to an extent incomparable for the last 1,000 years. Count Saint Germain, as it is known in the background of the founding of the American Republic, eventually known as the United States, in the process of emerging as an entity and the subsequent formation of privacy still stands, by the date officially encourage you to consider hiding. Had it not been for his guidance so far, his deep spiritual wisdom, and his all-encompassing unusual knowledge that informed the entire “American creation initiative,” perhaps America in its present form would not have existed. The photo is quite distinctive by the fact that the Mysterious St. Germaine Count (visible on the far right in the photo) was already dead while taking it. His official biography states that he died on 27 February 1784. May July 31, 1831 to May 8, 1891, according to most of her biographers, Helena Blavatsky lived. This is the power of an ascended master, a power that has become immortal by defeating time. There are three important points of information to know about the Count of Saint Germain:  The first is that this giant among men is not an ordinary person, because he is known as a great ascended master and the Supreme Leader of the Great White Brothers.  The second is that this Count St. Germain has been chosen as the Guardian of the Violet Flame for the current age of humanity (Quan Yin was the previous Warder of the Violet Flame).  Thirdly, Saint Germain is considered the “father of the Republic of America” and the secret patron saint of the “United States” in the highest circles of the Great White Brothers. None of Count St. Germain's outstanding roles should have been taken lightly. Surely, in the affairs of the current human race, he should not be disrespected by those who do not know the important of his purpose. Count Germain's mission was, in a nutshell, a sacred mission in which planet Earth maintained its superiority over the benefit and ascension of humanity, which few souls could measure in any age. The fact that history books written by men with narrow agendas represented him in a limited and superficial way did not diminish the light of his enormous contribution to humanity. Therefore, anyone, both wise and ignorant, would serve well by giving a very clear insight into the true workings of the Great White Brotherhood of Saint Germain. Well, the Count of St Germain, who is also considered the Founding Father of the Modern American Republic, was a wellknown silhouette in 17th century European capitals, suddenly appearing in different places at different times and having a reputation in many places. Fluent in most of the European languages of his day, the Count also proved to be a very talented diplomat with unrivaled oratory and Great Prophecy (the power to see the future), and often came at the perfect time. Many of his diplomatic efforts were designed to ensure that the new 13 colonies of North America, namely the offspring of modern America, were supported in every way possible. In these many acts of etatism, St. Germain's actions, mission and purpose of his life were compared with Sir Francis Bacon, who saw the coming of a future utopian society established in this New World. Because the Count of St. Germain was also a great Prophet, just like Bacon. Francis Bacon's greatest hope was the creation of a utopia in the Atlantic during his lifetime; the realization of the “New Atlantis” project in the form of a free country and a free community of people, governed by the principles of Freemasonry and Rosicrucian. This new principle would govern the social, political and economic life of this new nation on this new continent. It is therefore understandable why, as Lord Chancellor, he took such an active interest in the colonization of America, and why he sent his son to Virginia as one of the first colonists. Because, in America, this utopia, which George Washington and Benjamin Franklin hoped to create, was most prominent through the revolutionary activities of George Washington and Benjamin Franklin, through the pen of Thomas Paine and the writings of Thomas Jefferson, a new nation dedicated to political philosophy. This mysterious man who plotted America's secret destiny, namely Count Germain; described by Manly P. Hall (1901 1990), one of the most understanding modern occultist scholars who followed Bacon, as a mysterious Rosicrucian philosopher who ate strict vegetarian food before the signing of the Declaration of Independence in 1776; beyond that, he imagined it as a superhero who could not only walk above ground, but even on water. Moreover, this mysterious person was someone who was a close friend and teacher of Franklin and Washington and seemed to play an important role in the founding of the New Republic. Why most historians still don't mention him is a complete riddle, because it sure existed, but it had to be a big reason to hide it. The count of Saint Germain was also known as “the professor”. Along with Franklin and Washington, he was a member of the committee selected by the Continental Congress to create a design for the American flag in 1775. His design was accepted by the committee and given to Betsy Ross to transition to the first model. A year later, on July 4, 1776, this mysterious stranger that you have never heard of the name, Independence Hall suddenly appeared again, and collected the men presented a fearful exciting address; Rosicrucianism Freemasonry and the founder of the ideals of Francis Bacon, Thomas Jefferson wrote, and ideals with a catchy name, the real name he was the creator. It is said that the count of Saint Germain again encouraged the first signature, which played a fundamental role in the founding of America, mysteriously reappeared in the signing of the “Declaration of independence”, and when all the current conditions were paralyzed by detention. The Count of Saint Germain: when and where he was born and raised, where he died is absolutely unknown, he has appeared and seemed over time in different parts of the world over the last 1,000 years and disappeared again. Who exactly is the Immortal Count of St Germain, where did he come from and where he went, there is no definite explanation for this. What is said and known about him is that he knows dozens of languages, has vast knowledge, prophecy and foresight, and appears somewhere once every century! Also known to be involved in secret sects. The count of Germain has been the subject of many films and novels, and throughout history, immortality has been one of the first phenomena that comes to mind, even the most important. In fact, it was said and told that the count was actually a time traveler and traveled through time. The most interesting ones were: THE STORY OF PROPHET JESUS TURNING WATER INTO WINE: The Count of St. Germain said that he was with him just when Jesus performed this miracle. Of course, people weren't going to believe him just because he said so. But, about this incident, the count gave such details and historical information that even the most stubborn people were confused. He gave such fine details that even experts on the subject and Biblical experts are almost dumbfounded and cannot even oppose it. A French artist used to say that he was "the man who knew everything." The nickname stuck with the Count of St. Germain. THE TALENTS OF THE COUNT OF ST. GERMAIN WERE INCREDIBLE: He was able to bring all faulty metals, including diamond, into perfect form, and he could perform tremendous works with by using the science of alchemy (Alchemy is the science of turning ordinary metals into each other and eventually gold and diamonds - a condition that can only occur in millions of years as a result of heavy nuclear reactions at the center of massive stars, including Leonardo Da Vinci and Isaac Newton, the world's leading scientists, famous Masonic masters and mystics have work on this science). It's as easy as pie for him to do 2 or even 3 difficult and attention-demanding jobs at the same time and in different places. When asked where did you learn so much, your eminence, the count answered, without hesitation, “My education comes from the Pyramids!” The only book of biography written about him is called: “The Secret of St. Germain/The King” Even the famous philosopher Voltaire used the following words for the count of St. Germain: "A man who knows everything and haven't t age for a day.” The count of St. Germain was also an occultist, alchemist, diplomat, seer, doctor with a specialty in medicine, and a horribly rich man who constantly changed places at certain times (so that people can't notice that he is not getting older), and the source of his wealth was unknown, his money never ran out. We mentioned that the life of the count of St. Germain was the subject of films and novels. By the way, in Umberto Eco's famous work “Foucault Pendulum”, The Count is the main character of the book: AN INTERESTING CONVERSATION WITH THE IMMORTAL COUNT OF ST. GERMAIN: “At one of the feasts held at the Count's house, the Count of St. Germain mentioned that he knew well the Roman governor named Pontius Pilatus (The Roman governor who allowed Christ to be crucified). In addition, he described in detail the governor's palace and what happened at dinner one by one. The Cardinal, who had been invited to dinner and was disturbed by the speech, turned to butler of the count and asked: You seem like an honest and respectable man. I can accept that your master can turn worthless mines into gold. He may just be a chatty man, but tell me, I saw Pontius Pilate, and is it believable that he said he was at least 2,000 years old? Don't you think this is overrated? In the face of this question asked by the Cardinal, butler gives the following answer: I don't know, your highness, I have been the butler of your esteemed count for 450 years!” (Source: Umberto Eco, Foucault's Pendulum) 2 - Other Secret Organizations The Great White Brotherhood, an extremely powerful and secretive entity on earth, often acts together with specially organized human instruments and their spiritually taught organizations. Many people are now only superficially aware of these groups, whose past is still mysteriously hidden, as their names are only mentioned on the internet. The secret sects associated with the Great White Brotherhood were Freemasonry and the Illuminati, the Rosicrucians and Theosophy Society, the Knights Templar, and finally the sect of Sion, and the Jesuits above all. In fact, humanity knows very little about them, because most of the knowledge has been hidden. But it should be noted that in the 1,000 year dark history of the past, those who have the greatest influence in human history – those who do not have names and do not come to the fore – are actually the most hidden and dangerous communities at the same time. For this reason, almost all of the groups in question have "somehow" begun to be associated with the "freemasonry", which is the current "incarnation" etc., drawing hatred only on the Illuminati and putting all the dirty crimes on it. This is an extremely important point. Especially during this "age of conflict" (also known as Kali Yuga), when any powerful and/or influential organization or group becomes public, it primarily draws attention to itself. The more prominent and well-funded this group is, the more likely it is to become the target of those who want to take over the group. In each case of "hostile takeover", by explicit or covert methods, these secret societies have inevitably had a chance to get worse. When we examine them throughout history, the Templars in the Middle Ages are a good example of this. It is precisely for this reason that these organizations, working directly on behalf of the Great White Brotherhood, almost always keep their work secret. Their efforts are a result that the disclosure of their members or their agendas can never be put at risk. Therefore, it is important to understand that secret societies never announce even their most benevolent public behavior in their lifetime, never write, and are unlikely to appear on a private Wikipedia or Internet page. Unfortunately for many brave change agents who have joined several named Secret Societies over the centuries, these communities were eventually usurped secretly or forcibly, unfairly damaged by antagonism or hostility to the system and/or religions. As an example, it is a well-known fact that many of the Founding Fathers in the United States were Freemasons of different abode, depending on their allegiance to their members in England and their place of residence in their own home colonies. George Washington and Benjamin Franklin are just two of the most famous Freemasons among these known Founding Fathers. Whether these great men are 33 degrees Freemasons and above is irrelevant to Freemasons, since their main focus is on the mission of bringing British or American society or any other world society under the yoke of imperialism. But in doing so, imposing its own imperial order on humanity by putting its own goals and system in the center is the second part of the plan. It is a top-secret imperial order and structure that is invisible and no one can clearly show its existence, just like the global giant companies that direct the economy of today's countries or even the world. In fact, the Masonic network established throughout the history of the 13 colonies was vital to many military and political successes throughout the entire Revolutionary War. Had it not been for the clandestine operations of the Freemasons, the many underground manoeuvres and spy networks built to protect the fledgling colonies, the United States might still have been a British colony. In particular, George Washington is known to have created a highly effective spy network beyond America, suggesting that even the American Revolution may actually be an unearned victory. Freemasonry, Christian Rosenkreutz and the Order of the Rose-Cross WHO IS CHRISTIAN ROSENKREUTZ? Christian Rosenkreutz, the founder of the order of the Rose Cross and said to be a member of a noble family, was orphaned as a child. He grew up in a convent. At the age of sixteen, he traveled to Arabia, Egypt and Morocco and traveled for a long time in Muslim countries. He eventually went to a strange city called “Damcar” on the Indian side, whose existence is disputed even today and whose location is not exactly known. There he learned mathematics, astrology and magic. He translated the book ‘M’, which is said to be a book full of mystery, from Arabic to European languages. He exchanged ideas with Eastern wise men. Rosenkreutz is believed to have been influenced by the Brethren of Purity, Ikhwan-I Safa, in Basra. Safa had an intellectual resemblance with his Sufis. Inspired by these teachings, he created an organization called “Rose Cross”, and thus began the first movement by gathering a group of disciples around him. The Temple of the Rose-Cross, Theophilus Schweighardt Constantiens, 1618 Mysterious legends were derived around Christian Rosenkreutz. Accordingly, his grave remained hidden for a long time when he died. The grave was found again during a construction. On the tomb was the Latin phrase “open it a hundred and twenty years later”. Just beyond the coffin was a secret door. Members of the organization decided to open the door and they opened it. Inside, they found a lamp that never went out, a circle-shaped ritual carpet on the floor, and a sevensided cellar, as well as many magi, that is, magical materials. Of course, there was also the body of Christian Rosenkreutz, who had a book “T” in his hand, which the Rose Cross considered as a holy scripture. Besides, it was said that the body never decomposed. It's just that even this event was an indication of how much the organization cares about the secrecy that has formed around an internal myth. In other words, the organization influenced its members by creating an inner mythology. Christian Rosen-Kreuatz, whose name means ‘Christian Rose Cross’, allegedly lived for one hundred and six years. ORDER OF THE ROSE CROSS The Rose Cross is an organization whose name is most often mentioned among secret societies, and the cover of mystery on it cannot be fully explained. Although this organization seems to be interested in mystical issues, it has been working with great patience for centuries to establish the philosophical foundations of the world in its secret plans. The Rose Cross appeared in Europe at the beginning of the seventeenth century, and in those years the mysterious Rose Cross proclamations began to circulate from hand to hand. Behind these proclamations was a sign combining the ‘Rose’ and ‘Cross’ motifs, which were of symbolic importance in ancient mythologies and Christian theology. It was this rose and cross emblem that gave the organization its name. The emblem consisted of a rose placed in the middle of a red cross. Red, the dominant color of the emblem, symbolized the blood of the prophet Jesus, while the cross signified the wisdom and divine consciousness of the Savior. The rose was also purity, and it was feminine and symbolized virginity. The cross, on the other hand, was masculine, describing creative energy in this form. The rose and the cross, two in one, were the totality of feminine and masculine unification. In addition, the rose had some other mythological meanings in history: the Rose symbolized Aphrodite, one of the ancient Greek goddesses, and also meant ‘light’ in Latin. However, it also had a counterpart in ancient Roman and Egyptian beliefs: it was the symbol of Harpocrates, the God of Silence. In addition, the Virgin Mary was ascribed to the Rose of Heaven. By the way, the fivepointed star used by various organizations in our time, that is, the pentagram, is also a typical Rose Cross sign. It is seen that the Order of the Rose Cross became intertwined with Freemasonry over time and dates back to the present day. In England, in the 1650s, the Order of the Rose Cross had a powerful structure. At that time, the Order of the Rose Cross were taken into lodges under the title of “accepted elected Freemasons” and used the symbolism of bricklayers' guilds to spread their teachings. They described themselves as symbolic Freemasons trying to establish the spiritual temple of humanity. As a new practice, they changed the ritual procedure by combining Kabbalistic and Hermetics views in Masonic temples and introduced the confession ritual and the rank of ‘Master’, which gave the disciple candidate the death, decay and resurrection of Hiram. Modern Freemasonry took its most typical Mystic symbols from this Rose Cross mysticism such as "Pelican", "Phoenix" which is born of its own Ashes and TwoHeaded "Eagle". As with Freemasons, the Rose Cross' faith is ultimately based on the Torah, and some of its rituals point to the area where ancient Palestine was. In the Rose Cross chapter of a book writing secret sects, the depiction of Jerusalem is as follows: "A mountain appears in the painting called the last room, and from there a river flows. A tree on the edge of this river has twelve fruits. Above the pedestal that appears here is a Golden Square. On each face of this square are written the names of the Twelve Tribes of Israel with three angels. Inside this square is a cross, in the center of the Cross lies a lamb…” This depiction is taken from the book of 21st Apocalypse of Saint Jean and is the same as the Jewish understanding. In its early days, writers interested in the Rose Cross and Freemasons made secret references to the reconstruction of the Temple (The Temple of Solomon) with Kabbalistic symbols in their books. But only experts who came from that mindset and knew the icons could understand them. Emblem and Cross of the order of the Rose Cross. Its resemblance to the emblem of the Great White Brotherhood and the Star of David is notable. Two examples of this include the concepts of “Land of the Sun” and “New Atlantis”. These concepts are the expression of Rose Cross mentality. In these esoteric narratives and teachings, there is a yearning for a “New World Order” in which the desire to return to The Lost Kingdom of the Prophet David, ‘Return to Paradise Lost’. In fact, the concept of the ‘New World’ in the language of such organizations consists of the reconstruction of their lost old world, the wisdom and civilization there, and this plan is not for all humanity and is not suitable for everyone to know and understand. It only includes the chosen brothers of mystery cults. In this way, the Rose Cross was a completely secret organization, just like Freemasonry. The organization's senior cadres were hidden behind a full dark curtain. There was a pyramid-shaped board called ‘The Unknown Greats’, and lowerranking members never knew who the senior responsible were. Because it was common to claim that the Unknown Greats lived in a secret underground country, namely Agartha, under the Himalayas. Agartha was a colony of Atlantis. Among the documents of this secret organization, the most important is the Fama Fraternitas in German, known as shortly 'Fama', it was about one hundred and fifty pages. Fama is a special address written to the rulers, scholars, and elites of Europe. Between the lines, the book targets the catholic church and speaks of the need for continuous universal reform. The author of Fama is Rosenkreutz, who is also the founder of the order. The book contains reformist pieces. Indeed, the coat of arms of Luther (Martin Luther, 1483 - 1546), who initiated the religious reformation and Protestant sect in Europe, also has a Rose Cross sign. The Reform movement, on the other hand, is already known to be encouraged by segments called “Shrine”. The meaning of the Shrine was "Rose Cross". Symbol of the 18th Degree Rosicrucian Knight in the Masonic Scottish Rite. The detail in the symbol that the Pelican and her offspring fed by a red object (blood) is striking. THE ILLUMINATI In May 1776, the German philosopher Johann Adam Weishaupt (1748 – 1830) is said to have founded the Illuminati in Bavaria (a state in southeastern Germany in the Middle Ages). Coincidentally, the founding of America (July 4, 1776) coincides with 1776, the year the Illuminati was founded, the date of the signing of the Declaration of Independence. At first, it seems that the Illuminati began their mission with quite noble and good intentions, under the leadership of Weishaupt as a figure. Its charter was a secret society whose purpose, as the founding declaration shows, was to raise humanity. However, as the usual role played by secret societies, he would once again show history that there was never an end to abusing good causes, taking advantage of man with a real and valuable goal, and starting to plan to use all other humanity for the benefit of some specially chosen people. The future direction of the Illuminati, the position and role of Weishaupt just a few years ago, while there was a simple role given to him to become a Canon (Law) Professor, which he held only by the Jesuits; then things would suddenly change and the Satan would have gotten worse for a great cause, not as planned. Weishaupt began his formal education at the age of seven at a Jesuit school. Later, he enrolled at the University of Ingolstadt, graduating in 1768 with a doctorate in law at the age of 20. In 1772 he became professor of law. His fate here would have led to a pure and idealistic Weishaupt undergoing a very serious change in Jesuit thinking and perspective, resulting in him becoming a lawyer (an expert on Roman Catholic law, a law professor). The Jesuits were a secret structure known throughout history and feared by everyone, as they were the military branch of the Roman Catholic Church, led by an elected senior Jesuit general, who unusually led a military-like organization and sat in a hierarchical structure as a true dictator. For these and other reasons related to the political climate that prevailed in Bavaria, it seemed that the future mission of the Illuminati would essentially be separated from its first charter. After all, the fact that the same Bavarian environment became the hotbed of Adolf Hitler's National Socialism is also not an accident of history. Not only were Hitler's favorite haunts Bavaria (for example, the Eagle's Nest in Berchtesgaden), other true and background supporters of Nazism also used this small state of southern Germany as a springboard to the progress of the Third Reich. Christian Socialism was a new religious, political, economic and social system advocated by the community of Jesus (i.e. Jesuits), which they now began to build everywhere. Just like the Rose-Crusaders and the Knights Templar, unknown facts have been hidden from the outside world for centuries past, except for very few but very few superficial ones. Because they had hidden their rituals and practices and doctrines with a large number of documents and ancient scrolls. Unless there is an in-depth understanding of these secret communities and their respective founding fathers, it is unlikely to fully understand and illuminate the important events, wars, religious, political and social movements, reforms in the world that have taken place over many centuries in history. This dark relationship networks, as practiced by many secret high-level individuals used by the Illuminati and Freemasonry today, without the aid of all these true spiritual practices or sacred rituals, they say, is a really weak undertaking to reach God. It may seem that the 18th century Illuminati were genuinely interested in spiritual pursuit and enlightenment, especially in the context of the common religious values organization. But today's Illuminati, in fact, is just a reference to a name that was stolen from there, that is: -ILLUMINATI– The activities under this name have turned into a demonic structure that is not even remotely related to this mission, original organization, or mission that was established at first. Some researchers have suggested that the Illuminati of the 21st century, after two and a half centuries of Jesuit influence, reached their current highest-level incarnations. The Illuminati and the Society of Jesus (Jesuits) are currently structured as a military organization that prepares soldiers for the Fake Christ (Antichrist, or Anti-Jesus), whose evangelical members are called Soldiers of Christ, but they actually expect, in order to force God into the Apocalypse. In fact, apart from an exceptional few religious-seeming celebrities, it is clear that they want a life that is completely irreligious and far from God wherever they go. However, just like the Jews, it is clear that the Illuminati and the Jesuits have been strengthened and survived by perception operations in history, as they have been forced to be expelled from many countries since their founding.. - Who Rules The World? – The Secret of the Great White Brotherhood Knights Templar, Jesuits, Illuminati and eventually Freemasonism And ultimately Satanism will rise in the world. Because the Great White Brotherhood will want it. *** People are no longer believers, They don't believe the Church and the Pope no more. The New Atlantis rises in America and then falls. *** New Atlantis took its ideas of innovation from extraterrestrial beings and Ancient Atlantis, but made it look like its own discoveries. *** After being stopped by Doomsday Wars, That's how the big end will come, After the Kali Yuga and Iron Age conflicts began. (Prophecies, Oracle Bruno) S anta Maria, after 4 months of traveling in the Atlantic Ocean for a long time without any breaks on any land, was finally about to approach somewhere off the island of Hispaniola. During all this long time alone on board, Bruno had taken many notes on the secret of the Pi number, the mysterious sects that rule the world, the new apocalyptic prophecies that he resolved from the Bible, and many more, examining all the books and documents that he brought with him, and he wanted to show them to his sister Sofia before he went ashore. Bruno carefully studied the emblem of the Great White Brotherhood for a while and with great excitement called his sister Sofia to his side: - "Okay, Sofia, I think I've solved the secret of this temple that tells the symbol of the organization. It's not really a single temple, it's a symbol that maybe hundreds, thousands of them, it's told in a single emblem. Look carefully at the emblem, there are two inverted triangles intertwined and a square cross in the middle. If you look carefully at the corners of the triangles, they all have one small circle. Now, listen carefully: This, that is, the triangle with the tip facing upwards, actually points to the pyramids on land on Earth that Atlantis founded. Looking down at the tip, it shows the underwater pyramids. The Great White Brotherhood knew this great secret, and they codified it (with the help of the Templars and Jesuits as well) into their emblems and all other esoteric structures and artifacts. There are some of their names, their current name is the Great White Brotherhood, and some of them will appear in the future, but I'm sure that we have a diabolical structure planned throughout history, and this is a great plan that extends into the future. In fact, the small circles at the corners of the triangles contain a much bigger secret. The thing is, those little circles also point to something, a flying object, that is, Alien we saw that night came from and other flying UFOs. He also points out that they go both on land and under the sea. Look, three are at the end of the up-facing triangle; the other three are at the end of the down-facing triangle. In addition, these 6 circles show 6 main doors that reach Atlantis from the Earth. They are also sorted in the same way, 3 main doors on Earth (numbered 1,2 and 3); 3 main doors, that is, under the ocean of water (numbered 4, 5, and 6). And the Red Cross in the center shows the center of the world. He also points to the throne of Satan floating in a sea of fire inside the world. The Great White Brotherhood that he represented on earth is deliberately marked with a Red Cross and is placed right in the center of their emblem. One of these crosses may also be in the center of one of the Great Mayan pyramids. It opens to the main door, and in fact they worshipped it in these temples, in fact, the reason for Atlantis' extinction is hidden here, and the place marked on some maps as “Middle-Earth”, that is, the place where humanity first began, the place mentioned in the Bible was not the Middle East, but actually Atlantis, known as Middle-Earth. Sins Sofia, Sins! Atlantis worshipped something wrong instead of God, The Devil, and so it sank into the ocean because of its sins. They came out of the service of God and worshipped Satan in their last time, and so they were buried deep in the ocean, it all happened overnight, and Plato was right in his writings. Now, let's talk about Columbus. Eventually, Columbus also learned this great secret and tried to get rid of this sin, that is, the first sin of humanity. Well, that’s why he came all the way to this land, maybe his goal wasn't to explore America, or he didn't even know such a mainland existed, but he found something, some clues about uncovering this secret hidden in these pyramids. Now, after we divide the emblem of the Great White Brotherhood like this, I want you to look at it again. If you look at the entire shape, that is, at the whole, you will see a giant eye that looks at the world from the inside, now look carefully again:” Sofia: - "Bruno, my God! So you're saying that the Great White Brotherhood knew where Atlantis was, and they coded these flying vehicles (UFOs or USOs, whatever) and all of them into their emblems as the locations of Atlantis' main entrance gates? So, the Atlanteans and the Great White Brotherhood actually worshipped Satan? Did you mean that? In order to serve the world and their great master Satan, who watched it from the inside, they appointed a person as a master at the beginning and end of every era on earth and passed this information on to him from generation to generation. Indeed, all this is incredible, and none of it is told in the history books, Bruno.” - "Well, what about that red square cross in the center is the symbol. What's that, Bruno? Isn't that the symbol used in Christianity that we know?” Bruno: - "No, absolutely not, Sofia. That symbol also exists in some Mayan inscriptions, ancient Indian texts, and some very old temple walls around the world. The reason it's red is because it symbolizes the color of blood and fire. But there is another, much more important reason why the Great White Brotherhood uses that symbol everywhere in particular. Sofia is the origin of humanity, that is, the first man. I mean, Atlantis. All civilizations, including Christianity, took it from Atlantis and used it. The meaning of this symbol was hidden in 4 arms, 4 equal arms and each arm represents 2, that is, it represents balance and duality in the universe at the same time, and it is a symbol known as “Swastika”. In fact, this symbol is much older than any other known symbol. That is, the bipolar world also represents the plus/minus (+/-) and up/down ( directions at the same time. ) Down is two worlds inside the Earth and up is two worlds above the earth; think of it as East and West, two opposite poles. At its center is 1, that is, Atlantis, which rules it from the inside and is symbolized by “1”. Therefore, the outer world is represented by 4 pieces 2, i.e. “2 2 2 2”; the inner world is represented by “1”. Accordingly, everything proceeds along a date line that occurs between these numbers ‘1’ and ‘2 2 2 2’. Christianity used it as its own symbol, accepting the birth of Jesus for 1 year, of course, other sects and secret organizations interpreted it in some way and used it according to themselves. For example, like the Templars or as in Christianity, Jesus is a person and has 12 apostles, such as the symbols ‘1’ and ‘12’. But it was the Great White Brotherhood who knew its meaning best. Well, each arm represents this giant duality in the world, we can show it with 4 pieces 2 as follows:” This coat of arms, which Columbus and his Navy used, was actually known for thousands of years. It was also a symbol of the Knights Templar and the Great White Brotherhood. Notice the resemblance! The Secret in The Poles There are 2 geographical poles on Earth, which determine the direction of ships, and There are 2 magnetic poles that move the compass. *** As the last prophecy approaches, in the last century, compared to the last 500 years, The magnetic poles will shift much faster than in all ages. *** And this will be the beginning sign of the last prophecy to live, Like, climate change along with great destruction and disaster.. (Prophecies, Oracle Bruno) Sofia: - "I get it, Bruno, well, there are empty areas, openings that are not drawn at the North and South Poles, indicated by an arrow sign. There are shown this way on some maps, what's their meaning?” Bruno: - "It's a different and longer story, but I can tell you this, it shows the northernmost and southernmost parts of the world, the polar points. Apart from the known geographical poles, there are unknown magnetic poles, which are constantly changing throughout the ages. I mean, there are 2 magnetic poles on earth along with 2 geographical poles. What works compasses is the magnetic poles, and the compass always shows the magnetic north pole, not the actual North Pole. With each major disaster, one era closes and the other begins; these magnetic poles and climates change with it in the world, and when these changes occur, disasters in the world also increase. Well, the age that we are in, the age of last polar change, so there is no later. The Mayans also knew this fact, and that's why they encoded this important information on their tablets and calendars. Now look carefully at the figure I drew below to understand the similarity between them: A drawing showing the geographical and magnetic poles of the world with a Mayan disc. Magnetic and geographic poles were actually known to the Mayans for thousands of years. Notice the resemblance! Perhaps the poles have never been visited before and we do not know if there is life there yet, but I can tell you that I have seen this in some of the old maps and books I researched. From there, there are gates to the inner world, Atlantis. After Atlantis completely sank under the sea, those who lived there somehow reached these tunnels and retreated to the inner world. Perhaps there could even be an underground ocean in the interior of the earth much larger than on the surface of the earth. Well, these openings at the Polar points show us this. Here's what I don't understand: why 4 pieces 2? I mean, if we bring them together: 2.2.2.2 I think that number is something much more important. It's a secret beyond everything that we know. When the Great White Brotherhood took this emblem from Atlantis, I think they knew the reason, but they never explained it, maybe it was just a secret they gave to their great masters. Think about Columbus again, Sofia. He put this mark on all his sails and his ships, including Santa Maria. I think he knew a lot more about it, but unfortunately he died before I could talk to him. Anyway, even if I did, I didn't think he'd tell me. My uncle Reyes warned me about it before he died..” *** Bruno was right what he thought, but he would never know why his uncle was actually killed, just like the tens of thousands of other innocent people sacrificed by the Inquisition.. "4 Months Later, June 11, 1511” - The Atlantic (Atlantis) Ocean - S anta Maria had been decking the deep blue waters of the Atlantic Ocean for about four months without a break. Captain Garcia and his crew, as well as the Oracle Bruno and his sister Sofia, had been through a difficult four months during this long and grueling ship journey, and survived one or two severe storms that passed dangerously in the ocean and barely survived. Santa Maria was worn out, but miraculously did not sink in those severe storms. But during this process, Oracle Bruno deepened his research and began to combine all the clues on those islands, where they found traces and signs from Atlantis with the other mysteries of the number of Pi (), in his mind and move towards a larger conclusion. All these analyses and data he obtained were cornerstones of the great path that led him to the solution of the great prophecy. As Santa Maria headed west in the Atlantic Ocean in the direction of the island of Hispaniola, the next stop of its route; it had been about 5-6 months since it reached the Canary Islands, and in almost all this time, not a single piece of land had encountered it on its route. The entire team began to think that this was a really interesting and strange situation, and that it was so creepy. Because about 2/3 of the supply stock on the ship was about to run out, and about half of the drinking water stock was also depleted. All the food stock on board could be enough for the crew for 2 more months at most. After that, they definitely had to anchor off an island or piece of land and go ashore. According to captain Garcia's calculations on the ship's route and location, Santa Maria was supposed to reach the coast of Hispaniola about 1-2 months later. Unless, of course, there have any complications or storms in their way. As they survived the winter season for most of the journey, they were unlikely to encounter a storm for now, but there was a possibility of a domestic or pirate ship attack at any moment. Because there were two other dangers waiting for them near Hispaniola: one was the brutal wild natives and the other was the invading and hostile Spanish soldiers who settled on that land left over from Columbus's disbanded Navy. Garcia was aware of that too, and he had placed 12 cannon on the ship for it. *** After another week of closing in his cabin and examining all the clues he had obtained, Oracle Bruno looked pensive into the open sea, the distant horizons he had left behind, after getting up on the deck of the ship on a sunny clear day on a Saturday morning and getting some fresh air. Now, as if he was missing more of his memories and his life in Spain that were left behind. And he couldn't help but think of his bad memories and his mother. The only thing that comforted him was that he was going with his sister Sofia in the middle of this vast sea. He could not already know what his fate had prepared for him in the future, but now he had new hopes and excitement growing in him. When he saw Bruno, Captain Garcia came out of his cabin and immediately went down to the deck and greeted him: - "Good Morning, Señor Bruno! It's been almost a week since I didn't see you, if I hadn't seen you here, I'd think you left the ship." said he with a laugh in his loud and rude voice. When he laughed, Bruno responded laughing as: - "Hahaha, you made me really laugh, Captain, god bless you! You crack a good joke again.” Captain Garcia: - "Where have you been, my friend? You've barely left your cabin in a week. Or have you been continuing your mysterious research and reading books again?” Bruno: - "Yes, Captain, exactly. As you said, I needed to concentrate for a while. I'm sorry to keep you in suspense. I hope you're not worried.” Captain Garcia: - "No, my friend, of course I wasn't worried. I thought that you were dealing with those things. I hope you have found something important again and maybe you can inform us about it. " Bruno: - "Of course, Captain, I have told Sofia about some things, and I would be honored to inform you too. I found some very important things, especially about the number of Pi we encountered on this island and those mysterious statues and that Great Pyramid. So much so that all this may be new things that can change even the known history of mankind. I even have a new 'History Theory'. But I don't want to confuse you by telling you all this now. I don't want to distract you, especially when Santa Maria is going through such big and dangerous waters. I'd rather you focus on the sea and our route ahead than my works. Just as the most important thing in the world is his prophecies for an oracle, I don't want to influence and distract you from the course of the journey, which is the most important thing for a captain.” Captain Garcia: - "Actually, you're right, my friend. I'd better not keep my mind busy with this kind of things for now, like you said. Everything has to go well and everyone has to do their job, I totally agree with that.” Bruno: - "See you then, captain, I'm retreating to my cabin again. Please be sure to let me know if there is an emergency on board.” Captain Garcia: - "Of course, my friend, I'll surely inform you. Don't think that I've forgotten, you're the boss. Huh, I almost forgot. Sofia asked about you a few times, and I told her you were busy. She said 'he neglects to eat fruit because he is constantly working'. I think you'd better listen to your sister once in a while. She told me to give you that basket, take it with you when you go to your cabin if you want. Snack while you work, your face looks paler than ever, my friend.” Bruno: - "Thank you, Captain, for thinking of me. Yeah, I neglected myself a little, that's right. I know that when I concentrate like this, I always neglect my basic needs. It's been a habit, maybe for a long time.” Captain Garcia: - "Adios, my friend, see you later!" said the captain and stepped slowly towards his room. As Bruno headed back to his cabin, he again thought of the connection between the number of Pi and Roger Bacon and Atlantis. What kind of a relationship was there between all these? Did Bacon know about the American continent they were about to discover? Could he have known all these and the history of Atlantis? It seems that the history of the world and those who wrote or directed it have drawn a very different scenario for humanity than it seems. That was the most important thing Bruno has noticed for now.. "2 Months Later, August 1511” - Land Ahead– A fter 2 months of more dangerous and difficult sea travel, Santa Maria finally managed to reach the coast of the island of Hispaniola. Captain Garcia took intently from the captain room and look distant horizons with his binoculars and shouted loudly: - "Hey, land ahoy! Look at there! Ruiz, inform the others immediately, land ahead. Finally, land appeared, and thank God, just as we were about to run out of food and water, we finally reached land.” As soon as Ruiz heard this shout from the captain, he ran and immediately landed on the deck and called the others to the deck. Then Bruno went to Sofia and the other female employees' cabins and called them on deck. "What happened, Ruiz, what is the reason for this fuss, is it important?" said Bruno and Sofia while they headed excitedly towards the deck. Ruiz responded with an excited tone of voice: - "I don't know, Bruno, the captain said there was a land in the distance. He asked me to let you know right away. He asked me to gather everyone on deck. Come, see with your own eyes. Look ahead, a piece of land appears on the horizon. This could be an island or a mainland.” Bruno: - “Hooray! That's very good news, my friend. For a moment, I even thought that if we didn't reach land, we would die of hunger and thirst. Thank God we finally made it.” *** All the crew gathered on deck, taking their important belongings with them. Everyone wanted to get ashore as soon as possible and feel safe. A 6-month continuous cruise made everyone exhausted and tired. Everyone, including Bruno and Captain Garcia, looked unkempt. No one has even been able to shower with clean water for a long time. Captain Garcia gave his first command in his bushy and thick voice as he headed for the deck: - "Well, Senor and Senoras! Everybody get ready, a land has appeared a little further away, and soon we anchor and go ashore unless something goes wrong. But before we land, I have something important to say. So, you two, Ruiz and Bruno, come here, and the others can begin preparations for landing. Check the lifeboats and prepare to launch. Also, the water is getting shallow here, I don't know how close we will get to land, but just in case, gather all the sails of the ship and ten people will go down to the oars. We'll paddle the ship slowly and move it ashore. Is everything clear?” - "Ruiz, Bruno! You two come with me. I have something important to tell you.” Ruiz and Bruno said together: - "All right, captain, we'll be right there.” They then went to Captain Garcia. *** Captain Garcia started the conversation: - "Well, gentlemen, we are finally about step on to land. I think the island we're going ashore on is Hispaniola. I checked it for a while with binoculars, I didn't understand it at first, but I think it's because I haven't seen this part before, because we're walking around the southern side of the island. However, it was better for us. Because it will be safer for us to get to the island from the south, and by this means we will also stay away from the soldiers in the former Spanish colony that Columbus had left, who is in the other large group of islands in the north. But still, we need to take our weapons with us, just in case, and enough ammunition and gunpowder. When we first get to the island, our first job will be to find food and water again. For this, we will divide the staff into two groups, gentlemen. Half of them will provide the ship with food supplies and water supplies, and the other half will take their weapons and explore the island with us.” - "I want you to know priorly that this is a very large island, gentlemen. Although it is not as large as a continent, it has quite large territory and, of course, an indigenous people who live on it. I'm guessing that a lot must have changed in this land in 10 years, since those bad years when we first came here and lost a lot of people. Considering that in these 10 years, Spain has now completely colonized this island; since Columbus died, the war with the natives in the north of the island must have been in full swing over these past years. Who knows, they may have already invaded the north of the island and even established settlements and cities with the support of Queen Isabella. But again, that because I left the Navy and now I'm not a soldier of Columbus, they won't going to trust us at all, and even if we told them that were coming from Spain and we were Spanish; and probably we are seen as a traitor a little bit, the enemy accused us of treason to the Queen, and probably first things first, they would be execution us by firing squad in front of everyone in the court of the Inquisition. Well, that's why we have to go ashore with an armed unit, and we have to be ready to fight them when necessary. Unless we come across those brutal wild island natives before them." Bruno pipe up: - "I completely agree with you, Captain. But, there is a problem. You said the southern part of this island was safe. We also looked through binoculars, and there are no traces of people or settlements. Don't you think this is odd? How can we be sure that we will encounter these brutal wild natives a little further from the shore?” Captain Garcia: - "Of course, we can't be sure of anything until we land right now, my friend. Together we will wait and see. Yeah, if we're done talking, let's go back to the others, and I think we're about to dock the ship. Ruiz, come down, order the rowers to stop. It would be dangerous to approach shore more, the ship could run aground. Let's anchor here.” Ruiz: - "Okey, sir! I'm going to the rowers now. I'll tell them to stop rowing and drop anchor. As you said, the water is getting shallow here. Already we are very close to the shore, about 200300 meters. We'll continue with the lifeboats. I'll tell them to anchor the ship here and lower the lifeboats..” "Land To Hispaniola Island” S anta Maria is anchored in a small bay (off present-day Cape Salinas) located at the southernmost tip of the southern coast of Hispaniola Island (the large island which includes present-day Haiti and the Dominican Republic). The entire crew filled all 12 lifeboats previously prepared. Taking the necessary equipment and some food, weapons and ammunition with them, they set out to the shore by lifeboats to go ashore. As day was about to dawn, on a tropical summer morning in August, the crew of Santa Maria, with the first lights of the sun, came ashore again off the southern coast of Hispaniola, the largest group of islands closest to the Americas, months after lifeboats. The sparkling turquoise-colored temperate waters of the Caribbean Sea swayed the huge hull of the Santa Maria in light waves, while the mysterious and pleasant squeaks of the wooden part of the ship could be heard even from the beach. Looking at Santa Maria from afar, it looked like a pirate ship. Although they tried to bring the ship as close to the interior of the cape as possible, the huge hull of Santa Maria was visible from all over the coast, even from afar, as shallow waters prevented it from taking it further into the bay. Although this was a security hazard, there was nothing to do. It was impossible to destroy the ship with a magic wand or pull a giant curtain on it and hide it. Captain Garcia, as an experienced sailor, knew all this very well, and although he calculated everything, he still felt suspicious as he left the ship, and that if the natives or colonial soldiers of Columbus saw the ship from afar, they could get in big trouble. As in any profession, even if you took every precaution in the Marines, there was no way to fix the last thing, and sometimes it could have fatal consequences. But the safe area formed by this southern cape where they took refuge and this small sheep that made an indentation inward was the safest area where they could anchor. Although it was quite difficult to transport supplies and water to the ship in this situation, it was impossible for them to do more at this time. In fact, it was a great miracle that they came here without loss and came ashore. If they had not reached land for some time, all the crew would have died of hunger and thirst. After captain Garcia's soldiers and the entire crew of the ship reached shore, they took several laps on the beach as their first job before setting up camp. Because once they settled in, it would be difficult to get back to the ship quickly in any time of danger. For him, from the very beginning, Captain Garcia wanted to be absolutely sure that this was a safe place. *** A dozen soldiers, along with Captain Garcia and his deputy Ruiz, toured and checked the perimeter on the beach, which stretches along the 2-3-kilometer coast. They investigated whether there were any human marks or signs of settlement. There seemed to be no sign. This large island with long wide beaches, which stood as if on the banks of a vast ocean, together with high mountains extending inland and frequent and extensive forest cover extending to its foothills, created a unique natural landscape in this desolate tropical island country, far from Europe. Strange and eerie sounds, resembling the sounds of birds and predators everywhere, echoed into the interior of the island. Although it has a similar climate to the earlier islands they went, it was as if there was a more mysterious weather on this land. Even the vegetation, forests and animals on the island were quite different and varied from those in Europe and Africa. While this was the case even on the coast, how was the situation further inland? I wonder if there was any other great danger waiting for them there. They would have found out before it was too late, but this time he would have paid dearly for it, Captain Garcia and his soldiers.. "War with The Natives” A fter all the crew at Santa Maria had disembarked, the first few days were spent exploring the island. A group again dispersed into the island to provide supplies and water, as always. Bruno, along with Captain Garcia, again tried to find some traces of Atlantis, as he always did, and they made a small map of the southern part of the island. As always, Sofia and the female staff spent their time sunbathing on the beach and going to sea. The fact that the woodland was close to the coast made it easier for them to set up camps and transport food and protect them from wild animals. The only downside of this southern part of the island was that the elevation suddenly increased as you went inward from the sea, and the difficulty of overcoming the steep hills immediately behind it. In particular, it was necessary to climb a steep wooded area and hill for exploration and supply of supplies to reach the interior of the island. But in the first few weeks, Captain Garcia and his crew managed to overcome all these difficulties and managed to transport enough supplies and water to the beach, despite several wild animal attacks. There were no significant casualties, but a few weeks of hard work and the terrain was quite rough made it difficult for them to work, causing them to become tired. After all the staff had finished their work, they retreated to rest in the camping tents they had set up on the beach for a while. *** Well, at this time, they heard a number of tamtam and pipe sounds that could be heard from the depths of the forest, albeit quite forcefully. Captain Garcia and Bruno listened to the sounds, but at first they couldn't make sense. After a while, it felt as if the voices were approaching them. Bruno, who paid even more attention to the voices: - “Oh God! What is all this noise? Or is that what I think it is? Natives!” Garcia: - "Yeah, my friend, you are right. Just as you predicted. These are the voices of those ruthless wild natives. I recognize them from the sounds of pipes and tamtam. I think they're coming this way, and because they saw the ship, they must have understood our existence. Well, we're in trouble, my friend. As far as I'm concerned, we don't have much time to get out of here while the ship is moored. Sounds are getting closer, maybe they'll be down on the beach soon.” Bruno: - "So, what is your plan, Captain, what are you planning to do? You don't think we're just standing here and being dinner for the natives. If we're not going to run, I hope you have a better plan. Joke aside, I don't think my meat is delicious at all. I don't want to sit on the stomachs of the Natives.” Garcia replied, laughing and a little nervous: - "Of course I have a plan, my friend. See those hills behind us? Well, now we will disperse with our weapons and take cover in these hills against them with 20 people in two groups, and when they approach the beach, we will all open fire on them together. We'll hide the other two groups here in a safe place with the women, so we'll camouflage them and hide them in the bushes on the beach to hide. Of course, at this time, we will try to cut off their arrival and repel them. But we don't know exactly how crowded they are, but maybe when we kill a few of them with a gun, the others can get scared and run away. That's my guess and my plan, and it looks like the best tactical battle we can do is right now. The natives do not have weapons like us, but remember, they are very good marksmen and they have poisonous arrows and of course they have killer spears with pointed tips, they also have sharp stone axes that they use to scalp, when they can get someone as wounded he has almost no chance. If we can't scare them back when we first open fire, we will screwed, my friend. Because we don't know how many are them or how crowded they are, and we don't have enough ammunition to last forever. Our gunpowder is limited, and our path is very long and dangerous. Who knows, how many more enemies we'll face in the new places we're going. I have no idea. I hope you understand, my friend, do you understand me?” Bruno: - "Yes, Captain, I understand you very well now. Your plan is very rational and looks really great. I think that's the best we can do. So, let's start preparing right now, because the voices are getting closer. Let's act before it's too late, the natives will be here soon. As you said, Captain, they've spotted the ship, and they know there are people here, and we're invading enemies that need to be destroyed for them. Actually, I think Columbus caused all this. Because ever since he and his soldiers arrived on this land, the locals have been nervous, that’s why they will see every person they see as an invader and an enemy. Unfortunately, the good times when peace and tranquility prevail in this land are perhaps about to end. Now they will think that anyone who has just arrived on this land is an invader and an enemy, Captain. Although we try to be friendly and treat them well, all this will not change this fact in the future. But, at the moment, there is no choice but to do as you say to protect ourselves and our ship.” Garcia: - "Now you sound like an oracle, my friend. I think you finally know what I mean. You can delay things, but you can never change the outcome, you can just stop the retrograde a little bit, that's all. Think of it as a ship that starting to sank. Even if the ship gets water for a while, it survives, but it will definitely sink in the end. Well, that's exactly what you're talking about.” *** After the conversations between Garcia and Bruno ended, they took up positions with their weapons in the wooded area on the hill in two groups. Hiding in the bushes and camouflaged, Garcia's soldiers were now carefully waiting for the natives, who were rapidly approaching. As the sounds of tamtam and the pipes approached, they saw about 100 natives approaching the slope of the opposite hill, ready for battle with arrows and spears in their hands. Bruno, Garcia and his soldiers didn't expect such a crowded native warriors, and frankly, they seemed a little scared now. I wonder if they could be effective when they shoot at them with guns in their hands. Or would that make them even angrier and more emboldened and more attacked? They didn't have a chance to know without trying. *** The natives attacked the hill where Garcia and his soldiers were located, accompanied by a large noise of war tamtams. The 100-man native warrior approached them about 200 yards away, and "Fire, fire all together!" Captain Garcia commanded, shouting high. At the same time, 20 people randomly fired their weapons at the natives. Now the smell of gunpowder and smoke rose after the hill from the trees. And those who waited on the beach watched all these gunshots and tamtams from afar with anxious and fearful looks. When the first shot was fired, about 10 natives in the front row were killed and they fell to the ground covered in blood with their weapons. Although other natives in the back row who saw them suddenly became afraid and panicked, a tall and burly one with a large and furry hat on his head, who was apparently the leader of the crowded group and the group further back, shouted something in a language they did not understand, and encouraged the natives to attacked again. The tamtams began to be played again, and this time all the native groups attacked all at once. Throwing arrows and scattered among the trees, they moved again to put Garcia and his soldiers under a circle-shaped siege. Captain Garcia, who saw that he was about to disperse in the forest and panicked, gave a second command to surround them: - "Fire again immediately and retreat quickly, they are coming at us. They'll surround us, hurry up, fire!” Again, the sound of 20 guns firing simultaneously was heard, and 5-6 more natives were shot and fell to the ground. But arrows and spears had already begun to hit trees near Garcia and his soldiers. Moreover, the natives quickly began to disperse into the forest to surround them. It was impossible to kill them one by one when they were scattered in the forest, and in this case a native could become a full warrior, a warrior that dangerous enough to kill even 4-5 soldiers. In his previous expeditions, Columbus had lost hundreds of his men in civil wars with such natives in this way. Garcia had witnessed some of those. Well, while all these bad scenarios passed through Garcia's mind, one of the poisonous native arrows shot through the throat of one of the soldiers as they retreated. The soldier, who suddenly collapsed on the ground screamed "I can't breathe, help!" and began to struggle rolling on the floor. After a while, he was horribly dead with growls and foam coming from his throat. Now, a random rain of poison arrows from all sides began deep in the dense forest. Seeing this horrific sight, Garcia turned to his soldiers: - “Run, quickly run! Run as fast as you can to the lifeboats on the beach. And inform the soldiers on the beach by shouting, so they will gather immediately, and we will return to Santa Maria immediately.” As they tried to quickly run down the hill, another 4-5 soldiers who were left behind were shot in the back with arrows or spears, and they also fell to the ground and died horribly. Moreover, seeing them dead, the natives were not content with this, and they first scalped, decapitated the wounded soldiers, tied their bodies to long spears with the sharp stone knives they brought with them, and began to carry them into the forest. It seems that these natives, who were also cannibals, would cook and eat them. For them, everything in this forest was a hunt, especially when you wanted to harm or destroy them. *** Garcia and his soldiers began to run at even faster speed when they saw all this terrible sight. Every once in a while, they would turn their backs and shoot to scare them again, but it was a futile effort. Because the natives were scattered in the forest, it became impossible to hit the target in this frequent and large rainforest. Now, the best they could do was get down to the beach as soon as possible and carry whatever they brought with them to the ship in lifeboats and get out of here as soon as possible without any more casualties. Indeed, they did so. Eventually, 17 men from the 22-man military group, along with captains Garcia and Bruno, managed to reach the beach alive. They said, "hurry up, pack up, we're getting on the boats!" Sofia, along with other soldiers on the beach who heard his call, and the female personnel next to him were already ready. It had been easy for them to recover now, as the ship had been provided with a sufficient supply of water and supplies for the previous few weeks and had been moved. Camping tents and a chest of belongings on the beach, as well as weapons and ammunition that they took with them, were loaded into lifeboats, waiting for Garcia and his soldiers to return to the ship as soon as possible. When the locals saw them running away, moving towards the lifeboats, they attacked again, this time all together, and started chasing them again with arrows and spears. Garcia and his men no longer thought of anything but throwing themselves into the lifeboats as soon as possible and getting away from here. Looking for time to escape, they didn't even have a chance to turn around and shoot at the natives again. *** This brief battle and conflict with the natives had demoralized Garcia and his men. The hustle and bustle and chaos continued until they got to Santa Maria, when they escaped by riding in their lifeboats. Even, for a while, the clashes continued even into the water of the sea. At this time, Garcia's team did not suffer any casualties, but 2-3 more of the locals were shot dead. Fortunately, the fact that the canoes of these Hispaniola wild natives, who were adept at using fast canoes, were not with them during the conflict prevented a possible major disaster and invasion that would occur in Santa Maria. Otherwise, things could get much worse, the ship could be plundered by the locals outright, or most of the soldiers could be lost. Fortunately, Garcia survived this short skirmish with lose only 5 soldiers as casualties, and he and the others managed to reach Santa Maria alive, taking with them their provisions and other important belongings. But, there was something very important they forgot as they hurriedly escaped on the beach: the large notebook that Bruno dropped from his bag during the brawl as he escaped and took all his notes. Inside this notebook were notes taken throughout the entire trip and important clues to Atlantis, and they certainly couldn't return without leaving it here. At least Bruno would never do that. Maybe the purpose of his life was now in that notebook. After everyone had returned to the ship and docked and moved, Bruno noticed the situation when he opened his bag and realized that he did not have a notebook. He immediately ran and told Garcia about the situation. The locals were still waiting on the beach with spears and arrows in their hands, looking towards the ship. The distance between them was 300400 meters, and they could not reach the ship, but Bruno never agreed to leave without his notebook. Somehow someone or himself had to go to the beach on a lifeboat and pick it up after the locals had left. They came up with a plan for it. So Santa Maria would pretend to go to get the natives away, but he would wander around the bay around the cape, waiting in a place invisible to them, far from where the natives were, and with a lowered lifeboat, someone would come to the beach and pick up the notebook. Indeed, they did so after waiting for a while. Santa Maria circled the sheep and waited in a suitable place. Bruno, who was riding in a downed lifeboat, and a soldier accompanying him quickly made their way to the beach, where his notebook fell. After searching for a while, they found the notebook among the rocks. The wind dragged it here, and it was a little wet with the waves, but it was in good shape. Bruno, who carefully took the notebook from where it was located: - "Here it is, my friend, this is the place I dropped it. It looks fine, but it's a little wet" saying and rejoicing, he took it and put it back in his bag, and then: - "Let's get out of here, man, I don't want to stay on this island for a minute anymore. I don't want to meet those horrible Indians again, we have to get back to the ship right now" they boarded the lifeboat again and quickly pulled the oars, accompanied by the extraordinary beauty of the setting sun over the western lands, and quickly made their way to Santa Maria. It was about to be evening, and the bright redness of the setting sun over the ocean, combined with the forest-covered hills of the island containing a thousand and one shades of green, created a wonderful natural landscape in this new, and perhaps in this quiet and wild western land that no one had ever reached before. "The Lost City of Atlantis On the Island of Jamaica (Xaymaca)” S anta Maria wandered for several days around Santa Domingo Bay, overlooking the Caribbean Sea south of Hispaniola island, and then began to head again in a westerly direction to continue its course. Their wandering from the south of the island of Hispaniola, by chance, protected them from the attack and encounter of Queen Isabella and the Dominion troops attached to Spain in the north, Columbus's colony. For a week, Santa Maria made its way westward to the island of Jamaica (the name the ancient natives gave this island Xaymaca - this word in the native language means the Land of Trees and Spring), which was in front of them. Captain Garcia was sure they were on the right course. Moreover, this route they came from was safer than the earlier return Road. He was also certain that Columbus' colonies had established settlements just north of Cuba and Hispaniola, the other two major islands to the north. Therefore, this new route, which they had not traveled before, would have protected them both from attacks by the Spanish colonies and from the unstable sea depths and Stormy adverse weather conditions of the North, which were much shallower and choppy than the South. Jamaica, formerly known as Xaymaca, could also be natives, thinking that they would anchor near the island and after making a small expedition on the island, they would continue their journey in a westerly direction decisively. Captain Garcia didn't want to face those wild natives again and lose men by fighting. But will things really go the way he hoped? *** Well, just as the captain was thinking about it and moving slowly in the direction of Jamaica Island at the end of the 6th day, at midnight, a rolling occurred along with a large noise in the rear of the ship. All of a sudden, the people on the ship, who were rolling at sea and stood with a great noise, experienced a great shock. Captain Garcia admitted to himself: “Now I think we're screwed, what I was afraid of finally happened to us, I think the ship ran aground." Captain Garcia, in a hurry, immediately began to run towards the back of the ship, which ran aground: - "Hey, you guys, run down to the back of the deck where the cabins are, I think the ship ran aground. We can't move, so check if the ship is receiving water. A few people go down immediately, look at the bottom of the cabins, the space under the tanks, check if is there water.” The two ship personnel ran and headed that way to check the ship's lower floor under the cabins located in the rear. They checked everything with gas lamps in their hands. They found no trace of water or cracks. Although the bottom of the ship ran aground, it fortunately stopped swinging over the water without damage, and the part of the water that ran aground with the help of the tidal effect and lifting force that began at that time survived at the last moment without breaking up. Giant chunks of rock just below the ship were visible even from the deck. Looking into the sea with gas lanterns, you could see where the aground place came into contact with the underside of the ship. In fact, these rocks were easily noticeable, but somehow Captain Garcia couldn't notice or see them at the last moment due to the intensity and fatigue. Captain Garcia tried to make several moves to save the ship. The crew on the paddles at the bottom forced the ship to move for a while, but Santa Maria didn't even move. They did not want to push any further, as excessive friction would damage the ship. The best thing to do would be to stay here, anchored for the night and look for any other solution when the day lights up. Fortunately, they were very close to the island of Jamaica, only 2-3 km away the coast of the island was visible, and it was possible to reach the island by lifeboats. *** After anchoring and spending the night where they ran aground, they made an effort to move the ship again in the morning when the day lit up, and when they failed, they decided to wait for the ship to get rid of the Rock where it was sitting, perhaps under the influence of waves or tides. According to Bruno, these pieces of rocks were also the remains of Atlantis and the continuation of its traces as far as Central America. Giant rectangular blocks that looked as if they had been cut neatly under the water were a sign of this. As the day brightened, Bruno and Captain Garcia went down to sea with the help of a lifeboat and studied these large blocks of white stone for a while. The stone blocks looked like they were made of limestone, and they looked like they didn't belong here, like pieces of a large structure left underwater. Bruno marked the location of the island of Jamaica in his notebook and again put a skull pirate sign on the spot where the ship ran aground. Then turning to Captain Garcia: - "Look at this place, almost as if there is a world above the water; under it is as if there is a mysterious world, perhaps much larger and unknown than it. I wonder if a giant underwater map can be made, like a map showing part of this underwater map that Alien gave me, just as it shows the land on the water? In fact, everything in the geography of land and continents on earth is also found underwater; mountains, plains, rivers, and even giant plateaus consisting of huge large plains under this ocean, where Atlantis sank. I've always wondered about this, Imagine if there were a giant map showing a detailed drawing of all the structures under water; mountains, plains, plateaus and underwater rivers, what a wonderful invention in seafaring would it be, wouldn't it, Captain?” Captain Garcia: - "It would be really interesting if what you said was possible, man. Indeed, even we sailors don't know enough about the underwater world. And most of the world doesn't care about what's going on underwater, but besides, maybe there's a lot bigger than the world on the water, as you said, I'm pretty sure of that. Especially after meeting you and your work, you're absolutely right.” Bruno: - "I think we should wait for the ship to move on its own for a while longer. If you like, let's not be idle during this time. I brought my scouting bag and notebook. The island of Jamaica is right in front of us. The name of this island on my maps is marked as Jamaica (Xaymaca) by a stranger, if you want to go to the island and go on a small expedition and return. It won't be long, captain, I don't think it's a very big island anyway. After that, we'll have lunch on the ship, we have enough time, don't you think?” Captain Garcia: - "Sure, why not, my friend. But there may also be natives on this island. Just in case, we have to take our weapons and 5-6 men with us again. The others can stay on board. For them to come, it is not appropriate for security at the moment, I do not want any more wars. I've heard that somewhere around here there is a beautiful tropical island from Columbus' soldiers. But I've heard that this island has wild cannibal natives who eat human flesh called Arawaks, I don't know how true it is, but they could be on this island. They are said to live a life completely closed to the outside world, just like the wild natives on other islands, they are quite aggressive warrior types, and in one view they come from an unknown lineage that we Spaniards call Indians, maybe they come from the Mayan race you're talking about. We haven't reached that land yet, but I think they've been on this land for 1,000 years since the time of their ancient ancestors. But I have no idea where they came from, who they were originally. I've never met them before, but I'm sure they live here somewhere. So we have to be careful, my friend.” Bruno: - "Aye, aye, Captain. Half a day is enough for me anyway. It will be enough for me if we make a small expedition to this southern coast of the island and a little inland. Anyway, according to this big map of Atlantis that I have, this is the big continent, which is our last stop before the new continent America that we will explore. When we go about 1,000-1,500 km to the west of this island, we will set foot on the new great continent, America. This means a sea journey of about 1 month in these very shallow waters. Unless, of course, we get lucky and get stranded anywhere before we run aground again.” Captain Garcia: - "We've got a long way to go, my friend. That distance you say is land distance, and with the marine unit, that makes it exactly 1,000 miles. So, are we going exactly another 1,000 miles west, are you sure about that? What if we don't encounter any land when we go 1,000 miles, then what do we do? What if this huge ocean ahead of us stretches for thousands of miles forever? Do you have an idea my friend?” Bruno: - "Trust me, captain, I'm very sure. I've calculated it all, we'll there 1,000 miles away, on the Great American continent.” Garcia: - "Okay, my friend, as you say, we have no choice but to trust you. So, everybody hangs on to the oars, let's go see what this island of Jamaica looks like. I hope those cannibals aren't here. Otherwise, I'd hate to be their lunch.” Bruno had a laugh and hung on to the paddles again. They moved quickly to the island of Jamaica with 7 people in the small lifeboat. *** Arawaks, Cannibalism and Cannibalisation Anthropafaji as a word in Latin consists of a combination of the Greek words “Anthropos” (man) and “Phagein” (food) and Means “man-eater”. This concept was used as a substitute for the word “cannibalism”, and with the discovery of America, it was also referred to along with “cannibalism” until the 16th century. The actual origin of the word cannibal, derived from the root “Cannibale” in European languages, is based on the word “Caniba” in the Arawaks language. The Indians of the Lesser Antilles called themselves “Caniba”, which means “Daredevil”, while over time this word has changed, over time it has been used in the sense of cannibal. According to the enemies of this people (the Arawaks living in Cuba and the Caribbean islands), this word means barbarism and brutality. Christopher Columbus, who discovered the American continent, also invented the term cannibal. Moreover, according to him, the word cannibal meant barbarism and brutality, just as in the Cuban Arawaks: “Further there were men, who ate people, some with one eye and some with dog faces." A similar description of this monster, one of the types found in Hartmann Schedel's history book, was also used by Christopher Columbus. On Columbus's first expedition to the West Indies, he wrote in his notebook that the natives of this place were very afraid of the “Caniba”, the one-eyed, dog-faced and man-eating inhabitants of Bohio Island (14 November 1492). Although this remains information that cannot be proven, cannibalism has thus become an interesting and popular topic in world literature and history, and has often been discussed in various sources. For example, since 1544, the Universal Cosmography of the German Sebastien Münster adorns people with their heads torn off, surrounded by skewers like sheep. In fact, this depiction also appears on the edges of Münster's maps, representing the barbarism of the new world. Such paintings, shaped by the imagination of Europeans, are also published in other publications. Similar descriptions in Martin Waldseemüller's Carta Marina, published in 1506, and in Simon Grynaeus and Holbein le Jeune's map of the world, published in Bale in 1516, are quite interesting. The depiction on the world map shows a butcher's bench where human flesh is broken with an axe, arms and legs with bottles on embers: According to Sebastien Müncter, a world map and cannibalism showing the coast of Central America (a depiction on the world map). With such examples, Christopher Columbus's weak argument about cannibalism begins to grow stronger over time and becomes a material. For example, Philoponus of Austria from the order of St. Benot uses missionaries to America and cannibals in his book defending religion. According to him, in the new world, everything is filled with children waiting to be fried, women's bodies cut on butcher stalls, men cooked on skewers: "Even a man was seen eating his children and his wife.” “I knew a man, I spoke to him, He admitted to eating more than three hundred human bodies.” The concept of cannibalism, which grows stronger day by day with such claims, has over time become a concept that covers the greatest crimes of humanity, such as incestuous relationships, child murder, eating human flesh. The concept of cannibalism, which came to light with the little Antillean archipelago, has become known in many regions such as North America, Northeast Brazil, Africa, Australia: "You've seen a cruel life from a Scytheli who eats man's flesh and drinks his blood.” Guy Le Fevre de la Boderie, 1575 *** When they reached the island's wonderful beach of white sand, Bruno couldn't believe his eyes. This island was at least ten times more beautiful and spectacular than any other place and island they had ever seen. This tropical island was like a false paradise set in the middle of the sea with a beach of white beaches adorned like pearls and lush vegetation of extraordinary beauty and light breeze winds rustling the leaves of coconut trees on the beach. When they got to the beach, they pulled the lifeboat they had come from into the bushes and hid it so it wouldn't appear. The Santa Maria, on the other hand, was visible from afar, and there seemed to be no sign that it had yet survived where it ran aground, the entire ship was standing in place as it was. After a few laps on the beach with their weapons and some relaxing in the sun, walking among the huge coconut trees where a gentle tropical breeze rustling their leaves, through the soil pathway headed into the rain forest, among the trees they moved into the island. Over the trees, hundreds of species of birds and monkeys were hanging down branches, flying from there to there. On this island there were colorful parrots of different colors and reptiles they had never seen before, frogs, snakes, giant insects, ants and even crocodiles. It was as if many creatures were gushing from all over the forest. After walking for about two hours, they climbed up the hills and climbed over a high hill. From here, a large part of the island was visible, including the interior parts. Columbus said of this island, “the most beautiful island that the eyes can see,” and he really didn't say it for nothing. Bruno, looking through binoculars, saw smooth dirt roads and bridges supported by stone blocks along the river, which extended to the interior of the island: All this seemed incredible, because who could have built it on this desolate land where none other than the wild natives lived? Bruno looked to the north of the island with binoculars in his hand and couldn't believe his eyes. About 2-3 km away from the sea, there was an entire ancient city and its ruins. There were dozens of pyramids, stone paths, bridge crossings, giant stone sculptures of varying sizes and stone structures filled with strange symbols that seemed to hide among the coconut trees. What were these structures? Why would anyone come to such a deserted island in the middle of the ocean and build them? According to Bruno, the only explanation for this could be explained by the fact that all this is only structures left over from Atlantis. Just like those mysterious structures on other islands they encountered in the Atlantic Ocean earlier. This ancient city was quite far from this hill in the south where they were located, and they didn't seem to have a chance to go there and study it. Bruno made a bird's-eye-view map of the visible part of the island and drew it in his notebook. And the place where the ruins of the ancient city are again marked with a skull pirate sign and under it: "The Lost City of Atlantis on the Island of Jamaica” He wrote and then turned to Captain Garcia: - "Hey, Captain, come here, please. See these wonderful structures? Take the binoculars, look, it's right there. Look ahead of that plain that runs to the back of the hill, there's a giant lost city hidden in the middle of the coconut trees, it's amazing. This looks really incredible!” Captain Garcia took the binoculars in his hand and looked that way: - "This is really amazing, my friend. I can't believe my eyes, who could have built all these structures on such a deserted island? I'm really starting to believe you now, son, and your Atlantis theory. I think you're absolutely right, and as you mentioned, if we encounter such ancient cities on this new continent that we will discover, all this will be powerful evidence that can even change the entire known history of the world. For the first time, we will achieve this, I absolutely believe in it, and I am absolutely sure.” *** Garcia, with his binoculars in his hand, was going to look in that direction again, when a pointed arrow, accompanied by a rapid whistle, grazed the collar of his thick dark brown leather jacket and plunged into a tree standing in front of them. A second and third arrow stuck in two trees standing right behind them, and then the sound of pipes accompanied by shouting and tamtams was heard. Yes, these were the Arawaks, the cannibal natives of the island. They realized that they had arrived on the island and followed them until they went up the hill, and when they found a suitable moment, they suddenly attacked. Suddenly, surprised by what he had suffered, Garcia dropped the binoculars in his hand and said: "Oh, my god! The Arawaks have found our trail. Bruno and the others, fire a few shots into the air immediately. I said immediately, get ready now, and we're running down the other side of the hill." As soon as Garcia screamed in such a panic, Bruno and the 5 soldiers next to him started running through the trees, squeezing down the other side of the hill as quickly as possible, after shooting a shot in the air with their weapons in their hands and hurriedly packing and backing away. Behind them are the natives of cannibal Arawaks and ahead they had now begun a deadly chase. By chance, poison arrows and spears thrown behind them were stuck in the trees they passed from right to left. After running like this for a while, he said, "Ahhh!" a voice was heard. That voice was coming from one of Garcia's soldiers who came from behind. Garcia then looked back and said: "leave him! There's no chance of survival, we'll all keep running together. If we go back and try to pick him up and carry him, they'll shoot us too, run, run faster!" he shouted. Even if Bruno tried to do something for the soldier who ran right after him and got upset, there wasn't much to do for him anymore. Even if they stopped for a minute and waited, they could have been killed by the natives with poisoned arrows. So Bruno followed Captain Garcia's command and continued to run fast, without even having a chance to look back. *** After this deadly hustle and bustle continued for about half an hour, they finally reached the end of the path at the end of the forest, but this time the present landscape standing in front of them was more terrible than the enemy behind them. Because the river that flows along the path they came from turned into a giant waterfall right in front of them, right where the slope of the hill ends. Now, in front of them was nothing but a giant waterfall 30 meters high, which flowed down. Bruno, with fear and a little fuss, turns to Garcia: - "This is incredible, look at this place, Captain. It's a giant waterfall, and it looks like there's nowhere else to run. Besides, those wild natives after US will be here in 4-5 minutes. Any idea what we're going to do now? For God's sake, tell me now, what are we going to do?". Garcia: - "Hey! Now keep your ear to the ground and listen carefully. Right now, we have to make a very critical life and death decision, my friends. Of the two options in front of us another way does not appear. First, we will either surrender to the natives who come after US, and as soon as they catch us, they will kill us, or they will catch us alive and cook us in the fire. And the second is, or we'll jump down this giant waterfall one by one, and if God helps and we're lucky, we'll swim across the river, go around the other side of the hill and try to reach Santa Maria. Of course, if the lifeboat is where we left it, I'm not sure about that either.” - "Yes, these are the next two options. Now, I want you to make a decision right now without thinking too much. Tell me, which one should we do? Either wait and surrender, or jump down this waterfall, I think our chances of living in both are equal, 50 to 50%. This may be the biggest gamble of our lives. Yeah, all in favor of waiting and surrendering, raise your hand. Hmm, yeah, just one person? What about those who say we jump down the waterfall? Hmm, well, it's four. Well, then it's decided. Now, we will jump into the water from the cliff of this waterfall, which in turn flows down. Remember, try to protect your head with your hands so as not to hit the stones when you fall down, and try to fall as vertically as possible, not horizontally. God help us, and I hope we all get out of this mess.” Bruno spoke after Garcia finished his remarks: - "All right, captain, as you said, it looks like we have no choice. I put my notebook in my bag, it looks like it's going to get a little wet, but it's okay, in the end, it's no more important than our lives. I hope we can get ashore alive and finally get to the ship. I think we need another miracle right now, God help us. Jump ahead if you want, and that's how we get the courage from you, we trust you, Señor Garcia.” Garcia took his breath deep and held it, and on the count of three, he took another deep breath. He then took his head between his arms and threw himself into the abyss down from the cool waters of the noisily flowing waterfall. Garcia's huge body had hit the water like a big rock, and after he fell, a large body of water was scattered around the place where he fell. After captain Garcia fell into the water, he sank to the bottom of the water about 5-6 meters. He began to flutter with great force to get to the surface of the water in the river. It was not easy for even a daredevil swimmer like Garcia to swim in this raging and fast-flowing river water, even if he managed to get to the surface of the water. Garcia, with his strong arms, had managed to land 10-15 fathoms in the water and climb right to the surface of the water. Garcia, who had just passed the first stage of the deadly jump, had to swim against the strong current and reach the opposite bank of the river. Garcia, though barely able to swim, finally managed to reach the Bank of the river. When he came ashore, he called out to Bruno and the others: - "Hey, hurry up, jump in order! The water's not too deep, but be careful when you jump. There are big rocks at the bottom of the river, and if you hit your head, you could die, okay?" he shouted. Bruno replied: - "Copy that, Captain, we're jumping now! Now you guys stand behind me, and on the count of three, I jump first. 15-20 seconds after I jump, you take turns after me.” Bruno and the 4 soldiers behind him took turns leaving themselves from the cliff of the waterfall to the gap below. After Bruno fell into the water, he hit a stone with his foot, but he barely swam and managed to get to shore. The other 3 soldiers likewise successfully managed to jump and swim to shore, next to Garcia and Bruno, and get ashore. But the last jumping soldier hit his head on a rock under the water and began to flutter on the surface of the water, suffering a severe head wound. Immediately after that, Garcia sent 2 of his men, saying, “Jump now, we have to pull him to the water's edge.” After that, 2 soldiers hurriedly managed to capture the wounded soldier from his arms, which were quickly drifting in the current, and pull him to the shore a little further away. The inside of the river and the soldiers were covered in blood. They waited and rested on the shore for a while, but unfortunately, although they made a tampon on his head and tried to stop the bleeding, the wounded soldier soon died. Captain Garcia Said, "Damn It!" he said with anger and sadness. - "How many more men am I going to lose before I get to the damn continent?" Look over the falls, those damn Indians came again, caught up with us. But I don't think they're going to jump down that waterfall right now, risking their lives as brave as we are. But we still have to pack up and get going. We have to get out of here and get to Santa Maria before nightfall. Otherwise, we'll never make it out of these deadly wild forests after dark. I think there are hundreds of wild animals around that we don't know about, and at least when we move forward during the day, we can see the enemy ahead. Our guns are wet, they're not working right now, but if it dries up a little, I hope it will. Otherwise, it will be impossible for us to defend ourselves in this terrible forest. Let's go, run! Come on let go immediately.” *** They quickly began to run into the forest. The natives above the falls again sent their poison arrows and spears towards the area where they were. Arrows falling like rain quickly reached and stuck in the trees next to Bruno, Garcia and 3 other soldiers who tried to escape. Fortunately, they had managed to act earlier and get away from there, managed to get out of range of arrows thrown a little further ahead. Captain Garcia's predictions were correct. The natives couldn't find the courage to jump off a cliff and follow them here. Actually, maybe they were surprised to think about how they missed them. One of them, apparently a chief, spoke to other Arawaks locals next to him in an angry tone: - “Let them go. Their weapons don't work, they can't survive that wild forest anyway. When it gets dark at night, they'll be eaten by wild black panthers or Jaguars. All right, pack up, we're going back home, Amigos. The best thing will be to leave our enemies now to nature's own destiny. From the white man, nature will take its revenge. Already, we've killed 2 of them, and the rest will die in the woods before they reach the beach. And tomorrow we'll go to where that ship is, and if it's still there, we have to destroy it, okay?” - "Adios Amigos White Man! I hope this will teach you a good lesson, and you will never set foot on this land, the land our ancestors inherited from us.” *** Bruno, Garcia and 3 soldiers next to him, who managed to escape alive and escaped from the hands of the natives, proceeded through the wild dense forest, wandering through the valley around the mountain in order to reach the beach before evening. The fact that the wild natives had given up on them had restored their morale and focused on the road again. This gap between the waterfall and the Valley bed of the river greatly extended the transportation distance between the locals and them and eliminated the chances of catching them. But this time, they had to go through this wild forest full of dangers that they did not know, and reach the beach. That meant a long road that could take maybe 2 days. Although Garcia thought they would reach the beach by evening because he did not know the way, he would realize that he was wrong before it was too late. It took about 2 days to go around the Valley and cross this forest. Including spending 2 nights in the woods, it would be quite difficult for them to reach the beach alive, injured. Moreover, the supplies with them were also scarce and rapidly running out. Because they went on an expedition, they didn't feel the need to take a lot of food with them. They proceeded through the Valley until evening. There were poisonous snakes, scorpions, spiders and huge insects and flies everywhere. A single bite of even one could easily kill a person. They moved forward, driving away Ivy and large leafy plants that appeared in front of them with large sticks in their hands. It was dark and they could no longer see in front of them. Garcia called out to Bruno: - “Hey, buddy! I think it's time to stop. We've come a long way, but there's still no beach in sight. I think we should set up a camp here, making a tent for ourselves to spend the night out of leaves and branches in a convenient place, and wait for the morning. We're tired to death, and we have to wait for the morning to move on, so let's spend the night sleeping here, what do you say?” Bruno: - “Okay, Captain. Believe me, I'm tired, too. I can't even walk, and I hurt my left foot when I jumped into the water. I have a slight bruising, I think I hit a stone hard. Alone, while we sleep at night, one person remains awake, on duty. If we all sleep, we could be attacked by a dangerous intruder. A lion, a tiger, a venomous snake, or worse, those ruthless cannibal natives who have reached our trail again. If one person stays awake, it wakes us up.” Garcia: - "Okay, man, you're damn right. Come first, all of you, let's collect these large leafy plants and use the branches and bushes to make ourselves a sheltered camping tent to spend the night. Our weapons are not completely dry, I don't think we can shoot them yet, but we still have to take them with us when we sleep at night, just in case. For now, let's dry out on the edge of the tent, shoot and try again in any attack by wild animals or natives until dark. We don't have to make noise right now and draw them on us. Come on, my friends, let's get to work, it's about to get dark. It looks like the bush between these trees is suitable for camping, so let's go there.” *** Bruno, Garcia and 3 accompanying soldiers spent that night camping and sleeping in the woods. Although wild animal sounds and strange humming and sounds came from everywhere during the night, they survived the night without any wild animal attack in this secluded place between the trees with a person on guard. In the morning, when the day brightened, they continued again, setting off through the valley in the deserted forests of the island of Jamaica. As they dealt with the dangers and the struggle for survival in this way, everyone waiting in Santa Maria was wondering about Bruno, Garcia and the soldiers who had not returned that evening, and a great flurry began with everyone on board. Sofia, in particular, was now starting to worry about their lives. At one point, they thought that they should go to the island with a team of several soldiers and start looking for them, but maybe they stretched the road or got lost in the woods, so they decided to wait for them to arrive on decks for a while longer. If they didn't return in 2 days, a small crew with a lifeboat would go to the island and start looking for them. *** The next day, Garcia and those next to him, who were walking along a small path of dense forest in the Valley, crossed a large section of the road without encountering any danger. On the second day they set out, the beach had not yet been seen. Garcia was absolutely certain that they were on the right track, because when a lap was taken around this large mountain where they went on the first climb, it was again reached that beach where they went on the first road and where the lifeboat was. Instead of climbing over the mountain, they just went around it, and that's why the road was extended. At the end of the second day, when it was evening and it was dark, they felt the need to set up camp somewhere and spend the night again. Again, as they prepared to spend the night with the bushes and large leaves they found in a wooded nook, approaching footsteps were heard through the bushes ahead. Thinking it might be a wild animal, Captain Garcia immediately grabbed his gun and said: "I think it's not safe here guys, it could be a jaguar or a black panther, if it attacks us, I'll shoot right at it!" he took a few steps to the side where the sound came from. Just then, a giant Black Panther came out of the bushes and started running towards him and grabbed Garcia by the arm. Panther and Garcia rolled to the ground, and after struggling on the ground for a while, Garcia fired a shot but couldn't hit the Panther. He got rid of the Panther's claws for a moment and made another move to where his gun fell to the ground, and when he fired again at the panther, he was only able to stop him. He barely survived this deadly attack, by chance again, and the Panther was dead. Because of its black color, the Panther looked difficult in the dark, and he went to his side and touched it with his foot to make sure it was dead, yes, the animal was dead. The giant 3-foot-tall Panther almost killed Garcia, but fortunately he only took a bite out of his arm and was injured. Bruno and the others immediately ran to Garcia's side. Bruno took off his shirt and made a tampon, wrapping the wound tightly so that he would not lose any more blood. They took Garcia and barely carried him into the tent they had made out of bushes and leaves. “I think it's going to be a lot harder to spend this last night in this wild forest!" Bruno said with a fearful look. Garcia couldn't even speak, he passed out and fell asleep where he was under the pain of his arm. Again, as the night before, they left a person on guard in front of the tent and fell asleep. As they slept at night, this time a giant anaconda snake was sneaking up on the soldier waiting in front of the tent as a guard. Anaconda sneaked through the leaves and approached the tent and grabbed the soldier's foot. The soldier, who could not understand what had happened and clung to his gun in panic, was going to shoot right at the snake, realizing that the gun was jamming and not working. The gunpowder in it had taken water and had not yet dried. At this time, the snake began to wrap the soldier's body, starting with his foot. The soldier made a sudden move to try to get rid of it for a while and started hitting the giant snake's body with the handle of the gun in his hand, but it had no effect, the snake was too strong. Half a meter wide and 10 meters long, this huge monster could almost swallow a cow alive. Garcia, Bruno and 2 other soldiers, who heard the soldier's shouting and the sounds of help, quickly got up from where they were lying in a hurry and immediately ran to the front of the tent. They couldn't believe their eyes; a giant snake was swallowing a sentry soldier. Although they immediately tried to save him, it became impossible to take the soldier from the hand of the Giant Anaconda, and after squeezing the entire body of the soldier, breaking all his bones and killing him, he began to slowly swallow it. The giant anaconda had already swallowed the soldier in a few moves, and then it quickly moved in the dark, crawling through the trees and disappearing from view on the edge of the river. Garcia turns towards Bruno with a fearful stare: - "Oh, My God! He swallowed it, I can't believe my eyes, he swallowed it alive. It was huge, I've never seen a snake this big in my life. Shoot, shoot from behind now. God damn it! We've lost another man. God, when are we going to get out of this fucking forest? All right, turn around, back in the tent. No one's sleeping tonight. We'll all stay awake and stand guard until morning." he shouted, saying and angrily punching the trunk of the trees with his firm hand, while holding his bandaged arm, which was still bleeding. Bruno: - "Please calm down, Captain! I don't want to lose you, too, after all the bad things that have happened, or we'll never be able to go back to Spain alone from this desolate land. As far as I'm concerned, please try to keep your composure a little longer. As you said, let's all stay awake tonight and get back on the road as soon as dawn comes. Hopefully, we'll reach the beach tomorrow. If we fail, I think we will die of hunger and thirst or exhaustion, even if we do not die from the attack of wild animals.” Garcia: - "I hope, my friend, I hope it's like you said. Come on, then, let's go wait in the tent. We'll move on in the morning.” *** The next day, when the day brightened, they set off again. They had left behind 2/3 of the Grand Canyon, which circled the valley to the coast. As they continued along the canyon in this way, they would reach the beach by evening. At least that's what Bruno predicted. As they traveled through the canyon, colorful flowers, large trees with giant leaves, and the sounds of thousands of birds and parrots chirping deep in the lush forest created a wonderful riot of harmony and color/sound along the way they went. Many species of creatures unique to the world lived on these tropical islands, and the wild and untouched nature found here was neither similar to those in Europe, nor to the rainforests in Africa or Asia. It was a whole new world of unprecedented beauty, a new world, a new America. That's how Bruno described him as he approached his target, the new American continent. By evening, they had reached the end of the valley where they were located. From the foothills of the mountain just above, the sea could be seen. Bruno shouted with joy "Hooray, we've finally reached the beach!”, running, walking towards that direction. The coast around the sea was about 4-5 km from where they were, and if they walked a little fast, they would have reached the beach before sunset. They would then have to walk along the coast at 4-5 km to reach the location of the lifeboat behind the hill they had come from. In other words, a total of 10 km of walking would eventually reach the place where the lifeboat was. After about a 2-hour walk, they finally managed to cross the dense forest and reach the beach. Although it was dark, 4-5 km ahead of Santa Maria, the big body and bright lights appeared. Santa Maria staff, Bruno and Garcia and those with them had fully lit Santa Maria with gas lamps so that they could easily find the ship in the dark, they had been waiting for them for 2 days. If no one reached the ship that day, the next morning a reconnaissance group would set out to search for them on the island. But, fortunately, this was not necessary, because a few hours later a lifeboat appeared moving from the beach. As it was relatively easy to walk along the coast in the forest, Garcia, Bruno and 2 soldiers next to him had no trouble reaching the lifeboat, pulled it out of the bushes they had hidden when they first arrived and lowered it into the sea, and finally appeared on the horizon to return to Santa Maria. The people on the ship were happy to see them and shouted: - "Hey, look at this place! There they are, finally back. Bruno, Captain Garcia, and we only have 2 men with him, the others are not. Hooray, they're finally back. Thank God, here they come with a lifeboat!" Well, the last 2 days of desperate waiting had finally given up on Joy. Before long, Garcia with his bandaged arm and Bruno, who was walking with a limp, stood up in the lifeboat and approached Santa Maria: “Help! Get some people down now, get us on board now!" he shouted. Sofia came running towards the front of the deck with worried eyes and saw them: - “Oh God! Captain Garcia, Bruno, what happened to you? You were hurt, where have you been for 3 days? We were all dying of curiosity". Bruno looked at her and held out her hand: - "Help me, sister! Believe me, now is not the time to talk, if I say that we have experienced great dangers on the island, we have barely saved our lives. I'd say it's a great chance and a miracle that we even got here alive to the ship. For now, you just need to know that. Let's get some rest, I'll tell you everything that's going on, don't worry" he was able to say with his exhausted voice, which was well muted. They take Bruno, Garcia and the 2 wounded soldiers next to them barely on board. All of them were injured and very exhausted, and they were hungry and dehydrated for a long time. As soon as they got on board, they were immediately taken to one of the cabins, which was also used as an infirmary, to be wound and cleaned. Garcia's injured arm was wrapped in a clean cloth, cleared of the infection with alcohol and given medication. Bruno was also given drugs that Bruno had prepared himself, and then they retreated to their cabins for bed rest. The other 2 soldiers seemed to be in better shape than Bruno and Garcia, and they retreated to rest after eating in the mess hall. Assistant Ruiz, who handled the situation while Garcia was not on board, rushed to Garcia's side: - "Oh, My God! Captain Garcia, what happened to you, you're hurt? Where have you been for how many days, Sir? We were starting to think you weren't coming back, maybe you were dead. Can you please tell me what happened?” Garcia: - "Stop, calm down, Ruiz! I'll get some rest, of course. Help me drink my tea, my friend, I can't lift my arm. After that, let's continue the conversation, huh?” Ruiz: - “Here, take it, Captain. Please be comfortable, don't force yourself. You need a rest.” Captain Garcia: - "Let me tell you what's going on, my friend. After we landed on the island, we went on a small expedition, climbing on the big hill opposite. We camouflaged the lifeboat on the beach and took our other belongings and weapons with us and started climbing from the side of the mountain to the top of the hill. We got to the top of the mountain and we were looking around the island with binoculars, and that's when what happened. A poisoned arrow ripped through my jacket, and a few arrows stuck in the trees behind us. I mean, you see, we were attacked by wild natives on the island, and that's when we started running fast, descending from the other side of the mountain, to the valley where there was a big Canyon through which the river passed, which was the only direction we could escape. This chase lasted until it reached a waterfall flowing high on the edge of a large cliff, and at that time they shot our soldier in the back with an arrow and caught him alive and cut his throat, then attached him to the tip of a spear to cook him alive, killed him and took him away. It was terrible, my friend, believe me, it was terrible, these cannibal natives.” Ruiz: - "Wait a minute, captain. I think you came back with Bruno and 2 soldiers. So you're saying 3 of our men were killed by natives, by those horrible cannibal natives? Who hurt you or did they?” Garcia: - "Wait a minute, my friend, please be patient. I'll tell you all about it. They didn't hurt us. If you'll excuse me, you'll know when you listen to the rest. And then, when he lost a man, we first panicked, fought 40 to 50 locals with our guns to the end, and we got some of them, but they were too crowded for us, and in this case the right thing was to get away from them as quickly as possible. That's how we started to run fast down the hill through the forest. When we came to that waterfall, there was them behind us and a big waterfall 30 meters high in front of us, and the water was flowing too much. But despite this, we gathered our sailor courage and managed to get rid of them incredibly hard by jumping down from there one by one and swimming against the current to the opposite side of the river below. At this time, Bruno's foot was injured while jumping from the waterfall, and one of our men was seriously injured when he jumped from the waterfall, hitting his head on the rocks at the bottom of the river. We managed to get him out of the river and carry him to the shore, but he was bleeding heavily, and unfortunately he died on the way.” - "And then we were all alone and defenseless in that wild forest. In addition, we tried to reach the beach by going around the mountain through the canyon, which took exactly 2 days. Fortunately, we were able to survive because there were quite a lot of wild animals and poisonous reptiles in the forest. There was everywhere, it's like a forest of death. Well, as I was driving through the woods, on the night of the second day, I was attacked by a giant Black Panther. He bit me on the arm, and as you can see, I was injured, and you may not believe our other soldier, who was on guard at night outside the camp tent that we made with bushes and leaves that same night, but a giant anaconda snake, a giant snake 10 meters in size, swallowed him alive. It all happened in minutes before our eyes, and we tried to save him again, but we couldn't do anything, my friend. After all, after we survived that night, we were able to escape the canyon of death the next morning, and when we reached the beach, we walked 4-5 km again to the lifeboat, and as you can see, we were able to return alive to my ship, Santa Maria, thank God. Well, everything happened as I described it. I'm so sorry about my dead soldiers, they were very good men, my friend. We'll always remember them, believe me, I'm so sorry.” Garcia, unable to contain himself after finishing his remarks, sobbed for a while. Meanwhile, Ruiz comforted him by patting the Captain's shoulder: - "I'm very sorry, captain, but please don't upset yourself any more. You are tired and injured, you need to rest for a while and keep your morale high. Don't worry about the ship, I can handle it for a while. Now, please rest, you need this." he said and came out of the cabin and took heavy steps towards the captain's room to take the helm of the ship.. "Cayman (Crocodile) Islands” A fter cruising off Jamaica island for another 2-3 days until Captain Garcia recovered, Santa Maria sailed again at the end of the third day, heading west and crossing the Caribbean Sea to the Americas. By August 1511, Santa Maria, moving along the Caribbean Sea, was moving slowly in dangerous waters that could be considered quite shallow towards the Yucatan Peninsula of Central America. According to Bruno's estimates, they would have reached the American continent in about 2 months if there were no setbacks. As he left the island of Hispaniola, Garcia, who had studied the northern part of the island from afar, could not believe his eyes. A Spanish colony almost the size of a small city was established on the northern part of the island. Even the galleon ships carrying the Spanish flag and the Spanish soldiers wandering on the beach, as well as the black natives who were taken prisoner and worked as slaves, could be seen from afar. Santa Maria personnel, who also paddled to avoid being noticed by them and go faster, were trying to advance the ship at sea at the highest speed possible to get away from here immediately. The Spanish either enslaved most of the natives living on the island, except for the small number of natives who fled inland after enslaving the island, or killed those who resisted it. They even built a small castle on the beach and a shelter Port big enough to fill a sheep, using local workers. The sword left* behind by Columbus here must have done quite well and used the natives mercilessly. * The term sword left (residue) was used for people, slaves or foreign soldiers whose lives were spared in a country used in the Ottoman navy and captured and captured by Muslims. Santa Maria was a long way from Hispaniola, which about 1 month after setting out managed to reach the Cayman Islands, about 500 km west of the island of Jamaica, the last piece of land and island group before reaching the American continent. With its lush vegetation, turquoise beaches and beige sand, this group of small islands untouched by human hands was almost like heaven. It seemed that because Columbus' soldiers could not advance further west, they had not yet reached these islands. The fact that they saw the remains and wreckage of several ships that had run aground or broken up at sea immediately after leaving the island of Jamaica was significant evidence of this. Other ships belonging to the Navy, which had seen the shallow waters and were in danger of sinking, had to have returned before they could make it here. The Cayman Islands consisted of 3 islands in the form of the letter “L” clustered around each other, one large and two small. When they reached the Cayman Islands, Bruno approached Captain Garcia and asked: - "Captain, are we going to stop on these islands? I'm no longer a fan of stopping and taking breaks again, we've lost enough time. Now I think it's more appropriate to go ashore in America, which is our main goal. Besides, we have enough supplies and water on board. I'd like to hear your opinion, Captain.” Captain Garcia: - "You're right, my friend, I think the same way you do. But I think it's enough if we anchor off these islands for a day, fish and store them on the ship. We're in the hottest months of summer, it's extremely hot and dry here, it looks like almost 40 degrees. I say we rest on the ship for a while. As for those beautiful islands across the street, of course, I don't want to take risks again and face any dangers or Indians anymore. I don't think we should go ashore, but it would be safer for all of us. But after we anchor off these islands for a few days and linger, we'll move on, my friend. It seems to be the right thing to do for now.” Bruno: - "All right, then, captain, let's do as you say. Then I'll retreat to my quarters. Huh, by the way, I should tell you. That Columbus colony we saw on the island of Hispaniola, I added it to my maps and notebook and wrote it down. I wanted to let you know that this information might come in handy in the future when we get back to Spain.” Captain Garcia: - “Well done my friend. Maybe one day we'll see them again. As you can see, maybe the world we thought was big is actually a small place. If, as Columbus said, the world is really round, we can even reach India when we constantly go west. Who knows, maybe instead of America, we will face India, and we will wait and see.” Bruno: - "I don't think so, captain, but it would still be difficult to say anything already. Goodbye, good luck. I'll stop by Sofia and the others and see what they're doing. Let's talk to him about this island.” Captain Garcia: - "All right, my friend, see you. And I'll tell the guys, let's catch some fish while we anchor. Ha, I forgot to say one more thing, don't let anyone go into the sea. There's a lot of hungry sharks around. These shallow waters are the most dangerous places in the ocean, keep in mind.” *** GREAT FIRE ON THE ISLAND Captain Garcia descended from the captain's room to the deck to check on the personnel who were going to fish. They checked the ship's nets and fishing rods and threw it overboard. On the first day they caught several large tuna and a small puppy shark. They began to pull the fish onto the deck and cut them into fillets. Just in the evening, as they were about to finish their work, a strange flying light object appeared directly above the third Cayman Island, the smallest in the future. After waiting on the island for a while, the flying vehicle in the form of a bright disc that radiates light began to move towards where Santa Maria was. After getting close to Santa Maria, it suddenly rose into the sky and moved again to the side where it was the smallest island. He was maneuvering on the island, moving in UP and DOWN directions, and then began to descend well to the ground. At this time, a bright fireball in the form of a dense cluster of light coming out of a flying disk descended from the sky as lightning struck over the island. A fireball that fell to the ground in the form of lightning ignited trees and some shrubs located in high parts of the island. The fire, which began to spread rapidly due to the influence of the wind, soon completely covered the upper part of the island. Part of the forest was burning, along with all the living things and other animals in it. Seeing this, the Santa Maria people immediately ran to the deck. Everyone was looking that way. Captain Garcia shouted: - "Look at there! There's a fire on the island, one of the islands is on fire! God, that damn flying disk, whatever it was, lit up the forest and then ran up and away, what's going on there?” Bruno also came running out of his cabin and turned to Captain Garcia: - "What is this, Captain? There's a big fire on one of the islands, what's going on? Do you have an idea?” Captain Garcia: - "We don't know yet, my friend, I was just going to ask you. But that flying thing just went up into the sky and disappeared on the horizon. I think he may have started the fire, because I just saw him descend towards that island. Remember when you and I had a secret that we kept, those extraterrestrial beings that we encountered? I think they went down on that Hill in the middle of the island and fired anything or a gun, and they caused a fire. It's the only evidence we can see, so far, or it looks like there's no way there's going to be a fire on this island on its own, my friend. But why would anyone do that? I can't make any sense, maybe they realized our ship was here, and it was a warning fire to protect the American continent you were talking about, and not to get any closer. Are you sure we still want to move on, my friend? Maybe it was just a little warning to them. It seems that our foreign friends do not want us here, and who knows what dangers will await us if we go any further, we are not sure of that. Look at that awful view, my friend, the whole island is about to burn with everyone inside. All the animals on the island gathered on the beach.” Bruno: - "You may be right, captain, but believe me, I don't know what's going on right now, and I'm not sure what to do. Maybe they've been watching us all along and pulling us into a big trap. But look at these animals, gathered on the beach. Can't we at least do something for them?” Garcia: - “I don't think so, man. The fire looks so big, even if we go there, it's impossible to put out such a big fire. So it seems we have no choice but to wait helplessly.” Bruno: - "But look at these animals, captain, as if they are asking us for help. What, are you saying we let them burn to death right in front of us?” Captain Garcia: - "Fires like this are seen on islands like this in this hot summer, my friend. Fires are also part of the world's ecological order; just like hurricanes, floods, earthquakes or floods. But with the first rain falling, or with natural conditions, nature regenerates itself after a while. The main thing I don't understand today is the cause of this fire that started here today. This is definitely not a natural fire. Whatever these creatures are, they deliberately set this fire right in front of us, and then they ran away and let all these animals die right in front of us. As if their purpose was different, to intimidate us. You're the one who contacted them, now think about it, my friend. Ever since we left Spain, do you think these beings could not have directed you not for the benefit of humanity, but for extinction or for our end, for an evil prophecy about the end of humanity? Maybe I'm thinking a little too utopian, but now I'm starting to think about it, what's the main purpose of drawing us to this new continent there, I wonder what it is now.” Bruno, now with his head in his hands, began to think deeply about what Captain Garcia said. Could the goal have been different? Everyone on board watched helplessly through the terrible fire on the island that night. With the crackling of burning trees and the sound of toppling, the sky and sea now painted fire-red, the eerie and bitter screams of burning animals could be heard even from miles away. Animals gathered on the beach were trying to get into the sea and swim to get rid of the effects of the scorching heat and smoke, as there was nowhere to escape. After entering the sea, some of them were eaten by huge sharks waiting on the shore, hungry. Now there was a market for life on the beaches of this small island, and worst of all, everyone on board had to desperately watch the whole thing and the terrible sight.. "Burning Ships” T he fire, which had been going on all night, seemed to slow down a little by morning as the wind slowed down. The horrors of the landscape and the bodies of the dead animals washed ashore had almost painted the turquoise-colored tropical seawater red, with sharks smashing some of it in the water and eating it. Who, or what nonhuman creature, could have condoned such a massacre, or been so terrible and cruel that it would have started this fire? It was hard to understand right now. A very big mystery they were hiding, or a big secret about Atlantis, some extraterrestrial beings who didn't want the ship to go any further, or ultimately the devil could only do it. No matter how barbaric, even in a war between two enemy armies, he was afraid to harm forests and animals, whereas in the Middle Ages. According to captain Garcia, this fire was certainly a huge threat to them, and if they went any further, it could have been the end of the ship and all of its contents, as the animals on this island died horribly. So Captain Garcia went to Bruno to talk about it urgently in the morning and when the day was light. Captain Garcia: - "Bruno, it's Captain Garcia. Can I come in, my friend? We have something important to discuss.” Bruno: - "All right, Captain, come in, please.” Captain Garcia entered Bruno's cabin and sat in the empty seat next to him: - "Look, my dear friend! I'll be honest with you. I understand the reasons and purpose of wanting to go further to the west, but remember that since our departure from Spain, as you know that all the responsibility for the safety of all of us, including all my crew, you and your sister, and that the ship continues to sail in a healthy way is entirely on me, the Captain and the first rule of seamanship is trust and uninterrupted obedience to the Captain. Otherwise, the condition of both the passengers and the ship is compromised. So, right now, we have to make a critical decision. Whatever those creatures were, we all saw their warnings and the great fire ahead of us. Also, even if we reach our goal, there are many dangers that we don't know yet; locals, maybe Columbus's soldiers, etc. many more enemies that I can't count will appear when we get there if we continue on our way. I didn't even mention the shallow, dangerous waters where the ship could run aground and fall apart. With all this in mind, and as captain of this ship, we have to make the right decision now, my friend. Can you fully understand me? It's like a secret force is constantly blocking our progress and causing trouble, can't you see all this, my friend? I'm saying that's it after all that's happened, and I'm deciding not to move on. We have to go back to Spain, Bruno. Believe me, there may be nothing beyond the sea ahead. Maybe we're risking our lives for an empty purpose. Have you ever thought about that, Bruno? Now, I want you to answer me and find out what you think.” Bruno got up anxiously and began his speech decisively, looking right into the eyes of full Captain Garcia: - "Look, Captain! Even though it was dangerous, miraculously with the help of God, we managed to survive the ship without any serious damage. As you have witnessed, we have found many traces and remains of that lost continent of Atlantis and the new continent of America we are going to, along the way, and now we are perhaps very close to our destination. According to my calculations, we have no more than 600-700 km of road ahead. And then, of course, this great new continent will be waiting for us. Now I insist on asking you once more. Now that we've come all this way and we've managed to get through the danger, and we've only got a short way left, we can't give up and never come back when we see this fire. Look, if you try to turn back, I'll burn this ship. I'm telling you, I'll find an opportunity and burn this ship without your knowledge, like that burning island you see across the street, and in that case you can never return to Spain or get rid of this desolate land. Do you understand me now, Captain? We came all the way here to achieve that goal and find that temple and unravel the secret of the prophecy there. I thought you believed that, but I see I was wrong. You disappointed me, Captain.” After he said, he showed Captain Garcia with his index finger the fire and fire that was going on the opposite island from the cabin window, as if he were bluffing and threatening Garcia. After these words, Captain Garcia thought for a while, taking his head between his hands and punching his hand and quickly hitting the wooden table in front of him: - “Damn! God, you're crazy, you're out of your mind, Bruno, for that prophecy. All right, Bruno, all right, fine, but I assure you, if anything happens to the ship or my staff, it will definitely be you, my friend, who is responsible for it. From now on, if anything bad happens to us, I'll stick to your collar first and answer. He's not here now, but after I get back to Spain, I'll ask you one by one to pay for all this, and you'd better remember that.” After he said, he got up nervously and came out to the captain's room, closing the cabin door hard. *** A similar threat made by Bruno to Garcia to burn this ship was seen in Spain's past history. The first Islamic settlement in the territory of Spain the first Islamic invasion that started on the European continent and the Arab commander Tariq ibn Ziyad is also the famous Andalusian navy across the Strait of Gibraltar from Spain when they moved into the territory of the Christian armies driving towards the sea and surrounding meet them and secure as a result of they wanted to escape back into the Navy soldiers, but all who saw it by ordering the burning by the fire of the ships the brave commander Ziyad, Arab-Islamic armies was eliminated way back for MS. forever In the ' 700s. Tariq Bin Ziyad, the Andalusian Arab commander who conquered Spain. Later, as a result of his bondage, the army of Islam, which had no chance to return and no choice, boldly attacked and defeated the Christians and began the process that allowed all of Spain to soon enter Islamic rule. Here, in memory of this victory and courageous behavior, the Strait of Gibraltar, which separates the European continent from Africa and has a very important geographical place in maritime affairs, was named after him. Here came the phrase “burning ships”, which was also frequently used in literature after that day and means “to continue on the road so that there is no way back”. Now, another important critical moment in history had come, and this time it was Bruno's turn to burn the ships. *** "Red Points” - Energy Centers of Atlantis - A fter Bruno's brave move, Captain Garcia's broken courage was again somewhat fulfilled, and they left the Cayman Islands to anchor again and sail in the direction of the West, which was their route. They had a 600-700 km road ahead of them to reach the American continent, which meant a difficult journey that would take about 1 month by ship. If there were no accidents at sea, the coast of the American continent would appear on the horizon at the end of the month, according to Bruno's calculations and the data on the large map of the world that he has. This detailed map of the world, which also showed the seas and gold given to Bruno that night, was so perfect and detailed that even though radar had not yet been invented in the Middle Ages, it perfectly accurately showed the route of the road they were going to, and what was in front of them, and even what was underwater. These shallow ocean waters off the Gulf of Mexico were quite dangerous. So much so that in some places the depth could suddenly drop to 5-10 meters, and then suddenly oddly rise to 3-4 thousand meters. I wonder what kind of structure was underwater with such depth differences? According to Bruno's detailed map, the underwater structure of this place stood on the ocean floor rising on a fairly large plateau, and incredibly, it seemed as if there was once a giant continent here, full of cities and underground ruins and the structures they formed. All these structures stood as if they had suddenly collapsed underwater, as if overnight, suddenly collapsing on the ocean floor as the ocean engulfed this continent. According to Oracle Bruno, all these structures and their remains, which date back to other islands in the Atlantic Ocean, were nothing more than underwater extensions and evidence of Atlantis, as Plato mentioned. Every once in a while, Bruno tried to measure the depth of this area of the ocean with a depth measuring rope attached to an iron ring at the end of his hand, and he took notes on the map and made markings. During the 1-month road they went, he made about 100 measurements in this way and marked them all on the map, putting red little points. According to him, these red points were energy points belonging to Atlantis. The densest settlements of Atlantis lived in these red points about 10-12 thousand years ago. The places where these points were and the sea floor could also be considered as the power plant of Atlantis. So much so that it was an electric-like type of energy, the most common form of energy at present, and that energy was generated by giant crystal power plants that are currently buried at the bottom of the ocean at these 100 points. With this superhuman technology, which no one in the world could solve until that day and is still unsolvable, huge cities were illuminated by these energy crystals and powered by electricitylike energy. After Bruno marked these 100 energy centers with red points on the map, something caught his attention. From a distance, the sum of these points looked as if it were a symbol he had seen before. "It's so weird and weird, what does it look like?" he began to connect the red points with the lines this time by taking a black pen. He couldn't believe his eyes when he joined all the points with the lines and turned the map sideways: - "Oh, My God! This symbol, this is definitely that. This is the number Pi (π) itself. Here, the Atlanteans built a giant Pishaped energy network under the ocean. So, before Atlantis sank, the sum of all these energy points told us something big and warned us about something, about the number π. They knew this, that is, the great secret of the last prophecy in the number π, and they geographically encoded it across the entire continent of Atlantis, and they inherited the future by building the distribution of these power plants in the form of the number Pi before sinking into the ocean. That's how they codified death, the Apocalypse, and even their own extinction. Maybe that's how a message was delivered to those unknown extraterrestrials. A giant symbol and message that can also be seen from far away and high, this is incredible. Given that it was raised too high, these shapes could be seen and understood more clearly from space. A giant code that can also be seen from space! I wonder if these flying vehicles we saw get their energy from here? God, I think I'm freaking out, I'm getting ridiculous.” Bruno, he spoke to himself in this way for a while, and then he cut this speech excitedly to herself, and to embody the secret he discovered on the map, right hand on the notepad again he drew a copy of this form in large letters and underneath the figure: “ENERGY POINTS IN THE FORM OF THE NUMBER PI (π) OF ATLANTIS” He drew a giant red crystal pyramid in the middle of the Pi map he created by writing, and in the middle of the pyramid he drew an 8-armed energy network symbol and started talking to himself again in his inner voice: - "So the Atlanteans knew many of Pi's secrets much better than before. As I get closer to that Great Temple of Ququlcan, which is my goal, I feel strange things starting to happen. As if some things are becoming more clear in my mind now. So the Pi symbols we saw on those islands weren't coincidences" he said, and then wrote in his notebook: "When I combined all this evidence with this map and notes that Alien gave me, the resulting landscape became thoroughly frightening and mysterious. I have to put all these findings in the Book of prophecy that I will write in the future. If I'm not mistaken, it's the solution to a big secret almost 10 thousand years old. Maybe in other parts of the world, this number has been encoded. Maybe even in Ancient Egypt, Babylon, Mesopotamia, India and, of course, the new continent of America. They all had a great secret in common, and they codified it in their architect, historical works. But the fact is that when you look closely at the Earth one by one, it was not clear what they were as a whole, because they could not all be combined. If you look from the sky, very high, then you can understand their true meaning and what these energy points really are. Perhaps, all of this could be the marks and marks left on Earth by superhuman beings far superior to us. Because these flying disks and vehicles from the Sky have positioned the world in space according to these codes. Perhaps these will remain giant unsolvable secrets, from the depths of space to the inner part of the earth, to structures that will never be seen by humanity. Today, however, I think and feel that I have done a great job of graphically analyzing this giant number of Pi (π) underwater.” (August 1511, Bruno) *** Looking at the Earth from above on the map, other strange symbols appear and three examples from Istanbul, the place where the two great continents meet: (Pi (π) Island, The Secret of the Maiden's Tower and The Human Face on the Map) 1-PI (π) ISLAND Can the symbol Pi (π) be a symbol of many things, creation, and even the Apocalypse outside of mathematics? Or could it come across in many more places we never expected? It is not known if it is a coincidence, but many structures on earth appear to be the number Pi (π) when viewed from the sky, that is, from a distance. An example of these is the “Istanbul Canal” project, a project that wants to be done in Turkey at a point connecting Asia and the European continent and can cause Istanbul to appear as an island of Pi when viewed from the sky. This is a new canal project, that is, when this canal and the Istanbul Strait are combined as a line along the sea water, a piece of land consisting of a giant islet in the form of a Pi (π) island appears. If a Canal Istanbul Project takes place in this way, a giant island of Pi (π) will form in the middle of Istanbul, where two major continents intersect, at a point connecting Asia and Europe: "THE ISTANBUL CANAL PROJECT IN THE FORM OF PI (π) NUMBER AND PI (π) ISLAND IN THE MIDDLE” 2-HUMAN FACE ON THE MAP A careful look at the map of Istanbul displayed by satellite from the night sky shows that the image of a young male person and its skyline are formed. This interesting silhouette, according to some Islamic sources, refers to a person (also referred to as Mahdi), whose name is also mentioned in the Hadith and who will come at the end of the world as a sign of the Apocalypse. According to the hadith, the symbol and signs of this person are said to appear at the confluence of three continents or the sea. These symbols and signs, along with those that will return before the Apocalypse –Jesus (Christ)– will also be seen in some other structures around the world. According to one of these hadiths, it is said that “the face of the Mahdi is like a shining star in the night sky.” When the map of Istanbul above is reversed and viewed carefully, it is noteworthy that the face of this human skyline is a figure in the form of a star that glows at night. 3-SECRET OF THE MAIDEN'S TOWER "HIDDEN UNDERGROUND TUNNEL IN THE FORM OF A HUGE PI (π) NUMBER LOCATED UNDER THE MAIDEN'S TOWER” Maiden Tower is located in Uskudar (Scutari) district of Istanbul, 150-200 meters off Salacak Coast. Although there is no exact information about when the Maiden's Tower was built, it is seen in some sources that the architectural structuring process of the Tower went down to 341 BC. The ancient names of the Maiden's Tower are Damalis and Leandros. The name Damalis is the name of the wife of Kharis, the Athenian King of the time. When Damalis died, she was buried on these beaches, and the tower was given this name. In addition, the tower was also referred to in Byzantine times as Arcla, meaning “small castle”. After the conquest of Istanbul, the existing tower on the island was demolished and a wooden tower was built in its place. In 1719, this wooden tower was burned to the ground by fire. In 1725, it was rebuilt as a masonry by the city's chief architect. The upper part of the tower was changed and a glazed pavilion was added to the upper side and a dome covered with lead was added to it. In 1857, the lighthouse was again added to the tower, and in 1920, the Lantern's lamp became an automatic light system. The tower, which was also used as a lighthouse for some time after the Republic, was transferred to the Ministry of Defense in 1964 and to the maritime enterprises in 1982. Today, after being restored by a private company, it has been opened to the public as a restaurant. Some European historians call it the Leander Tower. There are many rumors about the tower. Maiden's Tower, which has a very ancient historical history, was once used for the purpose of taxing ships passing through the Bosphorus. A large chain was drawn along the European side with the tower, and ships were allowed to pass between the Anatolian side and the Maiden's Tower. After a while, the tower was unable to carry the chain and was demolished towards the European side. Looking into the water from the tower, its ruins are can be seen. The tower, which was mentioned by different names in ancient times, is now integrated with the name of the maiden's Tower and is referred to by this name. Everybody knows the classic story. The king, who is told that his beloved daughter will be stung by a snake when she turns eighteen, he resort to repair this tower in the middle of the sea, away from the snakes, and closes his daughter there. But the prophecy cannot be prevented. The snake coming out of the grape basket sent to the tower poisons the princess. The princess is made of an iron coffin. She is buried at the entrance of Hagia Sophia. Today, there are still two holes on top of this coffin. In the Qur'an, the meeting of Khidr and Prophet Moses and the secrets of companionship are mentioned in the Surah alKahf. Khidr is the knowledge of the secret of creatures and the invisible knowledge of things. Prophet Moses is the guide and wisdom of the outer world. In these verses, a place where the two seas meet, Khidr and Moses are mentioned. However, the geography is not clearly stated. A secret known to Israel's Kohens is that the Prophet Moses and Khidr meet in the area where this Maiden's Tower is located. This is where the Black Sea and Marmara meet; so this is where the two seas meet. In addition, Prophet Khidr was a sea in Batiniyya knowledge, while Prophet Musa was in Zahiri knowledge. "Two men as the flood of knowledge and two seas " the two secrets thus merged at some point. And I needed a seal that was a sign of this merger. In time, it was placed on its handle and this seal was erected in this chosen place of the Bosphorus. Whatever its story, The Maiden's Tower is that seal, the Maiden's Tower is its sign. Another interesting thing is that the position and tomb of the military genius Prophet Joshua, who was the assistant of the Prophet Moses, is on the hill - also known as the Hill of Joshua which is tangent to the tower. Let's talk about the story that reveal the secret about our topic. One day a mysterious man knocks on the door of the estate of the Englishman Sir Francis Crick, a major antique collector. He has a very distorted accent and is probably Arabic. He shows a notebook in his hand and wants to sell it to Sir. Looking at the notebook, Francis Crick sees that it contains some technical drawings and Arabic writing, and sends the man, giving him a few pounds at the man's insistence. When he looks at the drawings in the following days, he notices that they look familiar to his eye, and soon realizes that the drawings belong to the Maiden's Tower. However, there is a difference, and the tower is depicted as being 3 stories high. In addition, he compares it by collecting all the information he can find related to the Tower. At first he thinks that the drawings are wrong, but then he gives in to his curiosity and decides to have the notes translated. According to the notes, there is a passage down in the cellar of the maiden's tower, and through this passage another structure located under the sea floor is reached. The structure was built inside an old cave. The key that opens the gate is fully depicted. In addition, an ancient mechanism working on the principle of filling and discharging water, designed to use some rooms of this structure for different purposes, is also mentioned. Sir Francis Crick is thoroughly curious about these secrets he has learned and begins to investigate the mysterious man who sold him this notebook, even issuing a special search warrant for it, but no results can be obtained. In addition, sir makes an ironmaster do the same key described in the notes. In later years, “when I took the key in my hand, I couldn't think of anything but going to Istanbul!" he will say. After he has built his key, he wants to come to Istanbul and examine the structure closely, even if it is possible and if it is real, take photos of this hidden section at the bottom. Sir received a 5-day leave from the Turkish government via the British Embassy in Turkey under the name of Architectural Review, but a guard officer was also given to him. In August 1960, he arrives in Istanbul with his assistant, and after a short preparation, the guard officer, sir and his assistant arrive at the tower. Sir immediately begins to wander around. The entrance, said in the notebook, is at the base of the tower. When he gets here, he can see nothing but a big rock on the ground, and on the first day he passes through the exploration work. In the evening, he thinks that he must break the rock and then repair it again, but for this he must get rid of the guard officer. The next day they meet the officer at Uskudar to go back to the tower. He tells the officer that their job is to measure and evaluate, that he does not need to come, that they will work more comfortably when they are alone, but the officer does not accept this because of his duty. In addition, Sir's assistant bribes the officer with a large amount of gold that they have already agreed on. This bribe is almost the salary that the officer will receive for 1 life, and he immediately accepts this offer. Francis Crick talks about that day as follows; "The officer took the bag we gave him and started walking away, and we got on the boat immediately, I was constantly telling the assistant to pull the oars faster, and when I finally got to the tower, I screamed a little joy, saying you are mine." Sir immediately goes to where the entrance is and begins to break the rock here, which is about 20 cm thick. After a few hours, the rock breaks, but there is great disappointment. Because there is no entrance door with a keyhole, as they expect under the rock. Instead there is an even larger second rock. They also break up this second rock, and another rock comes out from under it. By the way, they're exhausted, and it's time to go. They close the cavity by preparing a simple plaster mortar. The next day, they also break the 3rd rock and finally reach the iron hatch. But this hatch, which has been there for centuries, has become so twisted that even the keyhole has bent and twisted, and no matter how hard they try, they can't open it. Thus they come to the end of the 3rd day. When they return to their hotel, Sir can't think of anything but how he can open the door. Although the assistant said that they can somehow open it with high heat, they decide to melt the lid with a strong cocktail of acid, since this will be both a very remarkable and very troublesome method. When they arrive at the tower again, they manage to melt the hatch by evening by this method, but because it is late, they leave the girl's tower, leaving the entrance part for the next day. Early in the morning, the tower is routinely moved again. The cave passage extremely dark and narrow, dangling down by rope, the depth is almost 35 meters. As they dangle from the passage, the sounds of water drops can be heard. When he comes down, he lights his lamp and finds himself in a large entrance. As he wanders a little further, he realizes that this structure, which is arched and domed, is a large hall almost 500 m2 wide. The structure consists of many sections and rooms. There are frescoes on the walls, but these have become unreadable over the years. In places there are decayed boards that could have previously been tables, chairs, bookshelves. In the main room, he sees a symbol carved on the wall, but this symbol does not belong to the Ottoman or Byzantine. Some rooms of the structure have collapsed. He finds a very old sword, and the short hilt of the sword is very small. At that moment, he thinks that only a dwarf can use this sword. He illuminates the space as much as he can and takes the photos you see now, some of which are on the previous page. They take the sword with them and go up again and close the mouth of the pass again with the stones they have removed with cement. In the 90s, this sword was carbon tested, and according to the test results, the sword dates back 1600 to 2000 years. The symbol cannot be resolved or associated with any known civilization to whom it is shown. This issue remained hidden until Francis Crick's death in 2004, but after his death, a notebook found in a rented safe in a bank, Crick's notes on the subject, a sword he took from the tower, and 30 black-and-white photos of the secret part of the tower are found by his grandson. So, why was this secret temple built under the Maiden's Tower? Was it a shelter for those in the tower in sudden attacks? Or is it something more? Crick believed that there was more to it than that, and that this secret structure in the form of the number Pi was somehow connected to a secret tunnel, and this place was a connection point. In some ancient sources supporting this, it is also mentioned that an underground tunnel passing through the maiden's tower and that this tunnel formed a secret network leading to the inner world. Housing, secret negotiations, escape from sieges, worship, water supply to the city. Regardless of the reason for its construction, the tunnels that really surround the bottom of the city of Istanbul like a spider's web are signs of a civilization and world that we don't know about. However, these tunnels, which were used for clean water and waste water channels in the early Byzantine periods, were again costed to the civilization of that period. Even more interestingly, there are claims that these mazes continue in the direction of Thrace, Marmara and Anatolia. In a 100-year-old book called "The Seven Wonders of Istanbul", he mentions a tunnel called the "The Dog Killing Channel" that follows Hagia Sophia in the immediate vicinity of Çemberlitaş and in the direction of the Basilica Cistern connected to it, and connects to Marmara, and from there goes a long way to the Monastery in Kinaliada (Kinali Island). Another assumption is that this passage went northeast through a secret entrance in the Basilica Cistern, from there it opened to Marmara, stopped at the Maiden's Tower and reached Uskudar, from here it reached under the Marmara from the Moda Coast after the Kadikoy Coast in a straight line and reached the monastery in Kinaliada. *** The similarities between the energy points on the Lost Continent of Atlantis, suddenly buried in the deep waters of history overnight, and the giant number of Pi visible from above, in Istanbul or anywhere else in the world, are striking. According to Bruno, all the energy points in Atlantis were encoded in the form of the Pi number, and there was a special reason for this, and this similar encoding also existed in many parts of the world. In the past and in the future.. Bruno, continue the article he wrote in his notebook: “Below us is a huge number of Pi, what kind of mind game is this? Indeed, human beings know very little about the world and world history. However, how different the history described and known in the books is from this unknown world that we are now facing..” (August 1511, Bruno) He wrote such that, and then: - “Oh, I'm too tired. I'll almost be blind from rubbing my eyes, and this damn humidity will ruin my lungs if we don't get ashore a little longer.” He closed his notebook and put the giant map of Atlantis, which he coded the number Pi, back in the roll, put it in his bag, put out the gas lamp on the table, and went to bed and went to sleep. He was tired to death.. *** Edgar Cayce (The Sleeping Oracle) - The Life Story of the Second Great Oracle After Nostradamus – Edgar Cayce was an American psychic who lived between 1876 and 1945 and was known by the nickname “The Sleeping Prophet”. He could only prophesy after creating a sleep-like trance state in himself. Some of his prophecies were about the distant future; but his most notable ability was to diagnose diseases and treat patients while in a trance state. Many famous and successful oracles have said their prophecies in their sleep through the dream channel or in their trance state, where they provide a deep concentration. The common feature of both was that it allowed a state of relaxation to form. Concentration and trance, fulfilled under special conditions, were perhaps provided spontaneously while asleep. As a matter of fact, modern parapsychology research supports this view. One of those who can speak his prophecies by going into a trance is the world-famous Prophet Edgar Cayce. He has many prophecies that have been fulfilled to this day and are waiting to be fulfilled. Because he said his prophecies in a trance similar to sleep, he was nicknamed "The Sleeping Prophet". His psychic ability and psychic powers appeared at a very young age. Edgar Cayce fell ill when he was little and went into a coma. Despite all his efforts, the doctor in his village could not bring him out of his coma, and when he was in this state, Cayce began to talk: "I got hit by a baseball on the back of my neck. Make a special cataplasm and press hard on my neck. Hurry up, or there's a chance that the cerebral cortex will be damaged" he said. Then he gave the formula for cataplasm. His family applies what is said because there is no other remedy, and Edgar, whose fever has fallen in the evening, stands up the next day. But he didn't remember what he said when he was in a coma, and he didn't know many of the plants he gave their names to for the formula. Cayce had told his family when he was six that he could be contacted and interviewed by relatives who had already died. Later, he fell asleep, putting his head on school books, and when he woke up, he knew what was written in the book by heart, even though he had never worked. Gradually losing this strange talent, Edgar left school at the age of thirteen due to his family's financial incompetence and began working. At the age of twenty-one, he became a representative of a letter paper factory, and at that time, he suffered a kind of stroke, losing part of his voice. Although he went to many doctors, none of them managed to correct this condition, and he resorted to hypnosis as a last resort. The doctors couldn't cure his illness, and so Cayce's fate began. After going into a trance, he listed all the medications and treatment methods that should be used in his treatment. A miracle took place with the application of what he said, and Cayce regained his voice. This event also marked the beginning of his new life, and he chose to make prophecies using his psychic powers to be useful to people. *** Beginning of His Prophecies In 1908, Edgar Cayce was working in his yard in calm. As he turned his eyes towards the sky, he saw a flaming fleet of airships, quiet but threatening. He ran into the house and started praying. As Edgar Cayce explained this behavior to his family, he described the vision he saw and what it meant: soon, a terrible war would come that would cost millions of lives. Indeed, before long, the First World War broke out, which killed millions of people. When the first World War ended, he collected, studied and published his trance statements. The A.R.E. (The Association for Research and Enlightenment, Inc., Virginia Beach, Virginia), documented in his records, made the following statement: “If the Versailles conference succeeds, the world will have a peaceful Millennium. If it fails, the world will see that the same factors drove humanity into a second and much more horrific war in 1940.” We know that the Second World War began in September 1939, and in 1940, flames engulfed everything. Cayce made other prophecies about future events, as well as wars. These prophecies seemed unlikely at the time: for example, he had always known in advance of the bankruptcy and Economic Depression of Wall Street, the independence of India, the fall of Hitler, and the birth of the Soviet Union. Edgar Cayce made an interesting prophecy in his response to a question asked to him in a trance in 1940: “Poseidia will be among the first parts of Atlantis that will rise again. Expect that in 1968 and 1969-not too far away!” Moreover, in another statement in 1933, he said that “in the sunken parts of Atlantis or in Poseidia, some of the temples can still be discovered under the lime accumulated by seawater over the ages” and noted that Poseidia was “off Florida, near Bimini.” As a matter of fact, first of all, Dr. J. Manson Valentine who constantly conducts research in the Bimini region, along with Jacques Mayol and Harold Climo, discovered the Bimini Road (or wall) on the submarine in 1968. Later, pilots Trig Adams and Bob Brush discovered from the air a number of strange triple circles of stones located at the bottom of the sea off Andros. Moreover, Captain Don Henry revealed the presence of large pyramid-shaped structures in the seabed profile, which he obtained with the sonar device on the fishing boat. Cayce had reported the history of 1968 and the discovery of the shrines years earlier. Edgar Cayce also had prophecies that had not yet come. For example, Cayce mentioned an “archive” buried under the Sphinx and one of the pyramids in Giza: “...related artifacts can be found in the vaults located at the base of the Sphinx... The base of the Sphinx is arranged in channels, and in the corner facing the Pyramid of Giza, an inscription on how they were established can be found.” This archive contains the historical records of Atlantis, including a message about who discovered the sealed vault. He described the location of the secret underground chamber in question as “as the sun rises from the waters as the line of shadow (or light) falls between the Paws of the Sphinx.” Cayce was confident that this archive contained the entire history of the lost Atlantis civilization. Edgar Cayce also predicted that in the future, major climate changes will occur as continents are displaced by major earthquakes, the sunken continent of Atlantis will rise again, and archaeologists will discover a temple on this new island with ancient records. But Cayce wasn't pessimistic about our fate, even in the face of a half-ruined New York. Cayce hoped New York would be rebuilt in a future where humanity would travel at supersonic speeds in “cigar-shaped air vehicles.” Scenes about the future were set around 2,100 years old. Edgar Cayce believed in the Coming Millennium and thought that world peace would be shaped by the ideal of “Brotherhood of Humanity”. He promised that humanity would reach spiritual understanding by the end of this century. *** His Prophecies About Jesus and Ancient Egypt According to Edgar Cayce, the Pyramid of Cheops contains geometric, mathematical, and information about the progress of humanity. There is a “Pyramid of Records” between the Great Pyramid and the Sphinx. This place will also remain hidden until humanity defeats its selfishness, ego and reaches a certain level of understanding. According to Cayce, these records, or “time capsule”, contain tablets and documents of Ancient Egyptian origin with Atlantis. Mummies, gold and precious stones, surgical instruments, and even how they built the pyramids using levitation in the cellar of the power of a complete record is waiting to be discovered: “Yet that cannot be uncovered from the temple or pyramid between the Sphinx Hall of records or may be taking place that reaches the entrance along,” he said. *** In Edgar Cayce's "readings of religious prophecy", he says that Jesus was raised by the Essenes, that Jesus received their teaching. The scrolls were the religious literature of the Essenes. According to Cayce, the Essenes had several groups, and the group that played a role in the life of Jesus was on Mount Carmel. The Essenes chose 12 girls to prepare themselves to be the mother of Christ and brought them to the temple on Mount Carmel. Mary was one of these girls. These girls were trained with physical and mental exercises, they were subjected to special diets. According to Cayce, there was a woman named “Judy” at the head of the Essenes at the time. Judy was a seer, psychic, and spiritual teacher. So much so that Jesus had not only been educated in Jewish mysticism; he had also been educated in the lands of India, Egypt and Persia. Mary was only 4 years old when she arrived at the temple. Again, according to Cayce, Mary was chosen by the Archangel Gabriel to be the mother of Jesus, she was then 12 or 13 years old. He was separated from other children and went through further preparation and training. After his election, Mary was banned from wine and fermented drinks and subjected to a strict diet. Jesus had 3 brothers. Jesus was born without a relationship, but after Mary and Joseph married, they had three more children in the normal way. According to Cayce, before the age of twelve, Jesus had become a master of Jewish law. At Mount Carmel between the ages of 12 and 16, Judy taught him prophecies. Then, he was sent to Egypt, then went to India for 3 years, and then to Iran for further education. He went back to Egypt to complete his preparation as a teacher. The training he received in India was “cleansing of the body”, related to preparation for physical and mental strength. He also received the teachings of Mithra in Iran and Ra in Egypt. *** Edgar Cayce and His Prophecies about Atlantis Interestingly, the majority of Edgar Cayce's prophecies were about the Lost Continent of Atlantis, which Plato, The Philosopher of antiquity, also mentioned in his writings. So much so that we owe most of all the information we know about Atlantis today to Plato and Cayce. According to the Prophet Cayce, the Atlanteans, migrated to Egypt in 10,500 BC and took with them records of their 40,000-year-old civilization. Egypt was a colony of Atlantis, an ancient and advanced civilization. In addition, Cayce said that, contrary to popular belief, the Egyptian Pyramids were built by the Atlanteans well before 3,500 BC, around 10,500 BC. Similarly, the pyramids of the Mayans in Central America were built by the Atlanteans much earlier than they were. According to Plato, Egyptian monks around 500 BC they told The Greek philosopher Solon the story of Atlantis. Although records from ancient Egypt are rare, probably because they were looted from sarcophagi and temples, they must have been found in this library. Edgar Cayce said that these records, lost as a result of the looting, will eventually be found in the "Hall of Records" under his own name, located near the Sphinx, in another pyramid that has not yet been discovered and is completely underground. The Sleeping Prophet's knowledge of Atlantis and other prophecies was archived by the Association for Research and Enlightenment (A.R.E.), which Cayce founded in 1929 in Virginia Beach. His psychic readings, which he also gave to more than 8,000 people, were meticulously recorded by Gladsy Turner, who was his secretary for many years. Then, in the mid-1980s, Edgar Evans Cayce, Edgar Cayce's youngest son, felt it was time to write a book about research into Atlantis, which would also cover the results of the foundation's programs. His book "Mysteries of Atlantis" (Publisher: Harper and Rowe), which he co-wrote with his daughter Gail Cayce, Schwartzer and Douglas G. Richards, was published in 1988. Edgar Evans told us that he had been working on all his father's "readings" for 1 year to determine all the statements referring to Atlantis. Statistically, it turned out that almost a third of all "life readings" mentioned Atlantis: Cayce had also claimed that the Atlantean immigrants had decided to move their records to Egypt and Yucat|n. It seems that, given today's technology, if a determined effort was made, it would be possible to understand whether such a secret chamber was buried, as Cayce said, somewhere between the Sphinx and the Nile River and near the right paw of the Sphinx. Atlantis has not yet reached the top of the water, but it has been proven in recent years that it is under the water and is located exactly where Edgar Cayce said it was. Edgar Cayce was again in a trance in 1940 he was saying "Poseidia will take part in the first parts of Atlantis to rise". In 1933, he said that Atlantis would be rediscovered, suggesting that Poseida was near Bimini off Florida. From the end of the 1920s until his death in 1945, Cayce mentioned extensively about crystals that were considered to be used for earthly and spiritual purposes, along with all the details of Atlantis. According to him, the abuse of the "Great Crystal" caused them to self-destruct. Atlantis had giant energy crystals placed in pits dug to connect with the inner effects of the earth. The strong ray effect caused by the reduction of sunlight to these crystals had a destructive quality. But later, because of their greed, playing with cosmic forces brought disaster. The people who survived the disaster fled to other continents with crystal technology, laying the foundations for subsequent civilizations. Cayce had already said that Atlantis remains would be found near Bimini Island, and many years later, Dr. J. Manson who conducted research in the Bimini area, Jack Mayol and Harold Climo discovered roads, a large wall and structures made of stones located under the ocean in 1968. The Bimini Road has since been subjected to archaeological investigations. A piece of fluted marble milk and a piece of tile plastered with mortar were found nearby. It was undoubtedly true that the Bimini Road was man-made, and as one observer said: “Nature does not create stones in a square shape, and it does not line stones in rows.” (Note: For the remains of Bimini Island and more See also: The Last Prophecy – Volume I) *** Crystal Energy of Atlantis Crystals found in some centers in Atlantis were effectively used in the process of collecting and distributing cosmic energies. In these centers, which functioned like a giant reflector, large energies were focused and reflected. These crystals, used in giant reflectors, Edgar Cayce called them the “Firestone” in the information he received through psychic means. At first, these energy centers in Atlantis were used for "celestial-spiritual communication". In these "energy centers", at the same time, people were psychically regenerating and physically able to regenerate their bodies. Thus, they were able to minimize the effect of aging. “Crystal Energy Centers” called exactly but the quality from this unit is unknown, an emitting energy source they later made the Atlanteans, and by improving transportation, communication and began to use these units in various areas of life. They could even interfere with natural events with these energies. In Atlantis, these crystals are also called “Tuaoi Stone?" The exact properties of the substance used in these places, which are referred to in esoteric sources as “Crystal Energy Centers” and “Firestone”, are unknown. Is it really a crystal or is it another material structure unknown today? No clearer answer has yet been given to this. Among the documents obtained by Edgar Cayce using psychic communication techniques, there is quite detailed information about this issue. Let's list at least a few to give an idea: 1- By accumulating the forces of nature in crystals that collect such rays and events in one center, they began to dispatch and manage ships not only above the sea, but also in the air (perhaps they also made vehicles using flying saucer – UFO– technology with this). In addition, they provided transport of the human voice and body from place to place. The "Firestone" (Cayce, 1943) was in the center of a building that was insulated with a substance resembling today's Asbestos. The part of the building above the stone was oval –egg– shaped. This dome, which can move on its axis at certain angles, transferred both natural energy and cosmic energies to the “Firestone”. 2- This structure was built in the form of a moving dome to ensure the concentration of Infinite Energy. This dome was a dome built in such a way that it could be moved on the rails so that there were no obstacles in the direct application of energy to ships shipped in space, that is, the ships always remained in sight. The shipment of the vehicles was made by a radar-like induction method, which resembles the remote control method applied today thanks to radio vibrations. In other words, vehicles were sent by concentrating the rays of a stone placed in the center of the power station backwards. And the preparation of the stone fell on the initiates of the era. 3- Thanks to a kind of fire that burns with the application of stone rays, people's bodies healing, even miraculous rejuvenation occurs. So the body was often rejuvenated. These energies also had a great effect on psychic powers, and even on the mediated transport of giant stones used in the construction of the Great Pyramids from place to place with the power of levitation. 4- We said that they could also affect the energy of nature. From what Edgar Cayce quoted, we understand that some mistakes have been made. These were accidentally, that is, accidentally set to very high frequencies, leading to the start of the second earthquake period. It has been stated by many esoteric sources that those who used these facilities in the last period of Atlantis in the negative field came out and thus the balance of nature was disturbed. Esoteric sources describe those who use these opportunities in the negative field as “Sons of Belial”. Edgar Cayce, on the other hand, called them “Sons of Satan”, which means “Devil” : The use of these centers in Atlantis by the “Sons of Satan” eventually led to uncontrollable volcanic eruptions and earthquakes. The 'Sons of Satan' had turned these energies into destructive forces. So, they caused massive explosions underground. As a result of large volcanic eruptions and earthquakes from nature's powerful energy store, the continent was first divided into five islands. Edgar Cayce suggests that information about these energy centers that were once used in Atlantis already exists in three locations, and that they will appear in the future. Documents on the construction of the Firestone are currently available in three places: 1- Below the Atlantic Ocean (Near Bimini Island, where the Poseidia region of Atlantis remains submerged today) 2- In Egypt (near the Great Pyramids and the Sphinx) 3- In Mexico (Yucatan Peninsula, near Ququlcan Temple) *** His Other Prophecies In an interview in the mid-1920s, Cayce said that the stock market would collapse in 1939, followed by a great economic depression. In 1931, he stated that the Great Depression would end in 1933. The Depression really ended in 1933. He said in 1934 that Hitler would come to Germany and stay in the administration until he was demoted from office or outside intervention came. He predicted that the international balances would disappear and things would get out of control in 1937, and that when World War II would begin and when it would end in 1936. He also told a retired American naval officer in 1939, who asked if he would be called to active duty in later years, that he might be called up in 1941. As a matter of fact, the USA entered World War II with the Pearl Harbor raid in 1941. Cayce was actually a good photographer. However, he later gave up this job and closed his studio to fulfill his original duty. By the time he died, he had left behind 14,000 very detailed shorthand accounts of psychic advice he gave to more than 8 thousand people in 43 years. Among them were his prophecies for the future. His prophecies, whose accuracy is often proven in the fields of society, science, and geophysics, were often said many years before events occurred. His prophecies about the subjects such as wars, peace, unemployment, racial conflicts, social upheaval, etc. came true as time went on as well as the private lives of people who came for treatment. As Cayce saw the future of nations, he saw the future of individuals with the same clarity, he could easily express to them that they would marry, divorce, have children, choose various professions such as medicine, architecture, captaincy, military service. He said all his prophecies in a trance between sleep and wakefulness, but Cayce was also extremely sensitive to the effects around him when he was awake. It was this sensitivity that caused him to have to leave a conference room one day. Because he saw that all the young people who were there at the time would go to war one day, and all three of them would never come back. Cayce was almost a person who could open the doors of the past and the future, and easily get in and out of both. After 1939, he meant Roosevelt and Kennedy, saying that two of the presidents who would serve would die before their terms ended. He knew about the great economic crisis of 1929, the turmoil in the stock market and that things would be put back on track in 1933. In the 1920s, he stated that there would be conflicts of racism in America. Oracles often refuse to say on what date their prophecies will come true. But Cayce has often stated history as well. He gave the dates of the beginning and end of World War II and the date of the Vietnam War, and said that the laser beam would be found before the scientific world knew it. He noted that near Bimini, remains of prehistoric Atlantis would also be found at the bottom of the ocean, which was realized. *** Major Changes to Take Place on Earth Before the Apocalypse Cayce, in future years, that there will be major natural disasters, earthquakes and sea that would change the topography of the Earth after the glaciers will melt in an oven, when asked about the reported date of these movements will increasingly accelerate slowly between 1958 and 1998 before these changes since 1969 would start, he added he said. As a matter of fact, there is a proliferation in earthquakes both in terms of number and severity, and at least 30 earthquakes between 7-9 Richter scale were reported after 1969. Most expert geologists note that the events Cayce reported are not fictional at all, they expect to happen right next to us. Cayce stated that changes in the Earth's crust would begin off the west coast of America. Indeed, the devastating Alaska Earthquake of March 28, 1964, was also stronger than the 1908 San Francisco earthquake, with a magnitude of 8.4. Geologists note that Cayce's prophecy of the destruction of California could come true at any moment. The St. Andreas crack was found to have shifted as far west as 23 cm around Pasadena in 1980. In the opinion of many scientists, the 1989 San Francisco earthquake is just a harbinger of the real great movement. According to Cayce, who also foretold the earthquake that occurred in Peru in June 1970 and changed the topography, the destruction of California will occur. One day, a man intending to leave New York applied to Cayce. He told this businessman, who said he felt very uneasy in this city, that after Cayce went into a trance, his decision was a big hit because New York would one day be destroyed and buried in the waters. However, he also stated that this would happen in the time of a later generation. Cayce's prophecy about New York was not believed or focused on. However, during the construction of a large business center on the 14th street located in Manhattan, some engineers detected a large fault underground after the projects were completed in 1962, and the project was abandoned. Southern parts of Carolina and Georgia will also be flooded, according to Cayce. Cayce reports that the north of Europe will change in the blink of an eye. Mediterranean regions are also in the danger line. In particular, he drew attention to Italy and Greece. Stating in a prophecy in 1936 that Vesuvius and Pele volcanoes in Martinique would erupt and then a flood from the southern coasts of California to the east to Utah and Nevada, Cayce said; "When some conditions in the southern seas change and they start to sink and rise, when the same events occur in the Mediterranean and changes occur in the Etna region, we will understand that everything has started". In the meantime, it has been determined by scientists that the movements around Etna began in 1958 and that there were descents and rises on the Mediterranean floor. In addition, after an 8-magnitude earthquake on the Indonesian island of Yapen in 1979, the volcano Etna (Sicily), located directly opposite Indonesia on the world globe, exploded and caused the deaths of many climbing tourists, thinking it was extinct. Meanwhile, Mount Saint Helens in Washington state of the USA erupted twice after a long time on May 18, 1980, and blow 400 meters from the top of the mountain. *** The Displacement of Poles Cayce said in a prophecy that "There will be swells and earthquakes in the northern regions and Antarctica, volcanic eruptions in the warmer regions of the Earth." The poles will be displaced; so much so that cold or semi-tropical countries will become more tropical, and there will be giant ferns and mosses." Hugh Auchincioss Brown was originally an electrical engineer. But he had a job that he continued until his death. Brown believed that there would be a change in the axis of the earth due to excessive ice accumulation at the South Pole, and throughout his life he tried to warn societies of this danger. He always maintained contacts with scientific and geological organizations. Brown argues that with the increase of glaciers in Antarctica, the world will "tip over like a top that is getting heavy, shaking and losing its balance" and that due to this pressure, the rotation axis of the earth will move away from the polar axis and that the earth would tumble in space and begin to rotate around a new axis that would form in the direction of new poles. As a result of this, Brown, who noted that the map of the Earth will also change completely, said "A possible disaster, like the mammoths of prehistoric times, will wipe out most of the world's population " This event has been repeated several times before when the glaciers mature." In his book "Disasters of the World", he calculated that the weight of glaciers was 19 quadrillion tons. Glaciers have now reached 5,000 meters above the surface of the water, and with their terrible weight, they are constantly collapsing the rock below, making room for more ice. By the way, Admiral Byrd had seen in 1930 that only a few meters of them remained on the ice surface. And now they must be completely buried. As Charles Berlitz noted, new geomagnetic research has revealed that this is real. Extinct, in addition, the bodies of animals living in the ice in very different regions have been found in Alaska, Canada and Siberia. It's as if a huge disaster has thrown it all away and thrown it into far-flung areas. Again, in 1901, in the stomach of the Berezovka mammoth found in Siberia, temperate climate plants that no longer grow in this region were found. Meanwhile, scientists have determined that the shift in the Arctic between 1960-68 was eight miles. *** The Emergence of New Lands Cayce said "When changes occur, in a few years, new land will emerge in the Atlantic and Pacific, and the coasts of many countries today will be buried at the bottom of the ocean.” In a 1940 prophecy, he also stated that Poseidon Island would be among the first parts of the sunken Atlantis to resurface, and that after the fragments of Atlantis surfaced, many new land fragments would appear on which future generations would live. Of all the countries in the world, he said that Ireland will see the least damage from earthquakes, “if there will be a thousand concussions in the UK, there will be 43 in Ireland” he added. During these changes, he said in a 1934 prophecy that most of Japan would be buried at sea. Meanwhile, a Japanese geologist named Nobichico Obara found that the Japanese archipelago is buried in the ocean every year by 2-3 cm. Cayce also said in a prophecy about Russia that communism would end in this country. Cayce also stated that Russia will cooperate with America after achieving a free life. This prophecy also corresponds to the prophecy of Jeanne Dixon, who has said many times that America and Russia will unite against Red China. Dixon said this prophecy to President Roosevelt in 1944. However, China passed to the communist regime in 1949. *** What Will Happen In The Future? Outlook for the Coming Years Edgar Cayce, who reported on the start and end of the World Wars I and II, The Great Economic Depression of 1929 and the economic growth that relieved the world in 1933, is also quite interesting in his prophecies for the present day. According to him, the United States will start dealing with the Middle East, Arab countries and Iran from 2003, but will never wage war on Iran. On January 1, 1945, the famous prophet predicted that he would die and be buried in 4 days. Indeed, he died 2 days after he said that. In February 1945, when the Soviet Red Army had great success, just 1 month before his death, he said that the Soviet Union would collapse in 1989 and religious and spiritual freedom would be born in Russia. Russia will gradually but steadily strengthen, and in 2010 the Soviet Union will be reestablished. It won't be the same, but Russia will gather the countries of the region around it. Belarus, Kyrgyzstan, Armenia, eastern Ukraine, Kazakhstan and eventually Georgia will also converge around Russia. Cayce also spoke about Russia becoming the ‘hope of the world’ and said: ‘the hope of the world comes from Russia, but this hope is not defined as a communist or Bolshevik; freedom, freedom! People living as brothers! Core formed. It will take years to embody, but the world's hope is once again born from Russia!’ *** Cayce predicted the existence of Pluto, which was unknown in the years he lived, by saying that there was a 9th planet in the system. He also stated that there is a large proportion of gold at the bottom of the ocean, and these gold veins were discovered in the 1970s. The famous prophet is also the first person to mention laser and infrared vision. He advised his advisers, who were in discussions with him, to invest in sectors that also support military areas such as radio-telephone- telegraph communication, aviation and electronics. Indeed, these were the most important sectors in the period after Cayce. In a 1930 prophecy, he said that there would be no World War III, but that the world was in greater danger. He explained that this danger will come with natural disasters that will begin with ‘global warming', which was not mentioned at that time. He predicted that glaciers in Antarctica and Greenland would melt, but noted that water levels would rise, and coastal cities such as San Francisco and Los Angeles in the United States would disappear. According to Cayce, who predicts that the world will be shaken by bigger earthquakes as the glaciers melt, "Earthquakes will change the shape of the world forever and at the end of the 21st century the world will never be like the old". Cayce summed it up as follows: ‘There will be swells and earthquakes in the northern regions and Antarctica, volcanic eruptions in the warmer regions of the Earth, and the poles will be displaced’. *** According to Cayce, even if nations managed to prevent a third World War, this would not have prevented Paris, London and New York from being wiped off the maps. Cayce never mentioned nuclear destruction in his prophecies. According to him, by making a number of nuclear experiences, the physical forces of the world could be activated, causing earthquakes and naval raids. Cayce states that today's man has prepared his own disaster, just as he did in Atlantis. Because humanity would interfere excessively with nature to make more space for itself on earth, and it would have to pay a heavy bill for it. If the authorities of countries that are still conducting nuclear tests underground had taken these prophecies seriously and thought about them a little, they might have realized that the branch they were riding was also being cut off, and they might have realized their conscientious responsibility to the other billions of people living on it and other creatures living in the world ecosystem...! Edgar Cayce's knowledge of the medical world was approved by the Physicians of that day. He also archived his thousands of predictions on people, events, and the world. This archive is not open to the public today, but what is known and said about it today consists of information leaked to the public at the time of the events. In this sense, it would be right to care about all these prophecies and predictions that Edgar Cayce made about the future.. *** "The Coast of America Has Appeared” I t had been about 1 month since Santa Maria left the Cayman Islands, when the dates indicated the morning of September 11, 1511, at exactly 09.11, a loud shouting was heard from the porch of the captain's room. It was the bushy voice of Ruiz, his vice-captain and aide-de-camp: - "Land ahoy! Hooray, land has appeared. Look, there's a huge chunk of land ahead, like it's extending forever. Get up, everyone on board!” Everyone got up from their cabins and filled the deck with this sound. Because now everyone in Santa Maria was witnessing a historic moment. For the first time in world history, a fleet of ships headed west had managed to reach the coast of America. Exactly 5 years after Columbus's death, his cry and joy when he saw land on the coast of Hispaniola, thinking it was India, had now turned into the joy of reaching a truly great continent. Columbus died before he could see all this, but one of his soldiers, Captain Garcia, had finally discovered a new continent with the great contribution of the Oracle Bruno. About 5-6 km in front of them, the thin coastal line covering the entire horizon was vaguely visible from the deck of Santa Maria. Garcia, with his binoculars in his hand, looked carefully at the horizon again to be sure and said to Bruno, who came running next to him: - "Bruno, look at this place! This is definitely not an island. The shoreline is huge. I think we're on the shores of a big mainland, my friend. But I also don't think this is the coast of India. I think there's only one way to know for sure: get ashore and move in for a while. If, as you said, this is the new continent you are talking about, America, it will be perhaps the greatest discovery in history, my dear friend. Come, take the binoculars and see for yourself. I've been at sea for 40 years, and this is the first time I've witnessed something like this since I was a child. Come here, my friend, take a look at the binoculars, what will you think?” Bruno: - "Look at this place, it's great! How great and wonderful it looks, just like a miracle that I saw. Believe me, I'm shaking with excitement right now. Are we really arrived now? Is this America? If so, it really is a miracle. Our miracle is the success of me, you, Santa Maria, and everyone in it. We finally did it, Captain, I've always believed that. I've always told you we'll make it.” For a while, Bruno watched with great excitement the magnificent view of the coast of America on the far horizon with binoculars in his hand, and he could not separate his eyes from the horizon line, almost as if he were fascinated: - "It really looks amazing. Look at that shoreline, it's so big. Who knows where this big piece of land goes? It looks like it's infinitely large. But I'm curious, Captain. If we go ashore, how far are we going to leave Santa Maria here and go in? It'll take us days, maybe months, to get to and find that temple marked on the map. Perhaps there are also good non-aggressive natives living on this new continent who can help us. Maybe after we land, we can contact them and get help. According to my calculations on board for 6 months and the geography and history books I read, these coastal places were settlements of ancient Maya natives and the vicinity of the Yucatan Peninsula, the central region of America, where a great civilization once lived. A little to the north of us, it should be one of the largest cities in this region, its name on the map is called Cancun, look, it is marked right here. Above it, there is another big city called Merida, when you go inland. The place we are looking for, and our main goal, is right here; its name is Chichen Itza, the City of Itzas, and that great temple, Ququlcan, is right there; somewhere in the middle of the rainforest in the middle of this ancient Mayan city. So the Ququlcan Temple is hidden somewhere between the dense forests between the cities of Cancun and Merida. It says on the map that there have been no settlements near it for millennia, it is a very well-preserved place, I think, and there must be a very special reason for this.” Garcia: - "Well, all this is beautiful, but how do we find it in such a large area, Bruno, do you have any idea? As you know, I may be a very good sailor, but I don't know much about tracking on land, my friend.” Bruno: - "So, captain, the area where we will find him is covered with a large and dense rainforest about 200-300 km wide. I think it's not going to be easy for us to get there. It's like a small needle in a big haystack. But I hope God will help us again this time. Of course, I hope we don't run into these aggressive Indians again, I don't want to fight anyone anymore, Captain. Let's not forget that we came to this continent not for war, but for peace and discovery, to bring information and receive information, and of course, most importantly, to solve a great prophecy. In order for humanity to move forward and learn more, Captain, that must be our main goal. Enslaving the natives here, taking away their gold or land, or plundering these lands that belong to them, is certainly not the main goal, nor should it be. It's not like Columbus did, always keep that in the front of your mind..” “Landing to The Americas” - 11 September 1511 – S anta Maria reached the American continent that morning, on the morning of September 11, 1511, exactly 1 year after setting sail from the Port of Lisbon on the European continent. The place where Santa Maria anchored was off the coast of Tulum city, an ancient Mayan settlement on the western edge of the Cayman Islands, where the natives still live. After a long civil war between the natives, Tulum was a small coastal city engaged in fishing, which was co-built and lived with some Inca natives who emigrated here and established a city on the coast here, and the Mayans who later emigrated here. Cancun, the first major Mayan city Bruno wanted to reach, was located about 150 km north of here. But instead of near Cancun, they set foot on land for the first time around this city of Tulum. This point, where they went ashore to get to know the environment and the locals, was of strategic importance and more convenient. *** When they came ashore off the coast of Tulum, a group of locals on the beach in Santa Maria, who had reached the shore in lifeboats, greeted them with gifts. They had incense and various foods that they brought with them, as well as processed colored fabrics belonging to some special indigenous people, as well as colored stone tablets with various figures on them. When they reached the shore, Captain Garcia, with his bushy and white beard, first greeted them and shook the hand of someone who was apparently the tribal chief, with a large hat of colored feathers on his head, and he responded "hello" by taking his hand to his chest and tilting his head in front, even though he did not understand the language they was speaking. Because the strange clothes and the way of speaking of Captain Garcia and Bruno and their companions were similar to the strange strangers who came to this continent thousands of years ago on such a flying ship, that is, the Gods of the Maya and the Incas, a group of locals bowed down before them and began to worship them and sing something like a song. “Quetzalqoatl-Kuetzalkoatl”, the greatest God of the Mayan civilization, came from the east on a ship like them but that was a flying ship. After these strange movements and acts of worship on the beach continued for some time, the great chef invited them to a guest house located in the inner city for dinner. In fact, these locals had been following him since Santa Maria came ashore, and when they saw that they had come ashore, they immediately came to them and greeted them and had already prepared the tent that was used as a guest hall that they had invited, decorating it with various dishes. Garcia, who enjoyed this welcoming welcome, rejoiced and turned to those with him and made a small speech to the Santa Maria staff: - "First, I express my gratitude before God to the Oracle Bruno, his beloved sister Sofia, and everything that has caused us to go on this historical journey and reach this new continent. My dear shipmates and soldiers! First, to enlighten you, I want you to know that this is where we set foot on land today, and this is the indigenous people who welcome us, an extension of a very ancient and deep-rooted civilization and a great continent. The name of this new continent will be “AMERICA”, although it is not officially recognized as such for now. I can't fully explain to you who they are now through the Oracle Bruno, and perhaps our extraterrestrial friends who are now watching this historical discovery from afar and introducing themselves to it as “ALIEN” gave it this name. As the first Western Europeans to reach this new continent, I can say that perhaps these steps will be a small discovery for us, but let's not forget that today, September 11, 1511, is a big and important day that can go down in history. If we wanted to divide the past history into old and New ages, perhaps today could be the beginning of this new era. So I want you to accept this not as a simple discovery, but as a historical moment. Maybe official history or historians won't write our name in the history books, but I assure you that one day we you all be referred to somewhere, especially the Oracle Bruno. Now, while I owe my gratitude and gratitude to all of my staff, all of you, who contributed to our journey all the way from Spain, I want you to come with me, taking all your belongings with you at the request of this Mayan tribe and chief who humbly invited us to their city. As far as I can see, they are not aggressive, unlike other wild tribes, and by chance and with the help of God, they welcomed us with gifts and this beautiful invitation on our first trip to land. Now, all of you, pack up, leave the lifeboats here and let's move to where we were invited, please.” *** Taking their belongings with the help of locals, Santa Maria staff set off for the city of Tulum, an ancient Mayan settlement about 3-4 km inland from the coast. In fact, it was a big chance for them and also a surprise. The continents move as new and no they have no knowledge of this, they go about the places they met with people who would do you guide and interpreter, and both on this continent and shelter they will remain a major challenge for a long time with them constantly most ideal that can help perhaps the best people and were found. Because, indeed, in Tulum, a coastal Mayan city, both the Mayans and the Incas and their descendants have lived in peace for centuries, unlike the more savage and belligerent indigenous peoples in the North. In fact, it was a very good coincidence for them, perhaps a great help from God. Because, if they hadn't seen two Mayan fishermen watching them from afar and fishing in a canoe that morning when they boarded their lifeboats and headed ashore, they might not have been able to reach the city of Tulum or deal with enemies they didn't know about on this wild new continent they never knew about. Perhaps because they could not see any settlements on the coast, they would again board at Santa Maria and head north, where there were aggressive and warrior Maya tribes that were more savage than the South. Here, after 8 months of long ocean travel full of all these difficulties, perhaps their landing on the American continent at this point was the best situation they could face for now.. "Quetzalcoatl” A long with the tribal chief “Quetzalcoatl” and a group of Mayan Indians, Garcia and his team made their way through steep slopes and narrow footpaths of tropical rainforest, finally reaching Tulum after a grueling walk of about 2 hours. Chief Quetzalcoatl, when he reached the city, went to inform the other tribal chiefs that he had guests and called them to the center of the city. Bruno, on the other hand, could not believe his eyes, there were giant pyramids and statues and structures everywhere in the forests without an axe, as if they had been brought here privately and suddenly placed. Around these structures, a small city with thousands of small huts, almost as crowded as a small city in Spain, suddenly appeared. After walking 3-4 km along a deserted forest road, hoping that they would meet a small village, a huge city appeared. All this looked incredible, all these extraordinary stonework-made structures, temples and giant columns and sculptures made of stone. All of this, these simple natives who had no technology could never have built it, they had artifacts that were almost the product of a superhuman structure or technology. It was easy to see that the guest hall, which was used as a large refectory waiting for them in the center of the city, and the huts made of makeshift wooden logs and reeds that the locals apparently built later, were built by these locals. *** Around the mess hall, a series of strange-dressed Mayan Indians danced and turned around, welcoming them. Another group accompanied them with tamtams in their hands, sitting on the floor in the second row, playing tamtam. The welcoming ceremony now seemed to have turned into a complete religious ritual and ritual of worship. Quetzalcoatl, pointing with its hand in the sense of "come in" and he invited all the Santa Maria staff, including Garcia and Bruno, to the guest house, which was used as a dining hall. Along with Quetzalcoatl were other prominent tribal chiefs of the city. These strange dressed and dark-skinned men, most of whom were old, looked quite creepy when viewed from afar, but their behavior towards them was now quite friendly and even turned into a religious worship beyond that. Perhaps they thought of them as the return of their God, as in their stone tablets, which were once depicted as flying into the sky. It was a full moon at night when they approached the shore, and the surrounding dogs went up the hills and howled when they saw the skyline of Santa Maria off Tulum. Because, in some Mayan depictions, the gods were greeted by howling wolves when they first arrived. Neither Garcia, Bruno, nor the others, of course, were gods, but understanding it like this may have saved their lives. Who knows, maybe these natives were also wild and no different from other cannibal natives who ate human flesh. Here, because of such coincidentally overlapping reasons, because they uploaded a superhuman meaning to them, they were now alive. *** Captain Garcia will have understood this well that he made a joke and touched Bruno's shoulder, laughing, and: - "Dude, just play along! I think these Natives are no different from the others. Act like a god, okay? Try to look flashy and imposing. If they find out we're not gods, I'm sure they'll cook and eat us alive instead of the animals in those boiled boilers. Fortunately, for now, let's hope there's probably broth soup in it. I don't think my meat is delicious, I wouldn't want to lie heavy on their stomachs. At least, that wouldn't be nice for a God, would it, my friend?” After he said that, Bruno also threw a laugh: - "Hahaha! Captain Garcia, that was really funny. For a moment, it occurred to me, too, but I couldn't tell you on the way out of fear. And they brought us here as if they had taken us prisoner when they invited us, but I have to admit that if this is true, that is, the matter of the return of their Gods has been a great way of salvation for us. Maybe if they didn't think we were gods, as he said, we'd be boiling in the boilers in front of us right now. This is both a very funny and tragic situation, Captain. We've had enough tragedy, my friend, in the past, let's have some fun. If so, it's fine for them to accept that we are gods, and it seems to be in our best interest right now.” *** When the welcoming ceremony was over, the dancing locals left the front row and gathered in the empty space next door with the Tamtam-playing back following them. Going to their side, Quetzalcoatl and other tribal chiefs talked among themselves and then invited them all in, extending their hands in the direction of the entrance door in the sense of “come in, we can go to dinner.” There were about 100 people in the dining room, along with tribal chefs and the Santa Maria crew. There was a special place reserved for everyone, and just as they were about to sit down, something caught Bruno's attention.. "Esmeralda” - Bruno's Meeting with Esmeralda - B efore making his way to the dining hall, as the dancing locals danced outside, Captain Garcia made a hand sign to Bruno, showing a young and beautiful brunette Mayan girl wearing red shiny clothes: - "Hey, my friend, look at this beautiful girl. That second one from the far right, she dances beautifully, doesn't she? Something caught my attention when I was dancing, and I noticed that she looked at you every once in a while when she was dancing. If you want, I'll talk to this Chief, what was his name, Quetzalcoatl or something. Let this beautiful girl accompany you, huh? I've noticed that you look at her every once in a while, so don't think I've missed that. Let's get that girl for you, remember to remind me when you go into the mess hall. I'll go and try to talk to this chef for you, if you want, what do you say, my friend? It's time for a little flirtatiousness, no need to be ashamed, after all, we're not really Gods. Isn't it, my friend, hahaha.” He stroked his beard and gave a loud laugh. Bruno was both angry and delighted at his words. More precisely, he liked that girl too, and he liked it when Captain Garcia noticed it: - "Offf, captain, is this the right time? We're still worried and we're in trouble here, we've got all our work and a way to go, look what you're thinking. Yeah, I noticed that girl, too. Go talk to the chief if you want, but please don't drag me into this. I'm not looking for a love affair right now, and I'm not ready for it, my friend.” Garcia: - "Roads and jobs never end, my friend. Remember, love is always necessary, no matter where you are, it doesn't matter. I've noticed that you're looking at this brunette with care and desire. If you want, you sit here now, and I'll go to the chief and try to say something about this girl, albeit with hand signals, and see how he reacts. Go to the tables with Sofia until I get back, and I'll be right back.” Bruno, a little embarrassed, turned to Garcia and: - “I'm telling you again, Captain. And if you're going to talk about it, let everything be confidential, and please leave me out of it. Remember, you want to bring that girl to me because you want to, okay?” Captain Garcia: - "Don't worry, my friend, believe me, everything will be fine. Now, you sit down and make yourself comfortable. I'll get that girl for you, and I'm determined to do it.” *** After everyone sat down for dinner, Garcia went to chef Quetzalcoatl to talk about Esmeralda. He made a relationship sign with his hands, pointing to Esmeralda, dressed in red bright dresses, sitting in a troupe of dancers, and then pointing to Bruno, who was sitting at the table inside, and trying to say it with hand signs in the sense of “Bruno wants her.” Chief Quetzalcoatl, smiling and shaking his head in a positive sense, approved him with his head as if to say, "I get it" and went to Esmeralda to talk. He started talking to her in Mayan: - "One of the Gods has chosen you and wants you, girl. Please accept his invitation and come with us. You must be with them on this important day when the gods again honor us and our people. Remember, if we anger the gods again, there will be great disasters, troubles and deaths like in ancient times. I know your father and you very well, you are good and wise people in the tribe. Maybe that's why the gods chose you today.” After his speech, Esmeralda, a young and extraordinarily beautiful Mayan girl, stood up a little hesitant and ashamed and began to walk slowly to Garcia's. Actually, she was impressed and liked Bruno from the first time she saw him. She thought she'd get the chance to be with him and go to him. Esmeralda and Garcia smiled as the chef, Quetzalcoatl, walked in from the dining hall with them. Garcia, showing the vacancy next to Bruno said: - "Please, sit down, Esmeralda" welcome!" Gracias, Mademoiselle. "Señora Bruno was surprised and tried not to react at all in the first place and, a little embarrassed, let her sit next to him. Later returning to Garcia: - "What, Esmeralda? Is that her name? You're not kidding, are you, Captain?” Garcia: - "No, I'm not kidding, my friend. I don't know her name, but that's the first name I thought of. You know, that name is the name of the woman I love most, my mother. That has crossed my mind, and I used that name for her, so I don't mind.” Bruno: - "No, captain, of course not. All right, just like you said. I like that name, too. We've already put my foot wrong before we even start eating. I was mad at you at first, but I'm still grateful that you brought her here, my friend. I don't know, but this girl is very different, she has a very pure and clean face, more than her beauty. It's weird, but it's like there's something about her that attracts me, her gaze looks pretty smart and sharp. Maybe she is another blessing from God, and she'll help us in this land we don't know. But I'll tell you what, Sofia, Captain Garcia, it's okay for both of you to know that this beautiful brunette native Mayan girl has impressed me and I like her. Besides, I feel like I've known her a long time ago, and I'm starting to feel that way. You know, I've always been single, so I don't know, I've always stayed away from women, but now it's like this is the first time I've ever liked a woman. It's a very strange feeling, or could it be what they call love at first sight?” Garcia also sat next to them laughing and turned towards Bruno and laughed another laugh, as if his joy was beginning to be fulfilled: - "Bruno, my dear friend. That's exactly what you're saying. It's called love at first sight. It's a damn thing, but I warn you, it always gets a guy in sweet trouble. But, the fact is, this Indian girl is right up your alley, believe me, my friend. Look at this beauty, believe me, even in all of Spain, you can't run into such a beautiful girl, can you Sofia? Won't you please say something about your brother, about your brother and this girl? I hope you're not jealous of him.” Sofia: - "Offf, Captain, please don't piss me off. And why should I be jealous of him? If my brother likes her, I'd appreciate it, too. But we have no knowledge of this new continent and these indigenous people that we do not know. I mean, I don't know, I think we should be a little cautious. From the first day we set foot on this continent, it seemed a little unusual and it tired me. But, of course, it would make me happy to see my brother happy. Right, Esmeralda? Your name is beautiful, and so are you. So, let's start eating. Raise your glasses, to Bruno, Captain Garcia and Esmeralda. A toast to Esmeralda, Esmeralda and Bruno. Welcome aboard, Esmeralda!” *** After the guests had eaten, they toured the city of Tulum with the Quetzalcoatl and other city dignitaries. They spent the night in guest tents prepared for them in the evening, examining ancient Mayan ruins and wrecks. Esmeralda never left next to Bruno and Sofia that day. Although they did not agree in language, an intimate dialogue began with hand signals. Esmeralda was so happy when she returned home at night. She told her father everything that happened that day and told him about Bruno. And because there are gods who come to visit the city. Esmeralda also lost her mother 6 years ago, and they lived with her father in this small Inca tribe for many years. Although she was a Mayan daughter by her father, her mother was originally an Inca. She was carefully raised in a mixed family, a mixture of Mayans and Incas. Along with her father, they were loved and respected in almost the entire city. It was a little like the story of a Native American girl named "Pocahontas", who was one of the first women to marry and settle on the continent of Europe and was the wife of an English nobleman: Story of Pocahontas Pocahontas (1596, Virginia/America - 1617, England) was an Algonquin Native American woman who, settled in London England after marrying an Englishman named John Rolfe and became famous there in the last years of her life. She was born in 1596. She is the daughter of the Wahunsenacawh (Powhatan), chief of the Algonquins, a Native American tribe. Her real name is Matoaka. Pocahontas is a nickname meaning 'pampered'. In 1612, when Pocahontas was 17, she fell into the trap of the English, who were in search of slaves and workers. She was held captive in Jamestown, (Virginia), for almost a year. At this time she became friends with Captain John Smith. During her captivity, John Rolfe, a 28-year-old English widowed merchant, liked Pocahontas. Rolfe's main goal was to add strength to his power by marrying an indigenous princess and finding indigenous workers to work in the tobacco colonialism he made in Trinidad. Rolfe told Pocahontas that if she married him, he would get her out of here, and Pocahontas accepted the offer. Thus, for the first time, the daughter of a chief married a European Englishman. Rolfe describes his desire to marry the governor of Virginia as: "Her education is rude, her behavior is barbaric, her lineage is cursed with the benefit of agricultural enterprise, the honor of our country, the glorification of God, my own salvation, and the return of an irreligious creature to the true God and the religion of Jesus..." In 1614, Pocahontas took the name Rebecca Rolfe. Thanks to this marriage, Pocahontas' father, Powhatan, also strengthened the peace between his tribe and the British. Powhatan, chief of the Algonquins, was convinced that he should gather food on behalf of the British, and he was called "King of the Algonquins" by the British. The first British settlers to suffer famine at the time were saved from starvation thanks to Pocahontas. When Powhatan gave his daughter to John Rolfe, he showed that he believed he was a friend of the British. Pocahontas had a child named Thomas Rolfe from Rolfe shortly after their marriage. In 1616 Rolfe took Pocahontas to London. Pocahontas was baptized here. However, she never got used to the weather and climate of London. Her body also contracted diseases that her immune system did not know about. She also began to miss the place where she lived and the land. Pocahontas made several attempts to return, but none were successful. Pocahontas died on 21 March 1617, aged 21. Her body was cremated in Gravesend. Her grave was destroyed during the renovation work of the church. In 1618, her father Powhatan also died, and the Algonquins, realizing that the English had used him all his life, wanted to avenge him. However, they downplayed the power of the British guns. Soon after, only about 1,000 of the 8,000 Algonquins survived. Pocahontas never lived a princess life in Europe like Cinderella or Sleeping Beauty, but during her short dramatic life story, she left behind a painful Native American story whose name was heard by many people, but whose true story was known by so few. William Ordway Partridge built and erected a statue in Jamestown in 1922 in memory of Pocahontas in St. George church. In 1995, The Walt Disney Company made a cartoon called "Pocahontas". *** Yes, life was very strange, and there were many mysterious loves in history. In a way, Pocahontas' story would be similar to Esmeralda's story in the following years. Of course, unaware of all this, a great love had already begun between Bruno and Esmeralda. You can somehow stop wars and armies, but you can never stop a dream that will come true when the time comes, and a love that will be lived, even if there are oceans and great distances between them. You can never escape fate and what it brings. If they could escape, many innocent people could escape the bloody clutches of the Inquisition, including Bruno's mother Maria. But, unfortunately, it didn't happen, and what fate said happened. Bruno no longer believed in fate, and when he went to bed that night, he thought and dreamed of Esmeralda. Esmeralda dreamed of Bruno, too. At first, Bruno thought that the Quetzalcoatl had delivered Esmeralda to him as if he had offered a victim to God, but that night he realized that he was wrong. It could never have been a coincidence that he came thousands of miles away and met this girl and fell in love with her, and it was a quirk of fate for him. So much so that he seemed to her as if he hadn't just seen her, as if he had known her very well years ago, Esmeralda. Maybe that's what true love was like. In the following days, the relationship between Esmeralda and Bruno grew stronger. They toured the city together, participated in drinking activities specially prepared by the locals, accompanied by a fire dance in the center of the city at night, and listened with them to mysterious forest stories and Mayan tales that the late leavened old locals, children and young Mayans gathered around the burning fire and told them. And at certain hours of the day, they made love for hours in a quiet part of the rainforest. Esmeralda's mysterious beauty and body seemed to fascinate Bruno, and he could think of nothing but her. So much so that he seemed to forget for a while even the dreams and great ideals that he had come all the way from Spain and risked death for. The Santa Maria crew had been living in Tulum like kings for a month. During this time, Bruno tried to teach Esmeralda some simple words in his native language, Spanish. Even if he could not yet express his feelings, he tried to teach Spanish enough to communicate with her, Esmeralda was a very intelligent girl and she was a fast learner. Bruno then told her about his grand plans and the Great Ququlcan Mayan temple, his main goal, which he wanted to go to. He told her about the sarcophagus lid and the code of the Apocalypse, which he had kept since Spain, and the mysterious map of Atlantis that Alien had given him. Esmeralda told him that she had traveled with her father all over Central America and knew well, and that she could help him if he wanted to, wherever he wanted to go, and even wanted to spend the rest of his life with him. Bruno also told Esmeralda that he wanted to marry her, and he offered her to marry him and go to Spain together if she wanted to. According to Inca and Mayan law, it was strictly forbidden for a native girl to marry someone from a foreign people, and her punishment was death. However, this did not apply to Bruno and the Santa Maria crew. Because the people of Tulum saw them as the Gods of their ancestors from far away, and they accepted them as such. In fact, the construction of a statue to be built in the city square had begun. It was a statue of Captain Garcia, who was the first person they saw on their way to shore. Because he was the first white man the natives saw and first set foot on land, and because he was very similar to the whitebearded savior gods who came on a ship flying from heaven called Quetzalcoatl on their white clay tablets, the construction of his statue had already begun. So Bruno and Esmeralda's marriage was going to be so easy, and the whole city seemed ready for it. To the glorious marriage of the Oracle Bruno, whom they considered God, to the Mayan girl Esmeralda, who was declared a goddess.. "Bruno and Esmeralda are Getting Married” P reparations were completed and the house where Bruno and Esmeralda would live was decorated with local clothes. A large part of the people in the city of Tulum accompanied the wedding, and the marriage ceremony, which lasted 1 week, turned from the wedding into a complete festival, with entertainment and celebrations with great enthusiasm. The whole city, including everyone in Santa Maria, looked so happy. So much so that the Oracle Bruno was perhaps having the happiest days of his life. When the week-long wedding was over, the celebrations continued for another 1 month. It continued there for a while, when Santa Maria, which was moored on the beaches of Tulum, was illuminated and decorated with gas lamps, and then they left the ship again and returned to the city. Esmeralda and Bruno decided to stay and live in Tulum for a while, before Bruno's expeditions began. The needs of everyone in Santa Maria were met unresponsively by the people of the city, and everyone, including Captain Garcia, was in a good mood. They gathered for breakfast at Bruno's house on Sunday. Tables and chairs were prepared in the garden for guests who did not fit into the house. Sofia helped Esmeralda and offered gifts to guests who came home. After a beautiful Sunday breakfast, Sofia, who went to join Bruno and Esmeralda, chatted with them for a while. She was wondering how long they would stay in this city. Because Sofia wanted to return safely to her country Spain, as soon as possible, before she lingered on this new continent for too long. For about 2 years, she was away from her job, her immediate surroundings, her friends, and most importantly, from the land where she lived, that is, from her country. She was getting a little bored now, considering the long and tired cruises. She turned to Bruno to talk about it: - “Bruno, my dear brother! Believe me, I'm very happy to see you happy. You and Esmeralda are great couple. I know, we're all very happy here right now. Everything is ready for us, this city of locals almost serves us. Believe me, we could not find this comfort in palaces, let alone Spain, even in Roman times. But I'm sure you're aware that we didn't come to this life in comfort just to think and live ourselves. We have tasks and responsibilities, we have a mission and ideals, and of course you have a great mission, such as solving this prophecy and writing this book, which are your missions, I think it's unnecessary to remind us again. So we have another distant journey to Spain, including the return home, where we must continue on our way, and of course other possible dangers that await us. When do we leave here? I wonder, dear brother, when all these expeditions will end and, of course, when we will return to Spain. We can stay here for a long time if you want, but of course you have a return date in your plans I thought.” Bruno replied: "Of course I have a plan, dear Sofia. Don't think I've forgotten all our plans just because I got married and got used to a little comfort. It's all in my mind and I've already planned what to do. But the thing is, Esmeralda speaks very little Spanish, and it wouldn't be right for her to suddenly leave her father. We will stay and live here until the end of the year so that she can happily spend time here with her surroundings for a while longer and advance her Spanish during this time. And then we'll convince her father to come with us, and she doesn't have any other relatives here. In this way, we will easily head to the city of Cancun, which is our next route, and then to the temple of Ququlcan in Chichen Itza, which is our main destination. Esmeralda and her father know all about that area and will guide us along the way. If they come with us we can move forward and find the temple in the deep rainforest. Now, do you understand my plan?” Sofia: - "Yes, I understand, brother. You've come up with a really good plan. It wouldn't be right to leave Esmeralda's father here alone. It was a really great idea, so they come to Spain with us and live there with Santa Maria. I'm sure she'll get used to it very quickly, she's a very smart girl. Okay, one more thing I have in mind, Bruno. Are we going to Cancun by Santa Maria, or by land along the forest road that runs from the coastal areas to the interior? I think you're thinking of leaving the ship here and returning by land after completing the expedition. Do you have any plans with Captain Garcia? As I understand it, shouldn't that temple be somewhere inside the sea, in a wooded area? In this case, it seems impossible to get there with Santa Maria and reach it by sea.” Bruno: - "Did you lost your mind, Sofia? You don't think we'll get there hundreds of miles of land with a whole crew of ships through those wild forests. And Santa Maria is anchored here, on the beach of Tulum. We can't never leave it here like this and go overland. And while it's not even clear when we're done and when we'll come back, on this choppy ocean beach where these raging storms are frequent, where we can't predict the weather, we can never leave it alone to rot and disintegrate. Of course, we will go with Santa Maria by sea to a safe coastal area near Cancun by ship to the North, and then we will anchor Santa Maria again in a convenient place there, this time by land to enter the deep rainforest near Cancun and move to the area where the temple is. That's the plan, dear sister. We'll get there safer and faster, unless there are other obstacles or unexpected storms. But, again, as I said, we won't leave until the end of the year, we're here in Tulum for a while..” "Get Rid Of Sin” – The Difference Between Uncle Tom and Uncle Sam's Cabin – A fter months had passed, the idea that the natives in the city were still seeing them as their gods and worshipping them began to annoy Bruno. He didn't want to leave here, leaving such a bad and wrong impression. Although he was not a very devout Christian, he did not want to settle with God about it after he died, and he wanted to be remembered for acting in the name of Jesus Christ. Therefore, he would not want to leave here, taking this great responsibility and bearing the burden of sin. But if they had clearly declared the truth to them, that is, said that they were not gods and were ordinary people, they would not have been able to get out of here alive. These ruthless natives would immediately execute anyone who came with Santa Maria, especially him, if not because they were strangers and people, just because they thought they had deceived and deceived themselves, and perhaps scalped them alive, cooked them and ate them alive. Bruno had no doubt about it, and so they had to hide the truth until they left. Bruno found a solution to get rid of this sin and somehow declare the truth to them, even though it is implicit. In this way, he would leave a monument to the next generations on this land, a monument to the Spaniards and even other nations, as well as a religious sermon, telling the story of his own discovery and as the Western Europeans who first set foot in America. That is, after he had his wife Esmeralda write a note and translate it into the Mayan language, he would ask that these written notes be erected in the form of a tablet as a monument in the center of the city and his own bust and statue be made on it. Esmeralda was going to organize all this on his behalf and convince the chief of the tribe, Quetzalcoatl. On the stone tablet it was written: The Commandments of the Gods to the People on This Land “.. I write some of the things that the gods from the east, your ancient friends, want from you on this clay tablet clearly and in a language that you understand. God certainly created man. He shaped it and made you a guest on earth as a living being of clay mud, a walking and talking being. The guest, on the other hand, must act in a manner befitting himself in the house in which he is staying, that is, in this world. A guest who does things that the host does not want can go no further than being an idiot and is poorly received when sent off from the house. Now, greet these guests who come to you in such a way that you become wise people instead of a stupid man. There's no difference between a white man and a black man. Because God created them both from red clay. The world is like this, when a man comes and builds a very large and magnificent palace on the sand that he thinks is solid. But a big storm or earthquake comes, or the sea water overflows and destroys this palace, whose floor is not intact, in one day. Well, this is a man who is stupid and not wise. Don't be like this. But another man comes and builds a small shed on a rock so strong that this little house withstands all storms, winds, floods and earthquakes because its foundation is intact. This is the work of a smart and wise man. Here, as described in this example; in the countries you have just established and on this new continent, I suggest to all the generations and friends who are coming, that the inheritance they leave here should not be like this palace, but like this little shed. Build a house so strong that it will remain in your homes forever and leave a solid legacy for the future. And when you build your houses and dwellings, remember that the life of this world is like a palace that is about to collapse. Just as the world has a beginning, of course it will have an end. And a meeting with God, which means death and after, is like an eternal shed with a solid foundation, it will survive forever. Here, just like this, whoever and the new nation, state and peoples on this new continent will listen to my words and build his house, homeland and country, principles and values on a foundation as strong as that solid rock, at the will of God, will live in peace on this land forever. And those who build a palace on a rotten foundation, those who do evil, and those whose peoples are enemies to each other, will be cursed on this continent forever, eventually disappear, and disappear from the earth with hurricanes, epidemics, and severe earthquakes. Just like Atlantis.. ” (Oracle Bruno, 25 December 1511-Christmas Night) *** Bruno wrote this note on a large piece of paper and gave it to his wife Esmeralda to translate into his own language. Esmeralda was also the first person on the American continent to learn a European language, Spanish, and now she has taken on the first official dialogue and translator job between Eastern civilization and Western civilization with this important task. After a few days of trying, she managed to translate the entire text into her own Mayan language and left home to go to Chief Quetzalcoatl to deliver Bruno's manifesto containing this historical message. Bruno's important message was a great and important reference to the need for a new civilization to be established peacefully in America, and it was kind of like a declaration of the founding of a new civilization to be established on this new continent. Well, this declaration would now be embodied thanks to Esmeralda and erected in the center of the city of Tulum as a stone tablet and immortalized for future generations. This message, in fact, some of the Gospel of Jesus Christ with the wise man who built on solid rock in the last house on the sand the foolish man who built it was based on a matter of telling the story of Bruno's mind, and so very important for civilization to be established in America contained a warning thereafter. Until the last prophecy came, which, in another tablet, was another declaration of warning to humanity from tens of thousands of years ago, in the temple of Ququlcan, Bruno's main goal. Written texts and tablets are much more important and effective than spoken words in terms of being permanent in the human mind. Because spoken words fly away, written words remain. Because wise men and holy men went down in history with writing; demagogue rulers, kings, and egotistical people who thought themselves important, like writing on water, always disappeared with words and were forgotten. That's why Bruno acted like a wise man, constantly writing, taking notes rather than words, and paying more attention to written texts and documents than words. His message, was also quite similar to the story of “Uncle Tom's cabin,” which tells the story of the founding of modern America, which began in the 18th century with bloody civil wars. There was also a cabin representing America with a black character called “Uncle Tom”, representing all the natives on this continent. Uncle Tom lives in this small cabin, and the story of his life's determined struggle for freedom and liberation from slavery was told. Again, similarly, events there began as Bruno set out and reached America for the first time: Uncle Tom's Cabin The story deals with the subject of slavery. It is about the difficulties and suffering that some slaves who lived during slavery experienced in life. The main idea of the story is that every person is equal, that slavery is inhumane, but despite everything, it is necessary to be obedient to those we are responsible for. He teaches that a man must do everything in his power to protect his freedom and, if he is not free, to save his freedom. The characteristics of the character in Uncle Tom's Cabin are as follows:  man Uncle Tom: an honest, honorable, tall, handsome black  Shelby: a white boss who has many slaves of his own  Harley: a ruthless slave trader  Harry: a little Afro-American boy  Eva: a small, helpful, sweet girl with a rich family The events in the story begin on a cold February day. A boss named Shelby, who has many slaves of his own, decides to sell some of his slaves due to financial difficulties. One of the slaves he wanted to sell among them was an honest, tall, handsome black who had served him for many years. The heavy and serious expression on his face complemented his African features. This slave, whom everyone called Uncle Tom, lived in a small cabin. The slave trader asks boss Shelby for a couple more slaves in exchange for the money he gave him. At that time, a little AfroAmerican boy named Harry enters. The slave trader is very fond of his mother, who comes in to look for Harry, and wants to buy them. Shelby says he can't sell her, and his wife loves him very much. The slave trader then says he wants to take the child. The mother, who hears the conversations, wants to take the child and run away. The next morning they run away with the child. Uncle Tom, on the other hand, leaves his cabin with a slave trader to be sold to a new boss, leaving his wife and child. While crossing the river, little Eva, who has a wealthy family on the boat, chats to Uncle Tom. He tells his father that he will convince Uncle Tom to buy from a slave trader, and Uncle Tom is grateful. Eva's father is a very kind-hearted, compassionate person and buys Tom from the slave trader Harley. Eva's father makes Uncle Tom a coachman. Tom is very happy, except for the problem of being separated from his family. Eventually, Tom gets a promise from his new boss to be freed. As time progresses, Eva becomes ill and dies. Eva's father is stabbed in the stomach one night while trying to separate two men fighting in a cafe. Eva's mother sells Tom to a ruthless man. The new boss is a very cruel and evil person. His wife, on the contrary, is very kind and merciful. His wife can't help feeling sorry for the torture of slaves. Uncle Tom continued to be honest and obedient despite all the evil done. Years later, the evil boss dies, and his wife frees all the slaves after the death of Uncle Tom. *** The Difference Between Uncle Tom and Uncle Sam When we look at Uncle Tom's innocent cabin, we remember once again how precious our own freedom is. When we look again at this hut, which will be considered a monument to an honest and good person, we will remember it again. And, of course, alongside black Uncle Tom, there was a white “Uncle Sam” story. But, although Uncle Tom is a black American who lives in his little cabin in the forest, fighting racism, Uncle Sam, as we know, is shown as someone who symbolizes Modern America and is a candidate to rule the world with a fedora on his head in his paintings. Uncle Sam is a rich, powerful, white American who always shows the future with his index finger and invites young people to war. That is, a figure of a white man with a ruthless, belligerent, invading, dominating and enslaving mindset. I mean, if we wanted to describe him in the Middle Ages, where Bruno lived, maybe someone like “Columbus” could only be seen as an image of Uncle Sam. So, why is Modern America called Uncle Sam? America has managed to guide world politics at many points in the historical process that has continued from the past to the present. In Particular, we can say that the great victories achieved in World War I and II had a very important effect on the country's rise to this position. But, of course, not only with the war, but also with the level it has reached in the fields of economics, cinema and technology, it continues to add strength to its strength every day. This situation, which continues today, proves to us that he has always acted as the number one actor in the world, from his interventions in the internal affairs of small states in the Middle East and his demonstrations of power in the international arena. Here, we will briefly dig deeper into America and try to explain briefly the story of why he was referred to as Uncle Sam by examining its recent history. A businessman named Samuel Wilson, born in 1766, who lived in Troy, New York state, was known as a wealthy meat wholesaler. His business is fine, too. By 1812, however, a fierce war breaks out between the United States and the Kingdom of Great Britain – Indian Alliance. Because of the forced recruitment of its merchants into the British Royal Navy, America will react greatly to this situation and consider it a cause of war. In addition, the relentless support of the British Kingdom for the Indians was the last straw. During the war, which would last about 3 years, Samuel Wilson was assigned to the American army as a quartermaster inspector. He is asked to inspect the meat collected for soldiers and stamp “EA-US” on them. The “EA” featured here was an acronym for supplier Elbert Anderson. “US " was a shortened version of the United States, which was the recipient. But when soldiers were asked about the meaning of the US, they began to call it “Uncle Sam” along with the inspector's name, developing a joke between them, and over time this nickname spread throughout the American army. Now, anyone who saw the meat packets was making jokes saying "Uncle Sam." The war, which continued with mutual attacks, ended with the Treaty of Ghent signed in 1815. The parties retreated from their occupied territories, and the borders were adopted in their former form and re-entered into force. Meanwhile, Uncle Sam was quickly becoming famous. After the war years, several of his cartoons with the stars on the American flag began to be published in 1832. In the ongoing process, his reputation would grow even more, and the Uncle Sam pattern would often be used when talking about America. But Samuel Wilson, who gave the legend his name, died in 1854. When the dates indicated 1870, the American artist Thomas Nast gave his final form to the figure of Uncle Sam. In later years, Uncle Sam was used extensively in posters designed to recruit soldiers especially in World War I. “I Want You” was written below the picture of the old man, who was depicted as having long white hair, a frock, a vest, striped pants and a long hat. Here's the same posters would also be used as a propaganda tool in those massacre-filled years of World War II and would literally become a symbol of the United States today. *** Well, perhaps the fate of the American continent in future ages depended on getting rid of this sin, that is, choosing between Uncle Tom and Uncle Sam.. "Voyage to Cancun” - February 1512 – E xamining the note Esmeralda brought, Quetzalcoatl sent Esmeralda back, accepting the idea that this inscription in memory of the Gods be engraved on a stone block and erected in the city square. The next day, after 1 week of intensive work, the stone inscription workers finally erected Bruno's declaration, consisting of one large stone block, in the city square and inaugurated it with the participation of Bruno, Esmeralda, Sofia and Captain Garcia and everyone else in Santa Maria. For the sculptural bust of Bruno, which will be made on the inscription, a plaster mold and a face mold of Bruno were taken and work was started. After 2 months of work, Bruno's statue was also completed and placed on the inscription. When all this was over, Bruno and the others decided it was time to go. After the final preparations at Santa Maria were completed, the ship was given a sufficient supply of necessary water and supplies, and various gifts, ornaments and various plants given to them from Tulum were loaded onto the ship, and everything necessary for the departure was completed. Esmeralda and her father said goodbye to everyone in the city. On a sunny tropical winter morning of February 1512, Captain Garcia said, “We're anchoring, all aboard!" at his command, Santa Maria slowly sailed from the city of Tulum to Cancun, one of the other great cities of the Maya. The 6 months they spent here were perhaps the best days of their lives for Bruno and the others. They had a great time and were very well received by the Mayan natives here, the Santa Maria team that first set foot on the American continent. But will these chances continue throughout the voyage ahead of them? I wonder if they will face any other dangers that await them? Did Bruno really manage to find that Great Mayan temple in this dense rainforest with the help of Esmeralda? Time would show all this. *** Santa Maria was moving from Tulum along the Yucatan Peninsula to Cancun in a northerly direction, towards the upper part of Central America, off the Caribbean Sea, which is the end of the Atlantic Ocean and a shallow reef that can be considered quite shallow. They crossed the island of Cozumel, a medium-sized island located near the coast, and after a journey of about 2 weeks, they anchored somewhere south of the great city of Cancun, about 150 km north. On Esmeralda's warning, they stopped without getting too close to the area where Cancun's city center is, because when the locals noticed the ship, they could see it as an enemy attack and attack to destroy it. According to moderate indigenous peoples in the south, this city and others in the North were more belligerent, savage and barbaric. These peoples, consisting of indigenous tribes who never liked foreigners, were the Maya, Inca, Toltec, Aztec and Itza natives, each of whom lived in about 8-10 large and historical Maya, Inca, Toltec, Aztec and Itza cities, which were scattered in large rainforests, and had a total population of several million. There was a mixed society here, but in general, all their ancestors came from the same origin, Atlantis. Another interesting thing is that the Ququlcan Temple in Chichen Itza is their main destination, was the main center of worship and religious rituals of these northern Maya cities, and each year during the solar eclipse, the victims selected from the surrounding villages were taken to the top of this temple and first removed from the heart-lively place. It would be removed and sprinkled on the temple altar, then beheaded and rolled down the high stairs of the temple facing the four facades. Esmeralda and her father had been there before and had attended these rituals several times, and had witnessed these terrible massacres many times. These victims were sacrificed to the gods every year in this way. When this act of sacrifice took place and the solar eclipse ended, it was decided that the gods were saturated with enough blood and ultimately counted as a sign that the winged sun god Ququlcan was pleased, which meant that the product of that year would be more fertile, a more productive and good year. If the clouds did not disperse around the sun after the eclipse, this would be considered a sign of a bad year and an inefficient crop season, for which the massacres would continue for days after the eclipse. During these worship rituals, a traditional Mayan paint of turquoise color was rubbed on the victims to attract attention. The cut heads, which were then rolled down the temple, were placed in a large red cloth sack and taken to ball game pitches for use in ball games. The cut heads of hundreds of victims were used in ball games, a popular sport in Mayan cities, in a murderous game - similar to today's basketball - in the form of hitting the heads with their feet and scoring points by inserting them into a large hole on the edge of the playing court. Apart from this, sometimes these games were specially organized for sacrifice to the Gods in two teams, the team that lost the game was killed en masse and a bloody encounter was held in the presence of the tribal chiefs. In the final of the games, the ceremony was attended by the Great Mayan priests of the Ququlcan Temple. When Esmeralda told Bruno all this, Bruno was very surprised and scared. Although he had witnessed many inquisitions in Europe and thousands of black plague people who died horribly from Black Death disease, he had neither heard nor seen such brutality in his entire life. Moreover, that great temple where the Great Prophecy was hidden, that is, Ququlcan, was the center of such brutality. So, how could they overcome all these dangers and get to the temple, and most importantly, how could they get into it? It was a game of death. From what Esmeralda said, it wasn't going to be easy. Bruno thought for a while and dreamed that these ruthless locals were playing ball with their heads for a moment, and he had goose bumps, and now his body was covered in chills and fear. He suddenly thought of the powerless body of his mother, who was executed in the Inquisition. His primitive fears and memories that never let go of him were revived in his brain with these narratives and began to gnaw at him from the inside. Just as the cruel Inquisition started in Europe with such confessional and sacrificial games; going back to today's world and being the most loved and followed and played in giant stadiums instead of giant temples, a lot of money and effort was spent for the sake of it, football and basketball, which went through the past, perhaps this was how it started in the Old America and then spread to the whole world, especially to Europe. This issue is debated, but the history of football, which is said to have been invented in the late 19th century in England, was perhaps not good at all and was bloody. Perhaps, these bloody Mayan ball games spread from Central America to the world in later centuries. Bruno was ambivalent about how Esmeralda acted, trying to combine these terrible stories she had told and in her head how she should have achieved her goal. He asked Esmeralda how they would go back to land. Esmeralda asked Bruno to open the large map of Atlantis, which also showed in detail the Mayan lands in his bag. Bruno opened the part on the giant map that Alien gave him, showing very ancient Mayan urban settlements, and put it in front of Esmeralda. Esmeralda charted and marked a route on the map that ran from the banks of Cancun to the depths of the forest and ended at an unknown location deep in the forest in the interior: Esmeralda: - "Well, we will go along this path deep into the forest and reach the area where the temple is at this point. I'm not sure about the exact location, but along this road there is a very old path that leads there, which is little known, through the forest. It's the only safe way to get there without encountering the locals in Cancun, Bruno. Right there, we will continue along this path that I have drawn. The temple is at this point, at the intersection of the roads of all the ancient Mayan cities..” "Danger on The Forest Road” E veryone in Santa Maria came ashore in a deserted bay near the port of the city of Cancun with the help of lifeboats. Again, as always, they took their belongings and weapons with them, camouflaging the lifeboats somewhere in the forest on the shore. The port of Cancun was a natural port formation surrounded by natural structures such as walls. The big lagoon in the middle was surrounded by small island fragments that stood around it like an embankment. The interior of this lagoon, on the other hand, has been used for millennia as a natural port, as a gateway to the Atlantic Ocean of Mayan cities for many centuries. This natural closed lagoon formation protected the city from xenophobic attacks and served as a breakwater, preventing canoes belonging to Maya natives, most of whom lived by fishing, from breaking apart and sinking in major storms and under the giant waves of the Atlantic Ocean. Of course, he also protected the entire city from natural disasters such as tsunamis and giant waves. On leaving the ship, 5 personnel were left on duty at Santa Maria, just in case and against a possible enemy attack. At any time of danger, the task of these five personnel was to move the ship, either dragging it into the open sea, or moving along the coast and taking the ship to a safe place until it found a safer place. Provided that, at the end of a certain period of time, we return here, that is, to this place where they came ashore. Because there were many similar large and small villages along the coast, and when he came back from Ququlcan the crew of the Santa Maria, the ship in place in front of them and panic when I couldn't find a place for non-closed like a trap by the sea is a completely natural this one lagoon-shaped in the coastal region, and could be easily killed by the locals are circled. Captain Garcia and his crew acted by strategically calculating all this in advance before leaving the ship. After disembarking, about 40 people along with Captain Garcia, Bruno, Sofia, Esmeralda and his father began to move along an unknown small path that runs inland from the forest to the middle of the continent. The beginning of the path began about 5 km from the coast, and along this distance they had to overcome a difficult hill with belongings, camping tools and tents on their backs. After that hill, there was a large river flowing along the bottom of a deep valley 40 km long, and a small path running along the entire valley on its edge. *** After the end of this valley, Chichen Itza was finally reached by a difficult 50-60 km rugged frequent forest road. So, in front of them was a difficult 100 km road that would last about 1 month. Fortunately, Esmeralda and her father knew this area very well, and thanks to them, they would not get lost in this dense rainforest. By the end of the first day, they had barely managed to cross the hill, and at the point where the valley began, there was already a small path leading into the forest. When they got to the point where the valley began to spend the night, they set up camp and spent the night there. Fortunately, they could be protected from getting wet and rain thanks to camping tents in this forest, which received frequent and excessive rainfall. There was so much rain and fog around them that the visibility distance in front of them had dropped to 1-2 meters by evening. For someone who didn't know the way, it wasn't even heartfelt to die in a few days in a forest full of dangers of this terrible size. Well, in all these difficulties, as they moved through the valley with difficulty in the forest, they encountered another big problem. The path down to the valley path had turned into a dead-end road many years ago, when the rocks on the edge rolled into a cliff, breaking off from the continuation of the road and turning into a large cliff. When they arrived at the edge of the cliff about 50 meters high, they saw that the continuation of the path used to cross the valley had been bisected by this cliff. The path continued along the other side of the valley, on the opposite side of the cliff. At the base of the valley, there were no walking paths other than a steep and high rocky cliff, the only direction they could go was to either turn back or somehow cross the cliff across the valley to reach the continuation of the path and continue on the road. In this case, the only remedy was to cross the cliff by hanging a rope and sliding over a rope fixed to the opposite side of the Valley. It was a very dangerous road, but when Captain Garcia realized that there was no other option and no way through, he asked for the thick measuring rope, which they had previously used to measure the depth of the ocean floor, to be brought from the toolbox. He tied a strong sailor knot at the end and made the rope into a ring shape. So he created a knot where he was thrown across the Valley and prepared the rope to hold on. If the rope could be thrown off the cliff to the opposite side and hit a solid tree, a bridge would be created over the cliff where they could all slide over the rope. After several attempts, the rope was attached to one of the upper branches of a large eucalyptus tree on the opposite side of the cliff, and 3-4 men made an effort to tie the sailor's knot by squeezing the branch in the tree by pulling the rope towards them. Eventually, the rope bridge connecting the two ends of the cliff was ready enough for them to slide over it one by one. Garcia, calling out to the others: - "Well, senor and senoras! Get ready to cross this big cliff on this rope. Everyone take all your belongings and backpacks with them. Now we're going to make a thick ring of rope for everyone here, and this rope you saw will slide over the bridge and cross to the opposite side. As you pass, do not panic for fear of heights and try not to look down at the cliff. No one wants to die, do they? I know it's going to be a little dangerous, but there doesn't seem to be any other way we can cross this big Canyon, and we have to cross this cliff like this. Yes, ladies first, please, one by one. A few male staff will cross before everyone else, and then it's the ladies' turn, and at the end, the others will pass. The first men to pass will wait on the opposite side and ensure that the ladies land safely. And then, the remaining staff, and at the end, Bruno, You, Ruiz and I will cross over. Is that understood?” Bruno: - "Aye, Captain! So, please choose your most trusted and reliable people and send them ahead. Because it's really a job of courage. I don't know how many of us would dare, but I'm already scared because of the height. Look at this height, it looks creepy. I don't know if I can do this.” Garcia: - “You going to make it my friend. It looks like we have no choice, don't be so afraid. If I didn't want to check on you and encourage you, I would have done by myself first, but I have to wait here and check one by one as you cross. All right, if you're ready, let's get started. You, you and you, the three of you, come here. Now, take these rope rings and put them in turn on the rope of the bridge and start sliding across. We don't have time to lose, and our path is long, the day is moving, and when there is night, we don't want to wait on the edge of this cliff. Come on, hurry up, guys, don't you have your backpacks? Don't forget your stuff. No one gets too much of their own stuff, we don't know how much weight the rope can withstand.” At Garcia's urging, the first three men glided on the rope under the fearful gaze of the others, gliding over the cliff to the opposite side, and managed to cross the cliff in about 2 minutes and land next to the tree on the side of the path on the opposite side of the road. Others, encouraged by them, slipped over the rope one by one and crossed to the opposite side. After it had all crossed, Captain Garcia was left at the end, and he sent the remaining items to the opposite side, attaching them to the rope and sliding them, before crossing, and then began to move forward, sliding himself with the last rope he had tied. Garcia was pretty heavy, and the rope was starting to weaken. Realizing this, Bruno yelled towards him: - "Captain Garcia! Hurry up, move faster, the rope's about to break.” Garcia, with the help of his hands in sudden moves, tried to move forward on the rope with his strength to get across as soon as possible and cross the place where the rope began to break. But when he approached the part of the rope that was close to the opposite side, the giant rope suddenly broke off from where it had thinned. Captain Garcia, clinging firmly to the severed part of the rope, was now on the opposite edge of the cliff, drooping down from the end of the rope with a fearful look. “Help me! Pull me up now!" he shouted to the people above. Bruno and the others, all together, came to the edge of the cliff and started pulling the end of the rope up. Although difficult, they saved Captain Garcia from falling into the abyss at the last moment. So, after crossing this dangerous cliff, and after camping and staying there for one night, they continued their path along the valley.. "Death Valley” A fter spending the night in the wooded area at the start of the Valley on the edge of the cliff, they began walking the 40km-long path to the so-called “Valley of Death.” The reason this valley was given this name was because of the locals who mysteriously disappeared in this valley and the fact that primitive Mayan tribes had brought their dead here for burial since ancient times. Along the deep canyon of the valley, it was possible to see the remains of very old Mayan tombs and the erected stones on them, which were destroyed on both sides, on the right and on the left, and were about to mix with the Earth. It is not only limited to this, there were also many dead animals in this area under this canyon, which is quiet and so creepy. After an extremely strenuous and long hike lasting about 1 week, they managed to reach the end of the canyon. Along the way, they found no trace of native tribes, but in the mountains opposite, small huts and small Mayan villages smoking in front of them could be seen from afar along the canyon. After that, there was another frequent rainforest Road about 50-60 km in front of them to reach Chichen Itza. A path that could be reached there by passing through the forest, the path extended inland through the mountains. With an incredible variety of nature and huge plants with giant leaves, countless colorful flowers and countless species of birds chirping covered everything throughout the rainforest. Through the rainforest, before setting off, they set up another camp and rest at the end of the canyon, again as at the beginning, and collected forest fruits, meeting their water needs from a small stream at the end of the seventh day. Bruno had some things on his mind that he couldn't understand, turning to Esmeralda: - "Oh, I'm tired to death, Esmeralda. Any idea how far we got? I hope not too much, because I can't even walk. If nature wasn't extraordinarily beautiful here, it would never have been worth walking all this way. Tell me, is it true that the graves of your ancestors are on this land? You never told me why it's called “Death Valley.”” Esmeralda: - "Sofia just asked the same questions. Yes it's a true story. Once upon a time, our ancestors came to this land from an unknown place, and suddenly they had to flee all the cities. Of course, unfortunately, they died bitterly in this valley, losing the fight for life in this wilderness that they never knew about. But it's a very old story, Bruno. All the way, my grandparents and their ancestors reached out to us from generation to generation by telling us. Maybe, as you said, the scars of the tragedy of a major disaster tens of thousands of years ago are these monumental tombs and obelisk stones that we now see throughout the canyon. I guess it's just the scars of a terrible memory left to this day. That's all I know, and I'm guessing no one knows more, not even tribal chiefs.” Bruno: - “This can't be! So you're trying to imply that these cemeteries and stone-erected monuments are from ancient times? And, of course, this big disaster, this is very interesting!” Esmeralda: - "Why did you say that, Bruno? I don't know what's interesting about that, can you explain a little?” Bruno: - "Look, Esmeralda, if you remember, I saw you with all these ancient maps from a lost continent that was thought to have suddenly sunk into the ocean overnight tens of thousands of years ago, Atlantis. I think you remember, look again at this map, right in the middle of the Lost Continent of Atlantis. But oddly enough, there is no such continent in the middle of the ocean today. Now, when you said that, I thought of something else. Don't you think these tracks are what I think they are? So, the disaster that your ancestors escaped from, and of course, all these monumental tombs that you think belong to them, could have something to do with the Atlantis disaster? Maybe that's why your ancestors had to suddenly flee the cities where they lived, Esmeralda. Look around you, it's full of tombs, obelisks and giant pyramids. In the middle of this forest, in these desolate valleys where there is no one, what are all these structures doing? There must be a logical reason for all this. Maybe these lands where you lived were once part of Atlantis, and about 10-12 thousand years ago, with a big disaster, maybe a meteorite or a big earthquake, they all disappeared together, and all these structures remain from them. With this disaster, Atlantis left the mainland and sank in the ocean, disappearing. In these cities where you lived, and even in some places on the African continent, such as Ancient Egypt, they were the only traces left of it. In ancient Egypt, there are also great pyramids and countless statues and erected stones in this way. Here, there must be a common explanation for all this. In fact, I'm talking about that big temple we're going to, Ququlcan. Maybe it's a structure from the time of Atlantis.” Esmeralda: - "I don't quite understand what they mean, Bruno. Can you speak more clearly and simply in a way that I can understand?” Bruno: - "I mean, as a result, Esmeralda, please, I want you to understand this part very well. Maybe your ancestors were very smart and talented people, so I'm talking about the Mayans. But, here's the thing, they certainly couldn't have built all these magnificent incredible structures. For me, the history of these structures goes much older. Actually, Esmeralda is the other main reason why I've been researching and coming all the way to this land. I'm looking into it and trying to figure it out. Now, do you fully understand me? And, of course, I'm trying to decipher the last Prophecy, The Apocalypse, which includes a great ending that will come, which I believe the Atlanteans encoded in your temples some way tens of thousands of years ago. For this purpose, as you have already seen, we are moving towards this goal, and when we reach this temple and untie it, you will see the truth with your own eyes.” Esmeralda: - "This is really amazing, Bruno. You are truly a great and wise man for mankind. I'm absolutely sure history will write you down one day for all you've done. Because, as you said, humanity knows very little about real history, and now I'm sure of it.” Bruno: - "You are very right, my dear wife, when the time comes and you learn the truth, you will also learn much better the history and facts of your own people. Even the history of humanity and where and how life on Earth began. When we get back to Spain and I write it all down in my great book of Prophecy, you will see it with your own eyes..” B runo suddenly got up from where he was lying about midnight. He stood motionless with his eyes set on the pyramid-shaped top of the camp tent and looked up. It was as if a mysterious light had illuminated the inside of the tent, the whole place was lit, or Bruno was hallucinating. Could it have been because of those incense, a mental stimulant that contained some kind of mixture of herbs and plants that the locals served him? It was as if a mysterious hand had opened its subconscious doors one by one and wanted to tell him that he had something to write. Bruno began to tremble as if he were in a trance, he was cold, and his hands began to tremble. The beam of light he was looking up hit him in the face, creating a cold shower effect, and he immediately wanted to write down what was on his mind at that moment. He immediately opened his notebook and quickly began writing, taking his pen: “.. Write down exactly what you're told. Before the final prophecy arrives, 2,000 years after his first arrival, Jesus Christ will return again. But. Before he arrives, the forests will burn, the seas will overflow, there will be great earthquakes and epidemics, and all these disasters will destroy a third of humanity. After all this, a man who is against him will come out of Hell. He will be an evil man in a red cloak called the Dajjal, that is, the Antichrist, and will rule the world for a while. He will show miracles and magic like him, with the help of his master Satan. You will see a copy of his picture on the emblem and the Great Seal** of the new continent, which will appear ages later. That Seal will also be on a coin that will govern the world's economy. When a light is shone from the right side of the money towards the seal, you will see its silhouette. There will be a pyramid temple with an all-seeing eye on the seal. The eye will stand on the pyramid. Well, that temple is actually Ququlcan, and the eye on it looks at the secret inside it. That temple is on a giant island (Atlantis) with a big sea around it when you look carefully, and that red-cloaked villain who will come, comes from there. The man in the red cloak will rule the world, which he has turned into a pool of blood, sitting across the Red Island*** on the new continent (America), bullying the brother on both sides of the sea to the brother. That red island is marked on a new map (Piri Reis Map, 1512), which is now beginning to be drawn, and no one from Earth has ever reached that island. Because that Lost Island (Atlantis) was buried at the bottom of the ocean ages ago, but one day it will rise again to the water. It's where the stranger who gave me these notes and is now in the world, far below the ground, and those flying objects (UFOs) came from, Atlantis. And I've seen hell. They were there with Satan and his accomplices, floating in a sea of fire with dark spirits. Aden, which was once the garden of Eden, has now become hell for us, and we have done it with our own hands, selling our soul to Satan and the church and Inquisition under his protection and control..” (Prophecies, Oracle Bruno 1512) *** * In fact, a similar history of this epidemic occurred before the Middle Ages. The Black Death, which spread through ships from China and India through mice, had killed a third of the world's population, which at the time was 450 million, that is, about 150 million people. According to Bruno, this would have been the case before the final prophecy came: A table showing the history of major outbreaks and the number of deaths: from the Antoninus plague seen before B.C. to the Black Plague that destroyed Europe in the Middle Ages and the Coronavirus (Covid-19), which began in 2020, infectious diseases and viruses have also been on the agenda, as humans have been circulating around the world. Even in the modern era, which extends to the present day, it is possible to see large deadly epidemics. ** Strange signs and symbols on the founding seal of America actually showed the Lost Continent of Atlantis and a very large secret - The Last Prophecy- in the Temple of Ququlcan: *** The mysterious Piri Reis Map (1512-13) showing the coasts of America and even the location of Atlantis. According to Piri Reis, a Turkish sailor who lived in the Middle Ages, a strange creature in a red dress sitting on the continent opposite, with a place specifically marked by a red Island marked in the middle of the ocean on the map, is noteworthy. According to Bruno's prophecies, all this pointed to Atlantis and the Antichrist on the Piri Reis map: *** Bruno Oracle that night, leave the world until that day know that has the courage to talk to anyone, even fast notebook that contains some very important information and secrets of the prophecies I wrote and re-opening the map of the great Atlantis, the coast of Central America and wrote on it in red and drew a giant name: THE LAST LOST FRAGMENT OF ATLANTIS: "TEMPLE ISLAND” “The Ququlcan Temple was once here. The Antichrist, the representative of the great destruction that will come, Anti-Christ, symbolized in the Bible by 666, Will appear on this island, in America, And then everything will be destroyed in an instant When the last prophecy comes..” (Prophecies, Oracle Bruno 1512) As it is understood from this note, before the Last Prophecy, the great Apocalypse comes; According to Bruno, a series of terrible disasters would happen to the world, and the "AntiChrist", the "Antichrist" symbolized by the numerology of "666" in the Bible, would come with a new economic system after a great collapse and chaos and put a seal on everyone (Today, like a seal represented at over US $ 1) and then destroying much of the world. Well, just as this mentioned temple, Ququlcan, is important for the last prophecy; It was also important for the Anti-Christ, the so-called Antichrist, and more importantly, all these structures with thousands of "giant pyramids" on them including those in Ancient Egypt - including this Central American land, including "Ququlcan", was the extension of Atlantis on earth that he drew with that red island that was once on the ocean. Even worse, all symbolic signs, including Gods such as Quatzequatl , who was actually declared a hero or Savior by the Mayan peoples, revealed that the Antichrist, that is, the worst person of all time, was actually an Atlantean in origin: "Yes, the Antichrist will be born on a big island, but he will quickly spread his evil all over the world, the man in the red cloak, before the final prophecy comes..” (Prophecies, Oracle Bruno 1512) *** When Oracle Bruno took these notes, he decided not to mention them to anyone, including Esmeralda. Of course, he was going to put all this in the Great Book of prophecy that he was going to write in the future, but for now it would be better if he didn't tell anyone about it. In any case, he did not think that there would be a person who could understand all these events and prophecies that would take place in the distant future, even if he told them. Actually, he was right. Because these new prophecies that Bruno achieved through various visions and dream-like visions were never possible for anyone on earth until that day, not even the most talented psychics and oracles. Again, according to Bruno, together with the islands that are scattered in the Atlantic Ocean, including Ancient Egypt and now including the Maya and Inca civilizations in these lands they have discovered for the first time from Europe; In fact, it was the continuation of the Atlantis civilization in the form of a giant Island-Continent that was once buried under the ocean, and the gods that came from the sky and depicted in these civilizations were actually beings from Atlantis, and these UFOs seen in the sky from time to time were their flying vehicles from the interior of the earth. And the Antichrist which Bruno speaks of in his prophecies, would be their last king to hide underground, and before the Last Prophecy happened, he would come out of the underground with his armies, flying vehicles and terrible weapons to invade the whole world and start a great war in the future to destroy humanity altogether. Ever since Bruno first set foot on this new continent, he has been seeing clear daytime visions and trying to quickly write down all these visions in a notebook, accompanied by these apocalyptic scenes that are sometimes dreamlike, while on the journey. So much so that the notes he kept had already covered almost half of his large notebook, which consisted of about 1,000 pages. Mystery and prophecy have been united ever since Bruno set foot on this continent, and it's as if it's turned into a paper and pen and quickly passed into writing. So much so that Esmeralda, Garcia, Sofia and everyone else with her were now having trouble understanding and resolving it. Bruno was slowly turning into the embodiment of a giant prophecy as a human, the last prophecy.. "Ququlcan Temple" T hey walk along the dangerous forest road for about 10 days, and eventually the Great Temple of Ququlcan finally appeared on the great plain ahead. With Esmeralda's directions, they finally finished the dangerous journey, which lasted for days, and reached their destination. Captain Garcia carefully examined the area of the temple with his binoculars. There was a large crowd around and native warrior bodyguards surrounding the temple. Captain Garcia, turning towards Bruno: - "Yes, this is the place, captain, I'm sure of it. I also asked Esmeralda, and she said that definitely this is the temple. Can you give me those binoculars, captain, I want to see what they're doing there?” After Bruno took the binoculars from Captain Garcia and looked carefully towards the crowd, which had gathered on top of the temple and in the empty space next to it: - “Oh, My God. What is that? A sacrificial ritual is performed at the top of the temple. They take out the hearts of the native victims they lay on the stone sarcophagi, and then cut off their heads, and then this may seem incredible to you, but they roll down the stairs of the temple. Gosh! It's really awful. Here, look again, Captain, see for yourself.” Garcia: - “For God's sake, what is this? Well, how are you going to get in there in that situation, my friend? I don't suppose you want them to catch us, rip our hearts out alive and cut off our heads. Do you have a plan my friend?” As far as I'm concerned, let's make a camp here somewhere and wait until this ritual is over and everyone's gone. And then we'll come up with a plan on how to get in there.” Bruno: - "You're right about that, Captain, let's hang out here for a few days. We have enough supplies and water anyway. But even if the crowd disperses, I don't think they will leave the temple completely empty, there will necessarily be someone on duty or local soldiers around it. How can we get past them and get in? We have to make a plan tonight. I'll think about it until tomorrow morning, and the next day I'll explain my plan to you.” Captain Garcia: - "Okay, my friend, I hope you have a good plan. Or we'll get in trouble in this land we don't know about. You trust your wife Esmeralda a lot, but I'd say be careful, we don't want to fall into a trap. I don't want to lose my men for nothing. I feel like we're close to the end of this, but I still have a bad feeling and fear.” Bruno: - "I'll remember what you said, Captain. But, if you ask me, beat your fears and prejudices a little and remember how we got here. Even we couldn't go out unless we take step boldly outside Spain. Remember, you had a promise, Captain. If you want me to remind you, “there can't be a hero who thinks about the end!” and I would rather History call us heroic explorers than die like a cowardly pirate. That's your word, and as a sailor, you know better.” Captain Garcia: - "Of course, my friend, every successful sailor wanted to be called a heroic explorer instead of dying like a cowardly pirate. You know, I've had many dear marine friends and even my own people who died for it. I always remember them with gratitude and respect. They all died like hero sailors. I guess that's what God wants from us, because sometimes I can't figure out exactly what he wants. Who knows, maybe he's using us on Earth for his own purposes, huh?” Bruno: - "You're right, Captain. I'm so tired, I think the tents are ready, I'm going to bed. Good night, and tomorrow I'll tell you my plan. I think we'll think better if we rest.” Bruno said that, but he never slept that night, thinking about what to do. He had to come up with a plan to get into the temple, but what? He could have sent Esmeralda and tried to get in there the easy way by agreeing with them, but something Garcia said got stuck in his head and he gave it up: “You are trusting Esmeralda so much, but be careful!” In this case, there was only one option left: to fight them and thus capture the temple and enter. He came all the way here at the cost of his death, and now he could never come back before he reached his goal when he was so close. Besides, they lost a lot of men on the way to do it, along with Captain Garcia. He thought about all this that night and couldn't sleep at all, but he stopped telling Esmeralda about his plan, taking Captain Garcia's warning into account.. "War with The Natives in The Temple” A few days later, after all the blood rites in the temple had ended, the people around it dispersed. Only the most ruthless native Maya soldiers remained around the temple, protecting it with their spears. In Mayan, the protection of temples was one of the most important sacred tasks, and the most ruthless and large natives were chosen for this job. These warrior natives guarded the Ququlcan Temple in this way in shifts, respectively, with two separate shifts of vigils, day and night. Garcia and Bruno, leaving the women in a safe zone inside the forest after the rites had finished, spoke to their soldiers and slowly advanced towards the area where the temple was located, along with their weapons. At the time of any attack, they would first make a pre-landing that lasted 3-4 km from where they were to the temple, so that the locals would not find the place where they had set up the actual camp, and then when they got close to the temple, when it started to get dark, they would suddenly attack. That was their plan. For this, they waited for the afternoon and began to approach, dispersing into the forest in repair groups, advancing with their weapons towards the temple at around 02:00. According to the plan of attack, it would be surrounded by a dense forest surrounded by the temple, which was on a large plain, and when it got dark, a sudden raid would be carried out and captured. At this time, Sofia and Esmeralda, along with the other women, would definitely not leave the place where they had set up camp, and 2 soldiers would wait with Garcia's assistant Ruiz at the beginning. By evening, this plan had been put into effect, and they began to approach the temple in a circle through the forest in five rows. At the front of the temple were 20-30 native soldiers with spears in their hands and poison arrows hanging on their backs. According to Bruno, as many soldiers were on guard inside the temple. At the 4 main entrance gates facing the temple in 4 directions, there were 8 other native soldiers waiting to stand, one on the right and one on the left. According to Bruno's plan of attack, after the 20-30 soldiers in the outermost part of the temple were neutralized first, they would head inside with their weapons. They shouldn't have drawn the insiders' attention in the first attack. For this purpose, all soldiers would be fired at the same time collectively, and 20-30 soldiers waiting outside would be neutralized at the first open fire. That way, if they could get in quickly, they could cut off people's heads alive and take over the temple, getting rid of these ruthless native soldiers who have sacrificed for centuries, to achieve their desired goal. *** It was getting darker when everyone was in aiming position and getting closer to the temple. Garcia was waiting for the most appropriate moment for the attack, and when that moment came, he gave the attack command: - "All together, we will shoot at the same time. Did everyone hear that, are you ready? Fire!" he shouted with all his might. At the first shot, 15-20 native soldiers around the temple were about to attack them with their spears in their hands, and they were shot and fell to the ground. Thereupon, Garcia again: "Shoot, the others are coming at us, shoot!" he shouted. After that, they fired again, and another 15-20 native soldiers were shot and fell to the ground. Seeing them shot, the last 10-15 native soldiers left in the temple, this time leaving spears and arrows in their hands, raising their hands in the air with a sign that means “we surrender” and came out and surrendered. Bruno was still upset that these wild natives in charge of protecting the temple had died, but unfortunately he also knew that there was no other way to get in there. The surrendered natives were laid to the ground and their hands tied behind their backs and taken to the ball games field next to the temple. Just in case, their mouths were covered with a piece of cloth so that they would not inform the other locals and not be heard shouting. They certainly weren't going to kill them, they were going to let them all go when they finished at the temple, that was the plan for now. But will things go as they hoped? "Tunnels to Atlantis” A fter the temple was captured, Garcia sent a trooper to bring Sofia, Esmeralda, and other women to the temple through the forest where they had set up camp. As the native soldiers in the temple were neutralized, there seemed to be nothing to fear anymore, and now this was a safe place for them to stay for a while. After Sofia, Esmeralda and the other women also arrived, they all climbed the pyramid-shaped stairs of the temple about 30 meters high and entered through the large door facing the southern part from the 4 main entrance doors at the top. Along the columns leading into the Ququlcan Temple and to the intermediate decks located inside the pyramid, large torches lit all the corridors they held in their hands. There were many mysterious Mayan paintings and reliefs on the hallway walls. All of this seemed to have been done perhaps tens of thousands of years ago. They proceeded along the south corridor, illuminated by torches, and finally another tunnel Gate appeared before them, which led to the lower side of the temple. Inside the temple was like a giant maze. As they reached the central part of the temple along the tunnel, a large stone door was barely opened by all the soldiers pushing it together, and they passed through the tunnel entrance. They continued to walk through this tunnel that continued from under the temple to the underground with fearful eyes. In the dark, it was unclear how long the tunnel was. Garcia called for the torches to be relit. They went down about 100 meters along the walls, which were made of stone blocks, and the floor, which was covered with a hard material such as concrete. *** This network of tunnels extended underground about 100 meters from the ground in the form of a sloping ramp. All the other outer doors of the temple and the altar above the pyramid seemed to indicate an important path to go along this secret tunnel. They continued to descend underground along the tunnel. Along the way, Esmeralda also tried to guide them, but for the first time in her life, this temple, which she saw up close, was actually hiding much more than she knew. Finally, when they reached the end of the secret underground tunnel, they again encountered a giant stone gate. There was a Mayan relief in the shape of a solar disk on the giant door, which looked quite eerie and mysterious. Interestingly, this relief was also on the map of Atlantis that the stranger gave Bruno. For his part, Bruno screamed excitedly when he saw the relief: - "All right, this is the place, Captain! I think we've finally found it. The temple room where the prophecy is hidden and the altar stone, that is, the Mayan prophecy calendar, must be behind this door. It's definitely here, and now we have to open this door at all costs, Captain. Come on, guys, now load up together, we have to move this heavy stone door to open it. 1, 2 .. 3 come on. Again, 1, 2 .. 3 push harder.” As Bruno said just that and gave commands to open the door, oncoming footsteps could be heard running from the other side of the aisle. From a crowded group that apparently spoke in the Mayan language: - "Run, there are the enemies. Kill them all, kill them all, don't leave any of them alive. They went in front of the hidden chamber of the temple, kill them all before they know the secret of the temple.” A voice echoed through the cold and eerily dark walls of the tunnel. Bruno, in fear and anxiety, immediately turns towards Esmeralda: - "Who are they, Esmeralda, what are they saying? Do you understand? Translate for me now, I think we're in trouble, who are these people?" he shouted. Esmeralda: - "Run, there are the enemies. Kill them all, kill them all, don't leave any of them alive. They went in front of the Hidden Chamber of the temple, kill them all before they know the secret of the temple." they say. I think they noticed the soldiers who were killed outside and found our trail. They're coming this way and I think they're very crowded,” she said. Garcia, who anxiously watched the whole thing from the sidelines: - "Oh, My God! What do we do now? We didn't take the guns with us, and all our stuff is out there. Besides, when we went inside to explore the temple, we never thought they would find our trail and follow us here. God, how stupid am I! Or did one of the native soldiers, whom we laid down on this floor and tied his hands and feet, get rid of and save the others? I think I made the biggest mistake of my life. We should have killed them all, none of them alive, murderous savages.” He clenched his teeth and punched his hands and punched the hard and cold stone walls of the temple's tunnel with a great grudge until his hands bled. Seeing this, Bruno went up to her and tried to calm her down: - "Please calm down, Captain! This isn't your fault. I wanted them to live, remember? I was very upset that the other soldiers were shot, but I agreed because we had no choice. Now, the main thing is how we get out of here right now. It looks like there's no other way out of this giant stone door in front of us. Let's just say we opened it now. And this time, we don't know if it's a tunnel with no exit inside or just a closed room. Maybe he has a secret exit that leads to another location. We don't know that right now. But all I know is that there are maybe hundreds of wild natives approaching us right now, and if they get here, they will definitely kill us all. Besides, we don't have a single weapon to defend ourselves with. We brought nothing but notebooks and maps and torches. It was a big mistake, as you said. But, it seems, right now we have no choice but to open this giant door and enter. But I have no idea how we can open this giant stone door, so let me think for a while. In the meantime, everyone load up again, let's try to move the door and open it. 1, 2 .. 3 come on. 1, 2 .. 3 push harder, again.” After Bruno said this, all the soldiers together pushed again with their strength to open the heavy stone door. After another 10-15 minutes of trying, when I saw that he didn't even move: - "Unfortunately, my friend, this giant door doesn't even move. I don't think even 100 men can open up even they work all day and night" Captain Garcia said. However, the locals, who were running fast along the tunnel, were approaching them, and time was quickly running out.. "Clavis, The Key” A s they tried to open the door, Bruno re-examined the prophetic map that the stranger had given him and the part where the relief of the temple was located, bringing the torch closer in his hand. Something caught his attention. It was as if a small button was engraved under the relief. Bruno knew this strange shape from somewhere. Yes, this figure was also a symbol of the Great White Brotherhood, one of the symbols of Atlantis. But why was this symbol in this Mayan temple? When he looked more carefully at the relief shape, a Red Square Cross was drawn right in the center of the symbol. He knew this cross from somewhere. This was also the symbol of the Red Square Cross used by Columbus and his navy, and also by the Knights Templar in the Middle Ages. At the bottom of the relief: was writing. Bruno remembered that word. It was a Latin word and its meaning: “K E Y” Bruno said, "Clavis means the key, so all these shapes show a key" and then said, "no matter how big the door is, there is always a key that opens it" and now the giant solar disk above the door approaches the torch in his hand to where the relief is. Below the relief was a tabular anagram codex consisting of about 100 figures. "It's got to be a coded key" he said, and it should open this big door when you press shapes with the right combination, but which ones are the right combination? “What symbols open the door, that's important, and more importantly, if I don't find the right code soon, it means the end of all of us is coming" he said, again talking to himself and experimenting with symbols with a torch in his hand in pitch darkness to open the door.. “The Great Secret of the Mayans” - The Doors to Atlantis - O f the 100 interesting symbols on the stone codex plate, three were no strangers to Bruno. These were a fragmented state of three intertwined shapes just above the inscription "Clavis" on the map of Atlantis, and when sorted from outside to inside, they formed a key combination as follows: These symbols, which opened the door, were on the 22, 76 and 99 lines of the table. Bruno yelled with excitement when he saw it: - "Okay, I finally found it! When these three stones are pressed, respectively, i.e., 22, 76 and 99 symbols, this big door opened by itself, and these were the codes for the door. So, it's a symbolic password, the ‘Clavis’ that opens the door, that is, the ‘Key’.” Bruno, just when he said that, the footsteps of the native warriors who came running were close, and in Mayan language, someone screamed loudly: “NO, PLEASE! DON'T OPEN THAT DOOR! IF YOU OPEN IT, YOU WILL CURSE MANKIND ON EARTH FOREVER! THE DARK SPIRITS OF OUR ANCESTORS ARE BEHIND THAT DOOR! OPENING THE SECRET OF THE TEMPLE WILL BRING DEATH AND DISASTER TO ALL OF YOU AND ALL OF HUMANITY! After Esmeralda quickly translated these prophetic words of the warrior in this way, the sudden rain of Poison Arrows began to quickly come towards them. Garcia and Ruiz called out in fear and panic with a final flutter towards Bruno: - "Hurry up, my friend! Whatever you're going to do, please hurry up. If not, let's start saying our last prayer soon. They're close, a rain of poison arrows is coming at us, get down, everyone, get down and get down. Watch your back, watch your back. Ahhhhhhh!” "Death of Captain Garcia” A hhh! unfortunately, was the last voice heard by Captain Garcia. A poison arrow lodged in his left abdominal cavity quickly pierced his body. Garcia and his 6 men in front of him suddenly fell to the ground with poisonous arrows that were stuck before he even had a chance to talk, and he was on the verge of death within minutes, fluttering on the ground with black forest cobra snake venom that quickly spread throughout the body. Bruno finally managed to open the stone gate by pressing the right keys. The giant stone door opened with noise, but unfortunately bad luck caught Captain Garcia and his 6 men just as they were about to enter, at the last critical moment of the death journey. Bruno shouted: - "No, Captain Garcia, Captain Garcia! God, no, you can't die. Please don't leave us alone, you're all we have, no!" and they carried the body of the old wolf, the great chieftain, Captain Garcia, who was giving his last breath, through the door that immediately opened with the 3 people next to him. Others escaped being targeted by poison arrows at the last moment and quickly threw themselves through the large stone door that opened at the last moment. They shouted with force, the locals running behind them trying to catch up with them and staying a little distance: - "Never let them escape, throw more arrows and run fast. We have to catch up with them before they close the door. I think we shot that white-bearded guy whose leader. They can't go too far, hurry up, come on, hurry up.” *** At the entrance to the door, there was a huge market of panic, chaos and lives. As the relentless and deadly natives on one side and the Santa Maria crew, who escaped from them to death and tried to save their lives on the other, ran into an unknown future that they did not even know about, they desperately entered to be imprisoned in the last room of an underground tunnel, perhaps without another exit from a mysterious temple in this land that they never knew about. When the last man outside also entered, Bruno again found the key table that opened and closed the door, this time located in the interior of the room, and immediately pressed 22, 76 and 99 again. The door began to close with a big noise, and some of the arrows that were thrown fell into the void inside, while Bruno and others took cover on the sides of the door so that any locals would not enter before the door closed. Finally, when the main entrance door, where the Great Prophecy room is located, closed for good, hundreds of locals who came to kill them were left outside the door and failed to get in. The crowd gathered around captain Garcia first fell into deep silence inside the room inside this death trap. Maybe if they didn't find a way out, this great temple room would be the end of them, too. Bruno tried to speak for the last time, leaning tearfully towards Garcia, who was about to die, holding his hand tightly: - "Captain, I'm really sorry. Believe me, if I'd known we'd end up like this, I'd never have gone on this trip. I'm so sorry I dragged you into my own ambitions. But I want you to know that you are the best person I have ever known, and you have taught me so much that in this short time, I will never forget them for the rest of my life, and I will always be grateful to you. Please, if you want to say one last thing to us before you die, say it now. We'll be listening to you with great care. What you have to say is very important to us right now, and I want you to know that.” Captain Garcia, who was about to die, tried to raise his head up with his last power and called out to Bruno in his dwindling voice: - "Complete your goal, my friend! Because I feel like you're getting too close to him, I'm sure of it. I'm sure you'll solve the last prophecy. You have to get out of here somehow, and you have to write that book, and only you will announce it to the world. Don't forget my last words, and my last word to you is, make sure that you mention my name in this book. Don't forget to write about me, and most importantly, write about our friendship. Remember, in this universe, everything is finite and everything will disappear one day, but intimate friendships, friendships and things that were experienced and shared at that time, as well as love and memories, never die, because they are infinite. Goodbye, my friend, goodbye, everyone. I'm going to meet God now, goodbye.” He also said his last words, and then said goodbye to life, forever wrapping his big open eyes in that dark room. Death is a strange thing, but there was a fact that if there was one last prophecy that would bring about the end of the world, in fact, the death of every person was like its own apocalypse. Life and the universe were meaningless after a person died, except for the memories left behind and the stories told. And that's how Garcia said goodbye to this world with a beautiful ending, leaving good and beautiful memories behind. Of course, and the blue seas with Santa Maria, which he loves very much. Garcia and 6 soldiers, according to them, were now martyrs of saints in the struggle with evil for this purpose, that is, for the sake of wisdom and good. In this mysterious prophecy room of the temple, they made a burial place for them with sarcophagi stones standing in the corner, and they put the bodies of Garcia and 6 soldiers in the stones and prayed for them in the dark room for a while, and they spent that night sleeping there half unconscious.. "To The Last Prophecy” I t is not known if this closed room had another exit, but for Bruno, the big end was approaching. He was about to reach his goal, which he had come thousands of miles away to solve. The last prophecy was hidden in this great secret chamber of the temple, which had remained closed for perhaps thousands of years and had never been opened to the outside world before. After a brief symbolic funeral for Garcia and 6 other soldiers who died, Bruno returned to Sofia and Esmeralda, who were with him: - "Unfortunately, we have lost captain Garcia and 6 very valuable men, for which I am very sorry. Unfortunately, this great hall is now their grave. If we couldn't find the key code to the door at the last minute and close it, maybe we'd all be dead now. But we should thank God for that. According to my estimates, this closed room should be the starting point of a large network of tunnels extending underground, and the disks with sarcophagi containing the last prophecy that we are looking for must be here. Look, here are three giant diskshaped stone blocks on the floor at the end of the room that look like they're intertwined, made like millstones. My guess is that when Atlantis was wiped off the Earth and buried under the ocean by a big earthquake, those who escaped there and survived that disaster took refuge in the interior of the world through this network of tunnels and rebuilt it there. They built this network of tunnels that provided the connections of Atlantis to the Earth and the gate entrances, and marked the gate entrances to this tunnel by encoding them with symbols containing this prophecy. According to this, there are 4 main door entrances to this inner world on earth, and all of them extend through this network of tunnels to Atlantis, and the most important of these doors is hidden somewhere in this hall where we are now. I've analyzed the locations of the other doors that lead there. One is hidden in Egypt, in a secret room under the Great Pyramid. The other third is hidden in a secret temple located underground on the India-Tibet border. A system of tunnels reaching that temple is located in the foothills of the Himalayan Mountains. That's why it's the headquarters of the Great White Brotherhood. And the fourth and final entrance door is hidden in the poles. At the south and North Pole of the world, there are two more main entrance gates under the glaciers, look, right there. On this map that the stranger gave me in Spain that night, it was marked with a UFO symbol that was also the emblem of the Great White Brotherhood. But our main concern now is to solve the last prophecy in the sarcophagus stones here and get out of here as soon as possible. Or, with these secrets that we have solved forever, we will be dead and dead here before we can announce them to the world and write my book. We have very little water and supplies left with us, Sofia, most of them on the ship, in Santa Maria. Of course, if we could go back that far.” Sofia turned to Bruno with fearful looks: - "What if we don't get out of here, Bruno? What if we can't find another way out and get out? Everyone here is tired to death, and some are injured. If a prophecy like you mentioned is hidden in this dark room, how long will it take you to unravel it? We can last another week, at most, in this closed room with so much food and water. Besides, it doesn't seem to have any other output. We certainly can't go back and forth from the main door, that big stone door we entered, because hundreds of wild Indians waiting for us outside with their weapons are standing in front of the door to kill us. Their voices are still coming in. The entire temple must be surrounded by them. I don't know, maybe these stone disks where what you call a prophecy is hidden. If we can move them and lift them, maybe we can find another tunnel under them that leads out. Maybe we should pull out those stone discs and see what's there, Bruno, to solve that prophecy.” *** Bruno, when he heard the last thing Sofia said, suddenly jumped out of his place with excitement, his eyes shining: - "Sofia, what did you just say? God, why didn't I think of that before? All right, that's it. Those stone discs are made up of 3 pieces, and they must be intertwined, just like the emblem of the Great White Brotherhood sect, and also the key symbols that open the door under that relief at the entrance to the main door, that is, they are like Clavis. It is not a single disc that describes the last prophecy inside the sarcophagus stone, so the stone disc actually consists of 3 pieces, just like the symbol of the cult, and when these 3 intertwined pieces are removed from the disc and properly combined in accordance with the galactic alignment indicated by the stranger on the map, the last prophecy is resolved and also opens to another large door, the main door to Atlantis. Maybe, not even 100 meters, this room is the main door to a giant tunnel entrance that extends thousands of meters below the ground. Now, I understand everything much better. Bravo Sofia, sister, you've done a great job thinking about it. Come on, get up, everybody up, let's not waste much time. We don't have much time. We have to get those giant stone discs out of the sarcophagus. The solution to the prophecy is hidden in the proper unification of these 3 stone disks. Come on, everybody, come with me, now we're going to go into the sarcophagus altar to remove these stone discs. Here it is, at the end of the room, in these square stone blocks with reliefs on them.” Sofia was suddenly surprised by what had happened and yelled at Bruno to understand for a moment what had happened: - "What is it, Bruno? Are you crazy for God's sake? Now, as if it's not enough that we're trapped in this dark room, now you want to drag us into another mess? Can't you see that those stone blocks, maybe tons of weight, you don't think you're going to lift them with few men, do you? It's impossible, and listen carefully, brother. Yeah, you may be my brother, but remember, from the very beginning, you've led us all to a great adventure and trouble for a meaningless prophecy. Some of our men and our Captain Garcia are dead just for that, and you're still disconnected from reality as if you don't want to understand things. Look at you, for God's sake, you're crazy for a prophecy. Do you realize you're playing with all our lives? Look at me, look me in the eye and listen to me, Bruno. I don't want to die in this old temple room, now you understand me. I don't want to die in this damn place for nothing, damn it. Whatever you do, whatever you want to find, but please stop risking all our lives and go back to the real world. I want to get out of here. I don't care what you find in that damn sarcophagus anymore. And that prophecy. Do you understand me?” Bruno: - "Calm down, please, Sofia! I know all that you're saying. You think I don't know all this? That's what I'm telling you, about how to get out of here. If we go back through that main door we entered, they will definitely kill us all, and I know that. I think if we can move and remove those stone discs inside the sarcophagus, there's a secret exit tunnel underneath that can get us out. That's exactly what I'm telling you about, Sofia. I mean, it's about us getting out of here, but first I have to get them out, and then I have to intertwine them properly and resolve the last prophecy. That way, we'll do both jobs. Now, do you fully understand me, Sofia?” Sofia's anger seemed to have subsided a little and been a little convinced by Bruno's words. Sofia: - "All right, Bruno, let it be as you say, but remember, if what you say doesn't work this time, we'll never listen to you again, and if we get out of here, we'll go back to Spain immediately, you understand me? I don't want to stay and linger in this wild land anymore. I want to get back to work in Spain as soon as possible.” Bruno: - "Of course you will, my dear sister. Anyway, when I resolve the prophecy, our work here will definitely be finished, and know that I am just as tired as you are, and I want to go back. We gave lost enough here. I want to be in our house next year in 1513 and head of my practice as much as you do. And I certainly don't want to die before I solve this last prophecy that I feel is the purpose of my life and write this book. I hope you understand, sister.” After Bruno had finished his lengthy conversation and discussion with Sofia, he suddenly stood up and: - "All right, dear senor and senoras. Now, everyone who's here, come with me all together for an important job. Take a few more spare torches with you and come to the place where there is a sarcophagus at the end of the hall, surrounded by large stone walls. Our job now is to get out of here, and the sarcophagus will go into the grave and we will all try to remove the giant stone discs inside and pull them out. Is everything clear? Ruiz, are the others clear? Get all the men up, we'll need all the wounded soldiers, and then come here with me, follow me.” Calling out, they began to move slowly towards the place of the sarcophagus tomb, surrounded by large stone walls at the other end of the dark temple room, now thoroughly illuminated by torches, with a little fear, worrying about what they would encounter.. *** BRIEF INFORMATION ABOUT THE HISTORY AND CULTURE OF THE MAYA “The Most Mysterious Secret in World History: The Mayans” T he history of the Mayans, which began about 1,000 years ago, is known, but it is also estimated to have been much earlier. As time goes on, theories about the reasons why these mysterious people left their magnificent city that they had built become increasingly apparent, but there were still many things that could not be solved. For example, when the Spanish invaders went to Central America in 1517, their first goal was to capture and colonize it, as well as to spread Christianity and take its own culture there and destroy the native Maya civilization there. But that's how they found the Mayans when they got there. So, they came across a civilization that had already disappeared; everywhere there were temples, extraordinary structures and buildings, statues, but people were strangely absent. Giant buildings made of limestone by the Mayans, one of the most advanced and mysterious societies in the ancient world, were abandoned and became part of the forest. The question of how the Mayan civilization ended abruptly has been one of the longest-running events in history. The Mayans had long resisted the Europeans, but when the Spaniards arrived to settle, a society of two million people who had created the political and economic power that had built the pyramids that had become the symbol of the region suddenly disappeared. Archaeologists have found thousands of settlements here. Deep in the dense tropical forest in the region, there are also estimated to be still unexplored places. After 200 years of serious archaeological investigation, it is known that the Mayans were highly developed in the field of art and architecture. They built their pyramids and temples based on the location of the planets, knowledge of mathematics and astronomy. They used the Mesoamerican writing systems, also known as Maya hieroglyphs, to write. After centuries of prosperity and domination, the Mayans began to leave their magnificent city from 850 AD. Within 200 years, this civilization had collapsed, except for tiny remains. But how did the Mayans, who did not have tools, wheels and herd animals made by mining, build very advanced cities such as Palenque and Chichén Itz| with incredible architectural accuracy in a very large area, but which technology? It is still unclear how the Mayans managed to establish a civilization far above the level of knowledge and technology of the world at that time in the middle of frequent rainforests, where even walking was difficult, as if they had come there from the sky and suddenly were placed there in forests without an axe. However, we know that in these dense forests, the soil layer is also thin, and it seemed impossible to find and process the huge stones used in construction on this land. But the Mayans fed a very large population here. Today, they were 20-30 times more than people living in the same area. The triumphs of the Mayan civilization include numerous scientific achievements in agriculture, engineering, and astronomy. They also had an advanced mythology and language, and prophecies about the future. Today, only about 10% of the city of Palenque has been excavated by archaeologists to date. According to historians, major Mayan cities was abandoned in the 9th century, and the Mayan people suddenly and en masse mysteriously disappeared. I wonder if it was because the appearance and destiny of the Mayans were in the hands of higher powers from other worlds? Like Atlantis? Maybe they left behind signs and clues about it. An excavation in Palenque in 1952 found the pyramid tomb of King Pacal. This pyramid is the most important temple of inscriptions in the Maya world. Around it was reached a giant sarcophagus and lid belonging to King Pacal. This was the most important Mayan find to that day. Researchers believe the King's journey to the other world is pictured in the sarcophagus. Pacal, sitting in the pilot seat of a spaceship, looked like he was going into space. The strange sculptures on the lid of the sarcophagus resembled a man in a space capsule, the artist who did this tried to transfer to the stone something he saw or heard at the time, which could be evidence of the relationship between King Pacal and extraterrestrial forces. The technological frames of reference at that time were much less than we have today. In this case, it's clear that they're trying to paint something they can't understand. The Mayans built very high towers to observe the movements of the sun and stars. So, why did they need it? Among them, the most magnificent is the tallest tower inside the Palenque Palace. Inside the palace there are strange T-shaped windows. These windows most likely represent the God of the four Winds. They were studying the sky through these windows. Many of the ancient Maya sites have these observatories. Temples were arranged according to events that occurred over time, such as equinoxes, solstices. This, in turn, shows the relationship between his knowledge of astronomy and monuments. The Mayans, over a period of 6,000 years, knew without error the planet Venus, the settlement of our solar system, until 6,000 years ago, their margin of error was only a few hours. How did they calculate the return of Venus, even though they didn't live that long, they would have to have observed it for 6,000 years? They had already received this information from the Gods, and it is impossible for the Mayans to bring these systems alone. It's clear that this information was given to them by aliens who had contact with the Mayan people. One of the most surprising astronomical achievements of the Mayans is the very slow change in the rotation of the earth around its axis in space. This event, called Axis deflection, lasts more than 26,000 years. How could they follow an event that has spread for so long? Perhaps they used their timetracking skills to track and predict movements. They followed not only the sun, but also the moon, Venus, in some cases Jupiter, Mars, Saturn and some constellations. Today, the largest pyramid builders are known as Egyptians, but in Central America, ten times more pyramids have been built than in Egypt. The Mayans placed many of their monumental structures in line with solar, lunar, and stellar events, fearing that bad things would happen if they did not do so. They were in the 5th era, and believed that all previous eras eventually ended in the apocalypse. For this reason, they felt obliged to perform their rituals, activities, games and activities at the same time as these certain celestial events. Known History of the Maya Civilization: The Mayans or Mayan peoples (Mayas in Spanish) are the most recognized Native American people of Central America, living in present-day Guatemala, southern Mexico and the Yucat|n Peninsula, Belize, El Salvador and western Honduras, with a population of 7 million, in the ancestral lands that founded the Maya civilization in Mesoamerica. English (Spanish, Guatemala, Mexico, El Salvador, Honduras) and English (Belize) are also used, although the native languages they speak are languages and dialects that fall within the Mayan languages. One year, according to the Mayan calendar, consisted of 18 months, each with 20 days. There were also 5 extra days called "haab". The 360-day period called "Tun" was the basis of the Mayan calendar. The Mayans used a reverse roof Arch in their building, structured with a strong lime mortar. The fact that many of the giant-sized Mayan buildings are buildings for religious purposes suggests that religion was influential in the development of Mayan architecture. The Mayan name probably comes from the name of the postclassical Yucat|n city of Mayap|n (Yucat|n in Mayan: M{ayap|an). Currently, the only Mayan people who use the name "Maya" (Maaya'ob) very widely for themselves are the Yucatec Maya, and they also call the Yucat|n Maya, the language they speak, M{aya t'{an, which means "Mayan speech". They use the name "Maya" for 3 languages (Mopan Mayan Language, Chan Santa Cruz Mayan Language, Yukatec Mayan Language) from the Yukatec languages. But the language of the pre-Columbian Maya civilization is classical Mayan, and this language is the common ancestor of languages (Chontal, Chol) that fall into the branch of Chol languages, not the branch of Yukatec languages. A map from the pre-Columbian period showing genetic groups belonging to Native Americans according to their geographical location and DNA: The Maya civilization is one of the civilizations of preColumbian America founded by the Native American Maya peoples. The Maya civilization, a Central American civilization, has dominated the region of Mesoamerica for thousands of years, stretching from southeastern Mexico to Honduras, El Salvador and Guatemala. The Mayans (Campeche, Chiapas, Quintana Roo, Tabasco, and Yucat|n), who established five states in southeastern Mexico, produced hundreds of Polish throughout their history, and some of these dialects led to the formation of the 21-44 Maya language, which is still spoken today. This civilization, ascended circa 600 BC, started its Golden Age of the 3rd century AD (classical period, 250-900 AD), where city-states collapsed as a result of political turmoil. It continued to exist in a large area until 900 AD, and it was also in the process of ending with the Spanish occupation by the 1500s AD. Although the Maya civilization has ended in many respects, contrary to popular belief, the Mayans have not completely disappeared, they still live in these countries and speak some of the Mayan languages. The northern facade of the famous Pyramid of Ququlc|n in Chichén Itz|. The Mayans built this pyramid with a certain system, as if they wanted to reveal their knowledge of astronomy and mathematics. For example, each of the four facades of the pyramid has 91 steps. So when we add the top flat of the pyramid to the number of 364 we find with 4x91 and add +1, we find 365, which is the number of days in the year. In addition, thanks to their preference for directing and building the pyramid, at the moments when the equinoxes occur in spring and autumn; the sun's rays allow the two serpents at the bottom of the stairs to form a shadow so that "A trunk extension drawing S" is formed thanks to the projections of the pyramid (two-headed snake). This serpent is the feathered serpent, whose deities are known as “Ququlcan”, as can be seen from a carving of a Quetzalcoatl at the top of the pyramid. It is believed that the snake was chosen as a celestial symbol in the Mayans because of its ability to take the form of the orbits of celestial bodies of its body, that is, draw S's. Unknown History of the Maya Civilization: Pre-Classical period [1.000-12.000 BC] Sun course (disc), Copan According to recent finds, the actual history of the Mayan region shows that they were also here in the 10,000-11,000 BC. There is still a great debate about the Pre-Classical period; there are not many discoveries and finds on this subject. According to an opinion not very popular by archaeologists, in fact, the history of the Maya dated to between 1.000 and 12.000 BC, not 1.000 BC. Accordingly, the Mayans were descendants of a people who migrated to this continent from the legendary Atlantis, buried in the waters of the Atlantic Ocean off the Yucatan Peninsula of Mexico, the land where the Mayans were found, which began about 12,000 years ago and lasted up to 10,000 BC. The famous American archaeologist and ancient history researcher James Churchward, based his thesis partly on the 2,600 tablets discovered in the excavations of Santiago Ahuizoctla near Mexico City in 1921 by Doctor William Niven who was mineralogist and archaeologist, partly to Mayan manuscripts like Troano, Dresden, partly to the Uxmal Temple and the Xochicalo Pyramid inscriptions; tries to explain the similarities between the peoples of Asia and America by claiming that both continents were lost from Atlantis and Mu. Again, according to Churchward, since the sinking of Atlantis and Mu, there has been no progress in world civilizations; there has been a collapse, that is, a decline from a very high level of civilization, and all life that exists on other continents in the world has spread from the continent of Atlantis and Mu. Another view, put forward to explain these similarities, assumes that migration from Asia to America may have been made through the Bering Strait. The latest scientific research on this subject, yet fully-proven theory did not reveal, although the Maya language including a language family from Siberia about 16,000 years ago Amerindian occur with the wave of migration, so those living in Siberia Amerindian concluded that the language family spoke the same language until then. One of the names working on these similarities is a Turkish researcher and historian Assoc. Dr. Haluk Berkmen. One thing we can be sure of before the Pre-Classical period in the Maya region is that the climatic conditions have undergone major changes that have led to the disappearance of various animal species. These changes probably led to a shift in hunting, which was the main activity, and the defeat of wild fruit, seeds and roots. Extinct animal species and traces of human activity from this period have been found throughout the Yucatan Peninsula; hand tools found in Campeche and murals found in caves in Loltún can be cited as examples of finds showing human activity from this period. Pre-Classical period [1,000 BC - 600 AD] The debate on the start and end dates of this period, also called the "agricultural period", is still ongoing. Because, this period is also not well known. The Pre-Classical period is also divided into three main periods: 1-Early Periods (2.500-1.000 BC), 2-Middle Periods (1,000-400 BC) and 3-Late Periods (400 BC - 250 AD) The remains of a known settlement (Urban-like settlement) were found in the Soconusco region on the coast of the Pacific Ocean, and the remains were dated to 1,800 BC. The period that began with the remains of this settlement is called the “Early Pre-Classical period”. This period is characterized by the transition to established social order, the beginning of pottery and the construction of figurines from baked clay. Although known beginning of the Maya civilization dates back to 2,600 BC, systematic settlements are thought to have started in the 1800's BC. According to general acceptance, the Pre-Classical period, ends in 250 AD, and on this date the classical period begins; according to historians who have divided Maya history in the form of the “Pre-Mauryan age”, “Old Empire” and “New Empire”, and The Old Empire started in 320 BC. But, given other Central-American civilizations, the debate about the physical and cultural breadth of the Maya civilization during this period is also not over. Some strange reliefs and shapes from the Mayan civilization found near New Mexico. A tombstone lid in the shape of a man who rode a spaceship belonging to King Pacal. In Palenque, one of the Mayan cities, there is a temple known as the “Temple of the Inscriptions” among the ruins of Palenque. Standing on the 65-meter-high ladder Pyramid, this structure has a base made of large stone layers. In 1952, a fully intact grave was discovered beneath these layers. A very elegant mosaic jade mask covers the face of the decayed corpse inside the grave. The body is a 12-year-old man, who came out of the throne, belongs to a king who died in 683 AD at the age of 80, much loved by the Mayans called Pacal, Lord of the Sun. The rare beauty of this treasure, as well as the other more surprising discovery, was the cover of the Tomb. Swiss author Erich von Daniken theorized that the figure in the middle of the cover represents an alien who rules the spaceship. Classical period [600-1.600 AD] Copan obelisk, according to an engraving by Frederick Catherwood, 1839. This period set around 250 and 900 AD; according to historians who have divided Maya history in the form of the “pre-Mauryan age”, “Old Empire” and “New Empire”, "Old Empire" began in 320 AD, ended in 987 AD. This period is the period when the Maya civilization was at its peak in construction, urbanism, the recording of monumental inscriptions and in many areas, and there was a great development in the mental and artistic field. During this period, they were at an advanced level in many ways compared to societies in Europe and elsewhere in the world. This period is also called theocratic period. The reason why the period received this name is that political power was in the hands of religious groups, and all economic, cultural and social life was developed by taking a religious axis. Clergy groups have always had significant influence over the administration of the Maya States of the classical period, that is, over their rulers. Although there was also a noble class, it was the combatant (commanders) that held power. Although the clergy were influential in the administration, they were never rulers; the image of the Mayans as clergy was destroyed by the understanding that the cities were constantly at war with each other. Since agriculture was the main economic activity during this period, the class of agriculturalists also took their place in the social classification in question. It is believed that maritime trade also developed during this period. The findings suggest that the Mayans were also able to trade with non-Central American peoples; for example, Panamanian gold was found in Chichen Itza. The best known from this period are archaeological sites: Tikal, Uaxactún, Piedras Negras, Cancuén, Caracol, Yaxh|, Naranjo, Xultún, Río Azul, Naachtún, Dos Pilas, Machaquil|, Aguateca, Palenque, Yaxchil|n (okunuşuyla Yasçilan), Kankí, Bonampak, Quirigu|, Tulum, Edzn|, Oxquintok, Ceibal, Xamantún, Cop|n (okunuşuyla Kopan), San Andrés, Yaaxcanah, Cob|, El Cedral, Ichpaatún, Kantunilkín, Kuc (Chancah), Kucican, Tazumal, Las Moras, Mario Ancona, Muyil, Oxlakmul, Oxtancah, Oxhindzonot, Pasión de Cristo, Río Indio, San Antonio III, Nohkuo Punta P|jaros, San Manuel, San Miguel, Punta Molas, Tamalcab, Templo de las Higueras, Tupack, Xlahpak, Tzibanché and Kohunlich. The two important centers of the Petén region, whose activity increased during this period, are Uaxactún and Tikal. Among these, Uaxactún (600 BC - 889 AD), located 25 km north of Tikal (Guatemala), is the site where the oldest Mayan temple in the region is located and the existence of a "false dome ceiling" was first observed. Today, Tikal (800 BC - 869 AD), which is in a forest, has the effect of Teotihuacan and has been the largest city of the "late classical period" America with its population reaching 100.000 in its heyday. (The population of Maya cities is generally thought to be between 5,000 and 50,000.) Located in the middle of the river systems flowing into the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea, this center is connected to a complex commercial network and has a strategic importance. Tiqal temple The cities of the classical period and the post-classical period were the main residence of the Maya and the places shown on the central map. It was also the site of the spread of the Mayan culture inherited from Atlantis. Towards the year 1000, the city of Chichén Itz| allied with the Cocoms living in Mayap|n and the Xiu living in Uxmal. This alliance, known as the "Mayapan Confederation", was disbanded in 1194 by Hunacc Ceel, the leader of the Cocoms. The losing side in the battles were the Itzas and Xiu. Thus, the rise of the Itzas, who advanced under the leadership of leaders of MayaToltec origin, stopped, and confusion began. The itzas abandoned their city and headed for the forests of the Petén region and established a new city on Tayasal Island in Lake Petén Itz|. Mayap|n's supremacy lasted until 1441. On this date, Ah Xupan Xiu, the leader of the Uxmal Xiu, took the city of Mayap|n and put an end to the Cocoms. Mayap|n had a population of 12,000 in its heyday. Mayap|n was a fortified city with stone walls. Toltek influences are clearly visible in its architecture. Eric J. Thompson elaborates on this period in his work "the inhabitants of the East Coast of the Yukatan Peninsula". Historical records of the Mayans during the period of mayap|n rule in the region (1200-1480 AD) reports that the Putuns were able to maintain their influence in the bakhalal and Chactemal regions. In this case, the reason why they left their city south of Tabasco and returned to Potonch|n seems not yet clear. Following the fall of Mayap|n, the Yucatan Peninsula was divided into 16 principalities. As a legacy of the constant fighting between the Xius and the Cocoms without ever having a truce, they also constantly fought between them. That's what the region was like when the first Spaniards arrived on the continent. After many unsuccessful attempts since Hern|ndo Cortés set foot in the area in 1542, finally in 1697 the last Maya and Central American cities were also invaded. These last cities were the Tayasal city of the Itzas, the Zacpetén city of the Ko'wojs, and the Queixil city of the Yalain. Lion tablet, Palenque The greatest deity of the Mayans, the famous deity known by the name "Ququlcan” or "Quetzalcóatl ". Maya Nations, peoples: In addition to the blood-related factor in the formation of different tribes in the Mayans, it was also a factor in the grouping of those who did the same job in the production activity. For example, in the formation of idols, there is a coming together of families engaged in fishing and maritime trade. Major Mayan Nations (Distributions by Country): In Yucatan Peninsula  Itzas (itzas): They probably got their name from the semi-legendary guide Itzamn| (“ore of the sky” or “dew of the clouds”). Itzamn|, also called Zamn|, is the person who, in oral tradition, named everything in the Yucatan Peninsula and discovered the medicinal benefits of plants, inventing Mayan writing and hieroglyphs. After his death, he was deified by his people and temples were built in his name. He is said to be buried in the pyramids of Izamal. According to the chumayel texts of Chilam Balam, the Itzas came from the south in 435 and founded the city of Siyancaan Bakhalal in the place where Bacalar is today. (Syan Caan means” to be born“, bakhalal means” place of reeds"). Experts believe that discoveries in the kohunlich site may change this history, as masks bearing the effects of Olmek, Chichimec and some Teotihuacan have been found here. The ceremonial area is also similar to that of Teotihuacan, if the magnitude factor is not taken into account. But the chumayel text says that the Itzas only stayed in Bakhalal for 60 years. They must have founded Chichén Itz| in the period between 495 and 514. They then left this city as well, living in Champotón until 928-948, and after 40 years of travel they returned to Chichén in a state hybridized with the Toltek and Chichimec culture. Archaeological remains of this tribe are found in the north, north and east of Campeche, North and middle of the Yucatan, and north of Quintana Roo. Their last capital was the town of Tayasal in Petén (Guatemala). Xiús: settled north and northeast of Campeche, northwest of the Yucat|n, and west of the Quintana Roo. They entered the Yucatan Peninsula from Petén. They lived in the famous city of Uxm3al, the capital of their kingdom. At one time they fought the Chichén Itz| Itzas, legend has it that Prince Ququlcan came and made peace with these kingdoms or tribes and founded the new capital, Mayap|n. (This is also symbolized in the Mayan flag.) The name of its ruler is more commonly known as Ah Mekat Tutul Xiu. He settled in Uxmal between 987-1007 and founded the Mayap|n Confederation with the Itzas. The Confederate council consisted of the Beys of Chichén Itz|, Uxmal, Mayap|n, Itzamal, Tulum, Ichpatún and other principalities. This alliance must have lasted until 11751185. Because, in 1194, Itzas are seen to have abandoned Chichén Itz|. At this time, the gentleman of the Cocoms of Mayap|n was Hunacc Ceel. Mayap|n's founding date is stated as 1047 and its demolition date as 1254. Mexican troops supported Mayap|n in the war against the itzas. Later, although the Lord of Uxmal also declared war on Mayap|n, he was defeated and his city was occupied. A descendant of the last king of Mayap|n founded another city called Tibolón and harshly ruled the people of Cocom in this city, which became the other Maya tribe that encountered the first Spanish invaders in the 16th century. The  last individuals descended from Xiús settled in the city of Maní and adopted this city as their capital.  Cocomes: They settled mainly north of Quintana Roo and northeast of the Yucatan. They continued their hegemony until the period 1441-1461. At that time, they were defeated by the descendants of the itzas, and this time they received support from the Xiús. Between 1461 and 1500, there is a structure in the form of small settlements, between which there is no trace of unity and authority. As a result of the fact that the Xiús and Cocoms were in constant conflict without ever reaching a truce, these settlements fought non-stop and suffered great blows with epidemics and hurricanes. Their last manager is Hunacc Ceel. The Last individuals descended from the cocoms settled in the city of sotuta and adopted this city as their capital. Putún People: Some research suggests that they may have come from Campeche and that the name of their city was Champotón.  Those in Chiapas and in Part of Tabasco:  Chontal People: They settled on the Tabasco plain, whose administrative name was La Chontalpa.  Zoque People: They settled in La Chontalpa and West and north of Chiapas.  Tzotzil People: They settled in Central and eastern Chiapas.  Tzeltal People: They settled in Central and eastern Chiapas.  Tojolabal People: They are located in the forests and valleys of Chiapas. Lacandóns People: Their origins are in the mythological Lacan-Tún region (central and Eastern) in Chiapas.  The Ones in Guatemala:  Kʼ icheʼ People: These people have a wide variety of dialects. It is believed that the number of speakers of this language is about 1,000,000. The places where they live today are Solol|, Quetzaltenango, El Quiché and Totonicap|n. Their capital in pre-Columbian times was Utatl|n or Gu'marcaj.  Qʼ eqchiʼ People: They live south of Alta Verapaz, Izabal and Petén; in the censuses between 1987 and 1991, the Republic of Guatemala announced that the number of those who speak this language in Guatemala was 400,000. When this description was considered correct, the number of speakers of this language in all countries was 421,000 in 1998. But today, it is believed that 726,723 people speak this language in all these countries.  Mam People: They live in Huehuetenango, San Marcos and Quetzaltenango; 519,664 people speak this language, their capital was Zaculeu at one time. Kaqchikel People: They live in Sacatepéquez and Chimaltenango; 475,889 people speak this language, at one time their capital was iximché.   Q'anjob'al People: Live in San Marcos and Huehuetenango; the Guatemalan government announced in the 1998 census that the number of those who speak this language in Guatemala was 126,000. The number of speakers of this language in all countries was 146,800 in 1,998.  Pokomo People: Live in Baja Verapaz and El Progreso; the Guatemalan government announced in the 1998 that the number of those who speak this language in Guatemala was 85,000-90,000. Ixil People: They live in Huehuetenango, El Quiché and Alta Verapaz; 69,137 people speak this language.   TZ'utujil People: They are a people who have lived south of Solol| and north of Suchitepéquez since the end of the 13th century. Previously, they lived on the shores of Lake Atitl|n and Chicacao, where cities such as Santiago Atitl|n, San Pedro la Laguna, San Lucas Tolim|n, San Juan la Laguna and Santa María Visitación were located. 100,000 people speak the language. Their pre-Columbian capital was Chutnamit, whose name was Ajtziquinahay in Popol Vuh.  Popti' People: They live in San Marcos and Huehuetenango; the Guatemalan government announced in the 1998 census that the number of those who speak this language in Guatemala was 77,000. Their number in all countries was 88,000 in 1998.  Chuj People: (Rama Chol) They live in Huehuetenango; 38,253 people speak this language.  Pokomam People: They live in Chiquimula and Jutiapa; 31,000 people speak the language. Once their capital was Mixco Viejo. The Ones in Belize:  Qʼ eqchiʼ People  Mopan People The ones in Honduras:  Chʼ ortiʼ People The Ones in El Salvador:  Chʼ ortiʼ People: They settled in the northern part of the Río Lempa River (present-day Santa Ana and Chalatenango provinces); since 13th century, they were influenced by Pipil People.  Pokomam People: They were located in what is now Santa Ana and Ahuachap|n prefectures. Their capital was first Chalchuapa, then, was Atiquizaya until 15th century, captured by Pipil people. Other Mayan minority peoples The Ones in Yucatan Peninsula:  Chel: Their Capital Was Izamal. Chan: Their inhabited areas were Maxcanú in the northwest of the peninsula.   Cupul: Their enclave was in the east of the peninsula and their capital was in Zací, where nowadays Valladolid is located. In 1533, they were forced by Francisco de Montejo El Mozo, along with the Cocoms, to abandon their lands. Those in Chiapas and in part of Tabasco:  Chiapa: They were settled in Central and eastern Chiapas.  Tojolabal: They were settled in Central and eastern Chiapas. Petén: This was a name given to hunters or those who went hunting in the Mayans.  The Ones in Guatemala:  Awakateko: They live in Huehuetenango; 16,272 people speak this language.  Ch'orti': They live in Chiquimula; 9,105 people speak this language.  Sipakapense: They live in San Marcos; 6,344 people speak this language.  Akateko: They live in Huehuetenango; 5,572 people speak this language. Sakapulteko: They live in El Quiché; 3,940 people speak this language.  Uspanteko: They live in El Quiché; 1,231 people speak this language.   Tektiteko: They live in San Marcos; 1,241 people speak this language. Mopán: They live in Petén; 468 people speak this language.   Itza': They live in Petén; 123 people speak this language. Religions and Beliefs of the Mayans: According to Mayan tradition, all living things on earth have so far undergone four ages or epochs, each spanning very long periods of time and ending in deluge-like destruction. According to Popol Vuh, the Bible of the Mayans, Giants also lived in very ancient times, and Semi-gods ended the “age of giants” by killing giants. Now we are in the fifth age. The present world is carried by four fraternal protectors (Bacabs), settled in four directions, like the ends of a cross. In Popol-Vuh, one of the Mayan scriptures, the following words about creation, the creation of the world and the creation of ancestors in a later era give an idea of the Mayan beliefs about creation: “..Sound means verb, word means creation. The earth was created by the word. The word came in the form of seven figures. ( ... ) The beings in those early times were shapeless. They knew how to talk. The sun wasn't visible yet. ( ... ) The gods created the first people of the Fourth Age by kneading. As the ancestors of the Fourth Age, they first made four men, then made four women for them through the word while the men slept. These ancestors were made like gods, they were similar, they were perfect. They knew everything they saw, they understood. They reflected their knowledge and wisdom (performing their craftsmanship) on stones, mountains, and nature. They spoke the same language as the gods and got along perfectly with each other. In the end, they knew everything and studied the Four Corners, the four directions of the Earth and the sky. But the gods did not like that they were equal to the gods; so there was no distinction between the gods and the people. So, the great gods decided to limit the power of man-gods, that is, the ancestors. As the face of a mirror misted, the ancestors darkened their eyes, and now people could only see what was close to them, and they could not see far. 'They lived and multiplied in the land of the rising of the sun.” (Popol Vuh, Holy Book of the Mayans) Apart from the buildings used as temples, the palaces of the rulers and the residences of noble people decorated with murals and plaster were also among the interesting monuments. Paintings of noble rulers or Kings were painted on these stone walls or on colorful mosaics. The Concept of Three Realms: The concept of the three realms in Asian shamanism also appears in Maya shamanism. The Earth, the underworld, and the divine, the spiritual Sky. Just as in Asian shamanism, the underground realm and the spiritual Sky are divided into floors; in the Mayan tradition, they are divided into such floors. The most important difference between them is the number. Like the Aztec tradition, according to the Mayan tradition, the spiritual Sky consisted of 13 “celestial floors” (in Asian shamanism, this number usually becomes 7, 9, or 12). Between the Earth and the divine realm, the lowest or most dense and rough of these environments was the Earth where people lived. There were 13 gods called Oxlahuntikú on each celestial floor. The underground realm consisted of the lower parts of the other-realm, the bad parts, and the sky floors were the upper and illuminated parts. Every Shaman who ascends to the celestial floors in an ecstatic or trance must descend into the underground realm, which is the lowest, worst and most terrible layers of the other realm, before he ascends to the sky. In the Mayan tradition, the underground realm, as found in Asian traditions, has 9 floors. Those who reside here are called Bolontikú. These floors that make up the Mayan hell are called Mitnal. The underworld is dominated by the death god Ah Puch. Again, the concept of the “Tree of Life”, which connects the three realms in shamanism, is also found in the Mayan tradition. The tree of life encountered in many traditions on earth is called Yaxché in the Mayan tradition; the branches of this tree, whose roots are underground, are like a divine tree that reaches up to the celestial floors called “Sidret-ul Munteha” in the Islamic faith, extend to the celestial floors. Rites: Rites in the post-classical period are better known than in previous periods. In the Mayans, the pyramids function as a kind of Temple. During the ceremony, the people would take part in the area below, in front of the pyramid that counts as a temple, present what they brought to the temple and make wishes. It is believed that gold, children and virgin girls were offered as an offering to the deity of Chac, to the holy senate of Chichén Itz|; The children were presented because they were naive. According to Silvanus G. Morley, who stated that public speeches in temples, i.e. speeches, constitute an important part of the rites, he sought help from the gods for various purposes, such as meeting and marriage rituals or knowing the future, prophecies, staying away from famine, disease, war and disorder, getting rid of haunting spirits, succeeding in attempts, and having children for women who did not have children. The style of the Mayan Oracle-cleric (shaman) calling to the divine realm resembles that of the Etruscan Oracle-priests. Currently, in rites, Mayan shamans recite a kind of folk song in a style of rhythm and melody based on maqam, similar to natural speech. Dancing was also an important part of the ritual. Like men, women had their own dances, and men and women rarely danced together. For example, the Holcan Okot dance, which asked for help and protection from Kakupat, was performed by 800 warriors with serial movements made without the slightest mistake. Festivals for the gods were held on the days determined in Tzolkin, that is, the "liturgical calendar". At the beginning of each canicule, a fire was lit and eagle feathers danced a "hundred feet" dance (Canicule or "canicule" in French, derived from the word “canis” meaning "dog" in Latin. It is the French form of the name given to the period between 22 July and 22-23 August in the Middle Ages in 1500.) Clergy organized the ceremonies, the decoration of the temples and the presentation of the offerings. Other events include a ball game called pot-a tok or pok-ta-pok, games resembling a theatrical play, parades, and various feast celebrations. Ceremonial Items:  Sacrifice yourself.  Animal sacrifice.  Human sacrifice. It applied to those taken prisoner in battle, slaves, or those chosen from birth, the victim's heart was removed or beheaded. The custom of human sacrifice is not seen in the first Mayans, it emerged later. In fact, not all of the victims were forced to sacrifice, and they were promised an enviable future. After death, they would accompany the sun, and four years later they would be reborn on earth in a more enviable way. This belief explains why some victims volunteer. Death was the beginning of a rebirth. This belief may have probably been caused by the corruption or misinterpretation of esoteric knowledge of symbolic death and second birth events in initiations.  Dances, songs, games and prayers.  Food fasting and sexual fasting.  Eating hallucinogenic mushrooms and drinking fermented beverages (balché), smoking wild tobacco, eating special foods prepared from psychoactive plants.  Presentation of presentations consisting of animals, plants, flowers, incense (frankincense), feathers, crustaceans, turquoise, obsidian, jade, gold and copper objects. A handmade male figurine and a Mayan king mask made of Jade. One of the ceremonies still practiced today is the Ch'a Chaak ceremony led by H-men (A Type of Shaman), which is held to refer to the Chaqus, who are considered helpers of the rain god when the rainy season is delayed. They believed that some caves, such as the loltún and Balankanché caves, were places of entry into the world. Regardless of Christianity, the talking Cross (La Cruz Parlante), which has its own element of the Mayan religion, is the stylized form of the tree of life symbol seen in Palenque. This cross of the Mayans is 19th century. During the Caste (Castas) War that came with their rebellion in their midst, its use has been a unifying element and enabling them to endure many suffering. This war allowed the Mayans to be independent on their territory, and this event was the only one of its kind in America. (Today's Yucat|n Peninsula includes three states of Mexico: Yucat|n, Campeche, and Quintana Roo. Thus, the present-day use of the term Yucat|n does not refer to the Great State of Yucat|n in the past or to the geographically indicated Yucat|n Peninsula.) Death in Mayan Religion: The word "die" also means "journey" in the Chorti Indians, descendants of those who wrote the Book Popol-Vuh. The Chorti Indians believe that the deceased migrated to the other world by pulling a rope with the end in the hands of God. This belief is also found in Asian shamanism. The concept of Astral body or captive body was also present in the Mayans. They would call this second "life", spiritual second self, or coexistence of a person "way". This concept still exists in today's Mayans. According to Mayan religion, a spiritual being called a second life or way after the event of death makes a journey like the journey of shamans in a trance. First, Xibalba (underground realm) makes its way to Insert a tag ; there must cross a river with the help of the guard dog (xoloitzcuintle) (This belief was also present in the Ancient Egyptian religion, even in ancient pagan religions in Anatolia, the door to the underworld was known as “Hades” as the gate of the underground hell, and according to some esoteric interpretations in the religion of Islam, it is believed that Hell is under the ground, within the world, it has 19 gates and “He has a guard named "Malik") (Similarly, the symbolism of crossing the river in the afterlife, which symbolizes the transition from one medium to another, is encountered in Asian Shamanism and many traditions). Again, on one of the sky floors, there is a Happy Paradise that can be reached by spiritual beings who have earned it. (In the Mayans, the desire to become a martyr was well used by the rulers to reach this paradise). According to some, the concept of Soul migration in the Mayans was different from that in Hinduism, although the concept of Soul migration was also found in the Mayans, as was the concept of Soul migration in other pre-Columbian American civilizations and some Indians. Traces of this belief are also found in the story of the rebirth of King Pacal and in the story of the Twins in Popol-Vuh. For this purpose, the skulls of ancestors were preserved in the Mayans, where the "cult of ancestors" was also located. (Crystal skulls were also found during Mayan excavations). The Ball Game: In the Mayans, the ball game, which evokes the creation of the universe and other astronomical phenomena, was seen as a kind of ritual. At first, it was a rite of initiation about death and rebirth, representing the origin of the universe, and then it was also about legitimizing military action and political power. That is, as well as the liturgical function of the ball game, it had its political and economic sides. First of all, the ball game symbolized the clash of good and evil, light and darkness, that is, opposing forces in the universe, while the ball in constant motion represented stars in motion and the forces of creation. There are different versions of the game depending on the period and location. The number of players also varies depending on these factors. It was usually played by hitting a ball made of rubber with a belt, knees, shoulders and hand blows. In this game, called Pot-a tok, the goal was to pass the ball through a pot-like ring that was attached vertically to a wall. Currently, the game is still practiced in Guatemala in liturgical style, and in Mexico for tourists or only for sports purposes. Some of the features in the versions of this game that do not have the ring are reminiscent of American football. In some places, the game was also played with a reed or racket, in which case measures were taken to protect the head and chest from ball blows. The game could also be played at night. At the end of the game, there was always no sacrifice. There are no historical sources to indicate that the team that lost the game was sacrificed. Some historians believe that the prisoners of war were also forced to play this game, and they were already predetermined prisoners to be sacrificed, whether defeated or defeated. Anyway, since wounded and tired prisoners have no chance of winning, when the game is played with prisoners, it can also be interpreted as a show of political and military power. In Guatemala and Honduras, they play among themselves, sometimes a reward is also placed in the game, and the women obtained in the game are believed to be prostitutes. Language and Literature in the Mayans: The first person in the world to decipher the Mayan Alphabet was a Ukrainian-Russian scientist, expert on Ancient Egyptian-Maya civilizations and historian was Dr. Yuri Knorozov (1922-1999). Knorozov was also an expert on ancient Greek and ancient Egyptian languages, and was mainly investigating whether there was a connection between the Maya civilization and the Greek and Egyptian civilizations for many years. Knorozov, after working in Moscow on this subject for many years, was studying some of the striking results he found, some scientific results that included texts that solved the mystery and translation of the Mayan Alphabet. The results he found were very surprising, but most of all, the analysis of a Mayan text he obtained also included words of Greek and Egyptian origin: - CONNECTION OF THE MAYAN LANGUAGE WITH THE GREEK ALPHABET AND ANCIENT EGYPT – (Author: Dr. Yuri Knorozov) (1956) Dr Knorozov, who conducted intensive research on yeast in the 1950s, summarized his important results on THE MAYANS AND THE GREEK-EGYPTIAN-ATLANTIS connection in a text including rosaries on the legendary lost continent of ATLANTIS, in the following-5-article: 1- "MAYANS" had a very high civilization. They had colonies almost all over the world. They had great influence over ANCIENT EGYPT, CHINA, INDIA and GREECE... " 2 - "THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN gods ISIS and OSIRIS are very similar to the MAYA kings and queens. MAYANS tried to invade GREECE, and the Greeks defeated them and followed them to where the Lost Continent of ATLANTIS sank. " 3 - "Thousands of years ago, the continent of ATLANTIS sank, and the ANCESTORS of the MAYANS, who founded the Maya civilization by getting rid of it and escaping, lost thousands of their soldiers during this escape. So they wrote the MAYAN story of the disaster and told it in their stone tablets written thousands of years ago. In 400 BC, the grammarians took advantage of this epic when they reorganized the GREEK alphabet. For this reason, letters with the same value in the GREEK alphabet appear in different places. An article about this appeared in two newspapers called “Revista” and “Manida” in the 1800s." 4 - "In very ancient times, there was a great flood or disaster, but the MAYANS predicted when this disaster would happen, and the ancestors of the Mayans who fled ATLANTIS also recorded this important information on stone slabs. " 5 - "Again, according to these analyses, the encoding of the GREEK alphabet in alphabetical order, that is, the meaning of letters in the alphabet, described this disaster in the Mayan language as follows (the Mayan equivalents of the letters and the English translation will be given just as the author stated):" 1. ALPHA = AL (heavy) PAA (break) HA (water) 2. BETA = BE (walk) TA (place) 3. GAMMA = KAM (receive) MA (earth) 4. DELTA = TEL (depth, bottom) TA (where) 5. EPSILON = EP (obstruct) cymbal (make edge) ON-OM (whirlpool, to whirl) 6. ZETA = ZE (strike) TA (place, ground) 7. ETA = ET (with) HA (water) 8. THETA = THETHEAH (extend) HA (water) 9. IOTA = IO (all that exists and moves) TA (earth) 10. KAPPA = KA (sediment) PAA (break, open) 11. LAMBDA = LAM (submerge) BE (go, walk) TA (where, place) 12. MU = MU and ATLANTIS (Lost Lands) 13. NI = NI (point, summit) 14. XI = XI (rise over, appear over) 15. OMIKRON= OM (whirlpool, whirl) IK (wind) LE (place) ON (circular) 16. PI = PI (to place little by little) 17. RHO = la (until) HO (come) 18. SIGMA = ZI (cold) IK (wind) MA (before) 19. TAU = TA (where) U (basin, valley) 20. UPSILON = U (abyss) PA (tank) ZI (cold, frozen) LE (place) ON (circular) 21. Thi = PE (come from) HI (clay) 22. CHI = CHI (mouth, aperture) 23. PSI = PE (come out) Thi (vapor) 24. OMEGA = O (there) MOK (whirl) KA (sediment) The author, without breaking the Order of the Alphabet, collected the English language of the saga as follows: - “Heavily break (the) waters extending (over the) plains. (They) cover (the) land (in) low places. Where (there are) obstructions, shores form and whirlpools strike (the) earth with water. (The) water spreads (on) all that lives and moves. Sediments give way. Submerged in (the) lands (of) MU & ATLANTIS. The peaks (only) appear above (the water). Whirlwinds blow around little by little, until comes cold air. Before where (existed) valleys, (now) abysses, frozen tanks. In circular places clay form. A mouth opens, vapors come forth and (volcanic) sediments.” *** Mayan Alphabet Since Maya manuscripts were destroyed by the Spanish invaders, by the destructive influence of time, and by moisture over time, there are not many examples of Maya literature. Today we have only four surviving artifacts:  Dresden manuscript (Codex Dresdensis): Chichen belongs to the Itza Region, 12.-15. it is believed to date from the century period, and is currently located in Sächsische, Dresden, Germany. Part of its content is about the "Period of Venus".  Tro-Cortesianus or Troano manuscript: belonging to the region of Campeche, 12.-15. it is believed to belong to the century period, it is currently located in the Museum of America in Madrid.  Peresianus, also known as the Paris manuscript: it belongs to the region of Chipas (Palenque), 13. century. He is believed to have stayed from, and is currently based in Paris. Part of its content is about Mayan prophecies.  Grolier manuscript: discovered in a cave in the 1970s, 11 pages, is now in a museum in New Mexico. Of the Mayan languages, Chilam Balam is written in the Yucateco language, Popol Vuh is written in the Quiché language, while cakchiquel historical records are written in the Cakchiquel language using the Latin alphabet. Since they were written by the Spanish, there are doubts that they can carry Spanish influences and have undergone some changes compared to their original state. After all, though, they are the original books of the Spanish-occupied Mayans. Indeed, ancient inscriptions discovered in the cities of Acrópolis, Tonin|, Chiapas confirm Popol Vuh. The Collapse of Mayan Culture and the Reason for the Conflicts That Date Back to Our Era: Although the fall of Teotihuacan at the end of the classical period, Maya societies first experienced a period of shaking, this event allowed the Maya peoples to establish the cores of large, new settlements that would later flourish in the "Upper Lands" (Tierras Altas). Many cities such as Tikal, Tonin|, Yaxchil|n, and 9. 10 with a century. they peaked between the centuries. The reason for the collapse of the main Maya centers is still a mystery to historians and most of them. However, many people based on the data of archaeological research have also put forward various views on this issue. First of all, there were small states that constantly fought wars between them. Wars and invasions can be considered as a cause of weakening. On the other hand, during this period, a climatic disturbance appears to have occurred, the consequences of which resemble those of an El Niño Hurricane. Changes in climates may have dealt a heavy blow to agriculture in the Mayan region. In addition, natural disasters have shown that the clergy cannot be effective in divine matters, and clergy whose authority is weakened may have been blamed by the public for famine and lack of substances essential to life. One of the most important signs of the collapse at the end of the classical period is the obelisks erected in memory of a number of events. After 889, it was no longer erected and large architectural structures could not be built. Another symptom seen in the following centuries is that the long system of accounts, famous for its certainty in the calendar inscriptions of Central America, has not been used again (anymore), which indicates the end of the cultural tradition. Although there have been migrations of small groups, there is no indication that a major migration to the Yucatan has taken place. Although the Mayan people remained closed in their territory and eventually did not arrive at a situation as spectacular as the old empire, they entered a new process of development. In the postclassical period, the Quichés (Guatemala) founded the most important of the "upper lands" city states or principalities. In our age, the Mayan peoples have managed not to disappear, despite various attempts by the new republics against them. An example of this is the Battle of Caste (Castas), in which thousands of Maya natives were destroyed, exiled and captured in order to prevent the Rebellion of the Mayans in the Yucatan, opened by Mexico. The civil conflict in Guatemala (1966-1982) also resulted in the deaths of 40,000-200,000 people, most of whom were natives of Mayan ancestry. Mayan survivors still live in southeastern Mexico, Belize, Honduras, El Salvador, and Guatemala (the largest of the ethnic communities in this latter country). Some Other Claims About the Mystery of the Mayans: A Turkish researcher and author Yilmaz Aydin, who claims that the Mayans knew that the magnetic axis and Poles had been displaced in the past, and also calculated the 11,960-day period of 405 full moons and the 25,626-year precession period, defends the following idea on this issue in his book ”Mayans": “..With tools such as the Mayans, who built structures without massive wheel, and in terms of its architectural style, extra-mathematics, calendar and astronomical information, in terms of both cities to leave suddenly for some unknown reason seems to be in terms of some mysterious civilization. Authors and ufologists interested in mysterious subjects attribute the Mayans ' extraordinary knowledge of some areas to the fact that they came from legendary continents where they were supposed to have sunk and had contact with aliens. According to them, there are signs in Mayan texts and Mayan art and architecture of these ancient eras of the earth and its contact with aliens, and in fact, Mayan history has not experienced progress, but a collapse, a decline from a high level of civilization. In addition to advanced societies today, there are still some primitive societies, at the time when the Mayans were at an advanced level of civilization, there were communities living at a backward level in the region; the history created based on the thesis that civilization has always developed is full of inaccuracies. As there are communities that are developing, BC when they are at an advanced level. There are also communities that have been in a process of decline and collapse since 10,000 years, and there may also be communities that have been in balance for some time with cosmic contact. Just as nowadays, while space technology is being experienced on the one hand, people in various parts of the world continue their lives in primitive conditions on the other hand; In the past, there were Maya civilization on the one hand, and quite backward societies under the influence of their traditions in Central America on the other. Today, we look at communities that live without digesting technology and all just as the "primitive community" cannot be branded about the 21st century, we cannot look at some communities that were not culturally developed in the past and make certain judgments about that period..” Again, an American author mentions in his book that, according to Mayan legends, the city of Uxmal was founded by an extinct dwarf race that made the stones rise up spontaneously by whistling. Allegedly, these are extraterrestrial beings, and in his book, he said "There are still plates of half-eaten food belonging to a people who have disappeared, even halved food in Uxmal. Who or why they escaped is unknown". Again, another mystery about the Mayans is the crystal skulls discovered during Mayan excavations and the abnormal skulls discovered in the Yucatan, which are not very common in the world. Inside them there is also a crystal skull, which is made of a completely unknown crystal. According to some researchers' interpretation of the information contained in Popol Vuh, the Mayan Bible, it is stated that living beings on earth have undergone four ages or periods, each covering very long periods of time and ending in deluge-like destruction. The secret of the fact that the Mayans were able to perfectly calculate the dates of these demolitions in their calendars almost exactly accurately has not yet been solved. These skulls, found in Mayan and Aztec remains, have been linked by some scientists to extraterrestrial visitors or The Lost Continent of Atlantis. The most well–known Crystal Skull was found in Mayan remains in Belize by Mitchell-Hedges in 1927. The skull is a clear quartz consisting of a single piece. Its height is 12.7 cm, its width is 32 cm, and its depth is 12.7 cm. In 1970, tests conducted by Frank Dorland at Hewlett-Packard laboratories concluded that the skull was an extraordinary object. Mitchell-Hedges, the explorer of the Crystal Skull, said that in order for the skull to be made this way, given the primitive technology of that day, a person must sand this piece of crystal for 300 years without stopping. *** "Bruno's Explanation and Analysis of the Mayan Calendar” - 1512 - B runo, Sofia and Esmeralda and others followed them, lifting the lid of the sarcophagus with a large square cross on it in front of the large sarcophagus in the dark temple room at the end of the tunnel that runs underground on the great Ququlcan tag in Chichen Itza, now hidden in the forests deep in the Yucatan Peninsula, and entering the small chamber that they thought was the Tomb of the King. Bruno: - "All right, now everyone tries to move this stone disk at the same time. On the count of three, we'll all lift it together, okay? 1, 2 ..3” He said, and together they tried to dislodge and remove the giant stone disc at the top of the sarcophagus lid. They didn't budge in the first few attempts and couldn't lift. On top of that, Bruno said: - "Let's get some rest, and then we'll move on again, I have a feeling we'll move it if we try a little harder". Sofia, turning to Bruno: - "So, how did these Mayans build all these things, all these calculations, all these magnificent structures, Bruno? I don't understand, do you think they disappeared or were destroyed by someone because they knew all this?” Bruno: - "Yes, the Mayans were far, far ahead of us in math, calendar and astronomy, Sofia. But they didn't build all this, they didn't have enough information or technology to do it. They were only heirs, just as we now came here, they were only heirs and Guardians of these structures left to them from Atlantis. Now look at this tomb, we were actually hoping to find a king's tomb, but we found an astronomical calendar, and maybe this is the great prophecy that explains the future. Look, I have this translation of Plato that I brought with me in my bag, which was banned in Europe for centuries, but I found the original Arabic translation of it in an Andalusian library in Cordoba and had it translated into Spanish before I left. These are their number systems, this system that actually belongs to Atlantis, but the Mayans also used it, so we'll do our analysis accordingly:” Mayan numbers, from 0 to 19. Mayan numbers, from 200 to 10,000. - "Like other pre-Columbian peoples of Central America, the Mayans counted not with a base of ten, but with a base of twenty, that is, with a force of twenty. The base value of this system was 5. It is known that the concept of zero existed in the pre-classical Mayans (Or their predecessors, the Olmec people) (Much earlier than the Arabs). The inscriptions reveal that they made calculations with numbers in the hundreds of millions, and the dates they indicated date back to very ancient times. They made extremely precise astronomical observations, made diagrams of the movements of the Moon and planets, and were able to predict solar eclipses. Like other Central American civilizations, they had a calendar based on a much more precise "Solar Year" compared to that of the Julian calendar used in Europe.” - "Yes, gather everyone, we'll try again? Here, it's a big sarcophagus lid, but I think it's just a big part of a giant calendar, the others could be under it. Yeah, let's get it up again, what we're looking for is in here, right in the center of the temple.” At the Observatory in Chichén Itz|, known as "El Caracol" (The Snail), the Mayans calculated the solar year as 365,2420 days (Yucat|n, Mexico) Bruno continued his speech excitedly as he tried to lift the lid together: - “The Mayans had mainly two calendars in their work on time: the calendar called Tzolkin was religious, this calendar was also called the “Holy year”, the “Magical Calendar” or the “Liturgical Calendar”. The calendar called Haab was the solar calendar. The Mayans determined the solar year to be exactly 365,2420 days; (according to Modern astronomy, the solar year is exactly 365,2422 days). In other words, the annual difference between the account of the Maya, which is supposed to lack time measures such as minutes and seconds, and the account of modern astronomy was only 17 seconds. The religious calendar consisted of 260 (20x13), and the solar calendar consisted of 365 days (kin). At the end of the 365-day solar year, 20-day 18 months, they obtained the epagomena in the ancient Egyptians and Greeks in a style similar to the five-day addition they made, which is why it is also called the “ambiguous year”. For both calendars, there was a conflict at the end of a period of 18,980 days, that is, after 52 years of 365 days or 73 years of 260 days, this period is specified as 52 “Ambiguous Year”. - "Let's pull it stronger again, this time by turning it, 1,2, 3 come on.” *** After some effort, they moved the lid of the sarcophagus from the floor, where it was fixed with a big noise, and lifted it up, dislodging the giant lid, which weighed about 1 tonne. In the compartment under the lid there was another wheel with strange shapes on it in the shape of a large disk. "This should be the first part of that calendar," Bruno said. Then, we had to find the other parts, and they said it had to be under this, so they took out the first wheel and barely put it aside in the empty part of the chamber. Below the first calendar was a gear wheel, this time smaller than ten in diameter. This huge stone wheel in The Shape of a gear wheel was a continuation of the first calendar, just like pieces of a puzzle. “It should be the second piece," said Bruno excitedly,” we found it, let's take it to the first one." They also carefully moved the second part of the calendar to the side of the first. Nothing was visible in the darkness, except for a small area lit by several burning torches. Burning more torches would make the already closed and very little air space more dangerous, and it was risky if they couldn't get out of here because the fire would attract attention and maybe there might be other locals around. Bruno's dream was to take these giant stone discs all the way to Spain with Santa Maria, but it was impossible at the time. To do this, after finding all the pieces of the calendar, they had to take them out of this closed room and climb 100 meters up through the large underground tunnel, take them to the entrance of the temple, and eventually lower them down a total of 100 steps of stairs, first carry them to the entrance of the temple, and then move them through the forest to the ship on the beach 100 km away. But it was hard to even move these stones, weighing tons, let alone pull them out. So, if the last prophecy was to be resolved, he had to do it right here and try to draw pictures of stone disks by writing all this in his notebook. Eventually, he would try to reach a conclusion by combining the analysis of the prophetic calendar in his head with the Atlantis notes he had kept since he left. Getting to the third smallest piece was not difficult, it was at the bottom and smaller than the other two pieces. They moved him with the others. Bruno first, he examined all the stone discs brought with great care and began to think quietly. These three giant stone wheels were a giant calendar that explained the Great Prophecy. Two question marks in Bruno's head were constantly tampering with his mind:  First, why did the Mayans code their calendar on these disk-shaped wheel-stones and mark the end date of the calendar as 13 Baktun?  Second, why did the table indicating the prophetic dates left by The Stranger contain some dates selected from the number Pi and end in the number 2222? Bruno, from the beginning, thought that the answers to these questions could be in the number Pi (). Bruno would use the number Pi when calculating the date of the Apocalypse from the Mayan calendar. For this, he wrote in his notebook the first 500 digits of the number Pi, known since Archimedes and expanded by his own efforts: Bruno then opened it by finding that Page in the large notebook he was holding, and started writing by throwing a large title: THE SOLUTION TO THE MAYAN PROPHETIC CALENDAR? (Oracle Bruno) - 1512 First, he opened a table containing the prophetic dates that the stranger left him, encoded the dates that he marked 10 years ago in the number Pi, calculating what number these dates correspond to in the number Pi. The results were interesting, Bruno was about to solve the Mayan Doomsday Clock: 1522--> hidden in the 8798th figure 1822--> hidden in the 46047th figure 1899--> hidden in the 5284th figure 1922--> hidden in the 1734th figure 1945--> hidden in the 13657th figure 1999--> hidden in the 11197th figure … … 2199--> hidden in the 1427th figure 2222--> hidden in the 4903rd figure According to the Mayan Cosmogony, the history of the world consists of 13 baktun (approximately 5125 years) circuits, and the end of each of them includes radical changes and great innovations for the world. The circuit we're in is the fifth and final circuit according to the Mayans, and it will end on the 13. 0. 0. 0. 0. However, the period of 1 baktun, which the Mayans meant here, was not the end of a period of 5125 years, which, when calculated, was equivalent to December 22, 2012, which is mentioned in the approximate solar calendar. The main code they mean is the disk they draw on the calendar of the 13-time solar year period, that is, the number of Pi, which is the anchor section of a complete solar circle, hidden in 13rd Baktun was the date of the Apocalypse. So why did the post-Christ dates that Bruno found on the first disc of the Mayan Doomsday clock end in 2222? The Mayans had calculated the end of time as 13 baktun. When Bruno calculates 13 baktun as 13. 0. 0. 0. 0 exactly: 13,3333 × 366,6666 =4903. So, after 13 baktun, why did the Mayans use 4 zeros. The answer to this was again mathematical and hidden in eternity. Because, in mathematics, if you divide any number to infinity, the result is zero. Alike: π/ =0 I mean, after 13rd baktun, the door to the Infinity realm within the number Pi, that is, to the Apocalypse, is the number pi 4903. hidden in the Digit (between 4903 and 4906) was a 4digit apocalyptic date: *** 2222 *** The Mayans actually calculated the date of the Doomsday as 13.0.0.0.0 Baktun and they encoded it into a giant calendar. So, what did that really mean? 13 Baktun was actually a giant code in which the Mayans, who were also adept at mathematics, placed the true date of the apocalypse in the number Pi (π). Did the Mayans come up with this information themselves, or did they get it from a lost civilization far more advanced than themselves, called Atlantis? In 1512, the Oracle Bruno realized that all this could not be a coincidence, at the end of his 22 years of work, which he had continued since childhood, and now all the stones were about to sit in place. “It's all over, we can't go back now, it's too late!" he said to himself and removed the sarcophagus lid of the temple and placed the last of the three large stone disks in place. Now everything was ready, he was about to find out which date actually 13th Baktun coincide with that is the biggest secret of human history hidden in the Mayan Calendar, which is impossible to solve, by calculating the hidden code in the number of Pi: *** 13 Baktun: 13,3333 × 366,6666 (day) = 4903rd code The 4903rd number of the Pi number coincide with the year 2222. *** Disc One: It Was The Mayans' Doomsday Clock. 16000 and 2222 seemed to be coded and marked by two important dates in the Clock. Also, the number 1,872,000 (117 × 16,000) is the world's mileage hour? According to the prophecies of the Mayan priests, the number of 1,872,000 is of great importance. Because when the cycle of the world reaches this number, the world will experience great destruction. These intertwined cogs were used to calculate complex prophetic dates. Bruno created the doomsday dates from the Mayan calendar by looking at this table and discovered that there was a systematic order in the Mayan calendar, encoded in 4-digit numbers in the form 0000, 1111, 2222... 9999, and numbered the dates on which the time coincided in the table he drew in his notebook. Bruno was about to solve the Mayan Doomsday Clock. On the table, he could already see the beginning and end of Atlantis and the beginning and end of the Maya. In fact, the Mayans had encoded the calendar according to the number Pi, with perfect mathematics. Accordingly, BC. Creation took place between 0 and 10,000 BC (humanity). Between 18,000 and 12,000 Atlantis existed, and MS. Between 0 and 2222, the end of time (the Apocalypse, the expected Great Prophecy, and the end) would also occur. According to the Mayan prophecies, the date of December 22, 2012 was not the actual expected great apocalypse, but the beginning of a 200-year process leading to it, that is, the beginning of the process leading to the Apocalypse, and was very important to the world. Because, in this period, the era in which we live would end and a new era would begin. The real major destruction would come on December 22, 2222. The results he found were really interesting. Because, according to scientists, we can already observe the clues of this new age, which will come with a great flood, thanks to climatic changes, he thought. Mayan prophecies supported medieval scientists who said that this change, called the "Fifth Polar Shift", would again occur with the change of the magnetic field of the Poles, as in previous changes, the change of climate on Earth is also connected to this, and: "When the poles changed places or angles, the ice at the Poles also melted. However, as a result of global warming, the glaciers in the Arctic have already begun to Melt. According to the Mayans, it ended just like this in the four eras before. As a result, major forest fires around the world, earthquakes, volcanic activity and epidemics, as well as hunger and famine in science, brought death and destruction to living things. The best example of this was the great disasters that destroyed Atlantis and the Dinosaurs." *** Bruno, now by combining all these results in mind, they joined in a suitable manner by adjusting the disc and the galactic alignment prophecy of three nested disks in the Mayan number system by calculating the value in your notebook and write the date on the copy of the disk he drew the marked: It was really extraordinary and incredible. Because, when these three large discs of prophecy marking the end of the Mayan calendar were conveniently combined and intertwined, he was actually trying to tell this great secret in the number Pi with the symbols on it. When all the symbols were aligned and joined along the galactic alignment line, at the end of 3 great catastrophic periods inherited by the Mayans from the Atlanteans, each taking 3,666 years, it seemed that the future of the Great Apocalypse was perfectly calculated, and they perfectly coded it into these calendars with disk-shaped stone tablets that they made. In addition, this 3,666-year cycle was equal to the end of the era in which Atlantis ended when multiplied by the number of Pi: 3,666 × 3,14 = 11,522 years 1.522 - 11.522 AD = 10,000 BC (End of Atlantis) According to this, all the great calamities that would occur were actually harbingers and precursors of the last great prophecy. Even if all this is true, the Mayans even coded when this prophetic calendar would be reached or solved, or when the whole world would learn this secret (1522 AD, the date when the prophecy was revealed and Bruno was executed in the Inquisition). But the Great Apocalypse that all mankind had been waiting for was at the end, and they had painstakingly coded it into the Great Mayan calendar. They had a perfect Astrology calendar consisting of a cycle of 3,666 years, and they encoded all that they knew into this calendar. There were 3 rings in this nested calendar: 1-Innermost ring: THE AGE OF ANCIENT ATLANTIS (HEAVEN WHERE THE FIRST HUMAN ADAM LIVED ON EARTH), 2- Middle ring: MAYAN AGE (AGE OF KINGS AND WARS) and 3- The outermost ring: IT WAS THE NEW ATLANTIS (DOOMSDAY ERA). Accordingly, all human history consisted of 5 parts: 1. 12,333-10,000 BC (End of Atlantis, Beginning of the Mayans) 2. 8666-5000 BC (The peak of the Maya civilization and the beginning of other civilizations) 3. 5000-3666 BC (Flood and Noah, first extinction of the Maya) 4. 3666-1444 BC (Egypt and Moses, second extinction of the Mayans) Break-in Period: 1444 BC - 1566 AD (Rome and Jesus, the discovery and invasion of America, the last extinction of the Mayans) 5. 1566-2222 AD (13. 0. 0. 0. 0 Baktun: the Apocalypse, the end of time and all civilizations) So, why did the Mayans and the Atlanteans before them do all this, could there be a more logical explanation for this than warning future generations? They knew that these timing accounts were very important, because according to them, the gods who once came from Paradise Lost would come again. In fact, even more so, the stars were telling us when the gods would return. Astrology was so important to them that a savior who would come in the last time of the world, like a stimulating Oracle, would eventually appear on the horizon for the apocalypse. And did the Mayans and Atlanteans learn to plan for the future, even from alien visitors, when the world would end? The tortuger monument in Palenque has an inscription saying that December 22, 2012 was the end of the calendar, but this date was not actually for the Great Apocalypse announced by the Mayans. In this article, it is stated that 9 God will descend into the world, but no one knows what its true meaning is, based on predictions, we can think that a whole new world will begin and move to a more conscious lifestyle. The Mayans thought alien visitors were gods, and they couldn't understand the real truth behind these visits. However, their first ruler was God, and they were descended from the heavens, an alien race. According to the translations of the hieroglyphs found in many ancient Mayan ruins, "QUQULCAN", the great feathered serpent, was the God who brought knowledge to the Mayans. It was a very important place in their mysterious lives. So much so that the image of ”QUQULCAN" is found all over the Mayan world, depicted in pyramids, paintings carved in stone as a large, furry, winged snake. This snake can fly (just like a UFO) and has descended from the heavens to the earth, teaching mathematics, astronomy and all kinds of science to some of the chosen Mayans. QUQULCAN then suddenly disappeared, promising to return one day. So, who was and what was really QUQULCAN, or could he have been the first person to set foot in America and come from the East? Or an extraterrestrial alien creature from the heavens? Many Mayan stone reliefs and hieroglyphs depict a flying disc with a furry snake on its head coming from the East. What did this indicate? Is it a creature inside a flying UFO, or an entity that knows UFO technology and comes with it, or a person who comes from a ship and invades this land? The Mayans saw Ququlcan as the God who brought knowledge and civilization to their world and respected him. But what's strange here is that pictures of this winged serpent god are present all over the ancient world. They were portrayed as half-serpent, half-human beings (reptilian creatures), and did they really exist? Or did people misunderstand technology in those ages? Maybe they saw some vehicles coming down from the sky. Aliens descended from these vehicles and taught certain disciplines to people from different cultures, different societies. The fact is that the Mayans were in contact with alien beings, and their calendar ended on December 22, 2222. Perhaps this will be the day when the gods return, perhaps the aliens will return to earth, to the Mayans, as they promised, or time will end and the Apocalypse will come. Given the development of their calendar, it is possible that they correctly predicted the time of an event that would change the fate of the world. Perhaps this event will start a whole new era in which people will be enlightened, or bring about the end of humanity with a terrible apocalypse, only time will give the answer to this. Mayan astronomy was also able to pinpoint the "Year of Venus" (synodic period), which is interesting, but known by modern astronomical calculations today. The Year of Venus, which the Mayans calculated as 584 days, has now been determined as 583.92 days. The Mayans paid almost more attention to Venus (Chak ek) than to the sun for some unknown reason. "Period of the Year of Venus" of the Mayans can be seen in the Dresden manuscript. Some attribute this importance that the Mayans gave to Venus to visitors who may have come to the region from Venus in ancient times. They also observed that at the end of each period lasting 65 “Venus year”, the beginning of the “solar year”, the “religious year” and the “Year of Venus” exactly coincided with the beginning of a new period lasting 52 “Ambiguous Years". But since the Earth's entanglement time is actually 365,2422 days, in this system, the “ambiguous year” is constantly ahead of the solar year, and increasingly the months fall away from the seasons. Interestingly, the Mayans seem to have overcome this problem in some way, knowing the "tropical year". In addition, the Mayans calculated the time (month of reunion) between two new days as 29,53020, which is currently determined as 29,53059. Believing that Earth's humanity existed for a very long time and had undergone many periods of flood-like destruction, the Mayans used an amazing system of time calculations, which, in addition to their calendars, included quite long periods called the “long calculations”. The starting point of this system is exactly August 12 of 3113 BC. According to G. Morley, this was a date seen as “the birth date of the gods”. Dates and periods were not expressed by the Year of the moon, sun or Venus, but by the multiples of these long periods that were repeated. In this system, 7,200 days were called 1 katun, 144,000 days were called 1 baktun, and 2,880,000 days were called 1 pictun. The longest period, alautun, contain 23,040,000,000 days (about 63 million years). *** WHY WERE MAYAN CALENDARS DISKSHAPED? The Relationship and Mystery Between the Mayan Calendar and the Number of Pi Unravels: So, why was the Mayan calendar made of a disk (circle). Years later, some theories about this were put forward. In fact, could a large number table containing a circular ordered algorithm encode all the important events, even everything, in the universe? Some evidence for this was recently discovered in the following famous constant in mathematics, the number Pi (). In fact, everything can exist in the number Pi, even your date of birth, even your date of death, maybe even the date of the Apocalypse. *** THE MYSTERY OF THE NUMBER PI (π) CAN EVERYTHING EXIST IN THE PI NUMBER? YES! BECAUSE THE NUMBER PI IS A MIRACLE: The work of mathematicians throughout history on Pi is a separate story. But let's talk about this book with a small example here. There's a video below. Actually, it's a scene from "Person of Interest." The teacher writes the beginning of the Pi number on the board. One of the students asked, "when we use this?" and he answered as: "It contained within this string of decimals is every single other number. Your birth date, the combination of your locker your social security number... It's all in there somewhere.. And if you convert these decimals to letters, you will have every word that ever existed. The first syllable you spoke when you were a baby, the name of the last person you fell in love with, your whole life story from beginning to end. Everything we say or do, all of the world's infinite possibilities grasped within this one simple circle. Now, what you do with that information it's up to..” Now, let's try the date part of what the teacher said in person. Click on the second link and enter a date in the middle space. As month, day, year. Date of birth, your anniversary. Whatever. Assuming that it has a purely random property, when pi is written long enough, you can find each sequence of digits in the number pi. I mean, your birthday, your phone numbers, or any number that you type randomly, is somewhere in Pi. Let's go even further. When a code is produced that converts letters and numbers to each other, you can theoretically find the name of any person or institution, a word, a sentence, even a book, even this book in the number Pi. Yeah, it may sound incredible, but the Pi number is actually a giant code that contains everything. Imagine a big calendar that God has encoded, let it contain every information and history far beyond the Mayan calendar, a giant set of numbers that records everything and every event, that's Pi and it's real. For example, for today's date when this book was published, type “22.02.20” and press enter. Application will show you the location of the date you wrote in the Pi number. See where your birthday is hidden in the Pi number. Then, if you want, try the desired combination of numbers. You'll see, all in this number, it puts you in front of you like a perfect calendar preprogrammed. Isn't it surprising? It's like magic. Here, the Mayans also made their doomsday calendars, perhaps influenced by Pi or used him: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fXTRcsxG7IQ http://www.mypiday.com *** GALILEI GALILEO, GIORDANO BRUNO AND NOSTRADAMUS COULD THEY HAVE KNOWN EVERYTHING BEFORE? The Pi number starts as 3.14... It is the most famous, most special number in mathematics. And what makes this number so special? Let's try to explain this a little, but let's listen to Galileo first. Galileo said in the Middle Ages: "...The universe is open to our observations at any moment; but it cannot be understood without learning its language and the letters in which this language is written. The universe is written in mathematical language; its letters are triangles, circles, and other geometric forms. Without them, not a single word can be understood, but it is entangled in a dark maze.” (Galilei Galileo, 1500s) Of the shapes counted here, "Circle" is the most important because it contains one of the secrets of the universe. When you divide the circle of the geometric shape by its diameter, a fraction appears.. But it's not such a simple fraction because it has no end, so it's infinite. At some point, he doesn't repeat himself. Goes on forever. Computers are constantly calculating. As far as we know, the last 2.7 trillion digits have been approached and calculated. People still expect him to repeat himself, but it seems that the number of Pi extends forever and does not repeat at all. Before the computer came out, the human hand could be found no more than 500 steps without error, or so we know. In fact, it was this kind of mysterious work that made people crawl in the courts of the Inquisition. But in the history books, some facts, such as the objections of scientists to the church about the roundness of the world, were later brought to the fore. Just like Galileo, Giordano Bruno, Nostradamus and many other scientists, thinkers and philosophers, seers, were forced to share the same fate by the church and the Inquisition. Galilei Galileo (1564 - 1642) was an Italian astronomer, physicist, engineer, philosopher and mathematician. This scientist, who contributed greatly to the scientific revolution of the Renaissance, was called “the father of observational astronomy”, “the father of modern physics” and “the father of science”. His contributions to observational astronomy include telescopic evidence of the phases of Venus, the discovery of Jupiter's four largest moons (called Galileo's moons), and the observation of sunspots. Galileo also worked in Applied Science and technology and invented other instruments, such as an improved military Compass. At the time when Galileo experienced solar centrism and Copernicism, it was more controversial because the world centrism and Tycho system were common. Astronomers have often opposed it, arguing that a sun-centered system is not possible because Stellar Parallax is not observed. This issue was investigated by the Roman Inquisition in 1615, and it was concluded that this was only a possibility. Galileo later defended this view in his book" dialogue on the two main World Systems". The book was considered to be an attack on Pope Urban 8 and the Jesuits, and Galileo was discredited. Tried by the Inquisition, Galileo was suspected of committing the crime of misguidance, and Galileo was both forced to withdraw from his writings and sentenced to spend the rest of his life under house arrest. He wrote Two New Sciences, one of his most successful studies while under house arrest, and in this book he included his work forty years ago on kinematics and the force of matter, which is the basis of modern physics today. He was the founder of Modern Physics and experimental research with the science of mechanics still used today. Giordano Bruno (1548-1600 Italy, Rome). Italian philosopher, priest, astronomer and occultist. He is one of the most important philosophers who shaped Renaissance philosophy, and the poet stands closest to literature in his aspect. He can also be called a thinker of naturalistic enthusiasm. The Italian philosopher, who was among the first to break away from the Aristotelian view of the closed Universe, defended Copernicus's thesis. He said that the universe is infinite and concentric, and that there are many planets in the universe other than Earth. Because he harbored contrary views, he was tried and declared heretical in the Inquisition of the Roman Catholic Church in 1600 and was burned alive and executed in Rome. Nostradamus or original name Michel de Nostredame (15031566, France, Saint-Rémy-de-Provence) was a French physician, pharmacist, Oracle and astrologer. It is suggested that the surname Nostredame came from his grandfather, who was Jewish. He received his first education in medicine and Medicine at the Faculty of Montpellier, where he enrolled in 1529. In 1531 he married a daughter of a noble family. Although he had two children from this marriage, his wife and children died during the epidemic of 1534. He learned a lot about occultism from an Italian named Julius Caesar Skaliger, who could be called a renaissance intellectual he knew in Agen. He made his second marriage in 1547. From this marriage he had six children. The house where he lived with his second wife, Anne Ponsard, is today known as the Nostradamus Museum. During the plague epidemics that began in 1546-47, he made a reputation for special methods of treatment and medications that he prepared. During his travels to Italy between 1547 and 1549, he met an alchemist in Milan. From what he learned from this Alchemist, he published his first book on drugs in 1552. Like all his contemporaries, Nostradamus, who was interested in astrology, began publishing an almanac from 1550 with prophecies based on celestial bodies. From those years, when his prophecies began to attract attention, he began to sign “Nostradamus” in the quatrains he wrote. Deciding to collect his prophecies in a book, he settled in Salonde-Provence in 1555. He published the first book of his famous ‘hundreds', a total of ten, in Lyon in 1555. Because each of these books consists of floating quatrains, they are known as "hundreds". In 1558 he further expanded his book and dedicated it to the King. He was appointed Palace physician in 1560. Nostradamus, whose reputation was spreading, became one of the astrologers of Catherine de Médicis. In 1564, Catherine de Médicis summoned him to the palace for a permanent stay and declared King Charles IX's physician and adviser. In 1581, he was excommunicated by the Church for his prophecies. Then, in 1566, he knew his own date of death. On the last night before he died, he said to those who came to him: "this is my last night, leave me alone, for I will be dead by morning." Nostradamus' prophecies in his books consist of symbolic expressions that are not clear and selective, requiring interpretation. Nostradamus, an occultist, based on the symbolism principle of occultism, wrote his prophecies in highly symbolic language so that "only those who can understand will understand" and that he could not be accused by the church and the dark pious. In other words, he did not refrain from writing the facts that he had learned about the future, but he resorted to some methods of covering and encryption so that not everyone could reach these facts in his book. According to the researchers, the main methods of covering that he uses are as follows:  Using symbols,  Making mythological references,  Inverting (anagramming) words,  Do not include Latin, Spanish and Hebrew words other than French in his book,  Change only one letter of the word. "The Journey of Death Begins” – Return to Spain and Writing of The Book of Prophecy – (1512-1522) Bruno Discovers A Tunnel Leading to Atlantis B runo finally solved the last prophecy contained in the Great Mayan apocalyptic calendar, which was found in 3 discs, and quickly wrote and noted all these results in his notebook. How will this great success he achieved in the dark temple chamber reach out, how will he get out of here to the outside world? Now, that's what it was all about: getting out of here as soon as possible. During the 3 days they spent in a closed room, the amount of food and insufficient water that was about to end brought almost everyone to the brink of death. Everyone was extremely exhausted and tired. In addition, the power they used to move and move these heavy stone discs made this situation worse. Bruno re-entered the large sarcophagus tomb to find an exit door or tunnel as a last hope of salvation. At the bottom of the sarcophagus was another giant stone block in the shape of a square at the base. Although it looked like it was adjacent to the ground, a small trail seemed to separate it from the ground. This caught Bruno's attention, and he immediately began scraping the stone with his hands, holding the burning torch to the floor. Around the stone block sitting at the base, he frantically looked for a cavity that could be opened into a tunnel until his hands bled. After continuing to scrape for a while, he noticed something important. Around the point where the stone square block sat on the floor was an area of embankment about a mile wide, surrounded by a plaster-like material. A gutter filled with a hard material, which is unknown what kind of material it was, such as cement or gypsum, distinguished the stone square block from the floor. Bruno understood that this block of stone was a lid that sat on the floor and a door that opened down, but they had to engrave this filling material, which was very hard. If they could open a gap by scraping around the square block, they could grab it by the edges and lift it up and figure out if there were any tunnels that opened down. Anyway, they had no choice but to do so, maybe the way out and the exit door they were looking for was somewhere under this floor. Bruno excitedly called out to those outside: - "Hey, I found something here. Give me a hard object or a tool to scrape the floor from there. Here, there is a square cavity around the floor, but it is filled with an unknown hard material, we need to engrave it to see the gold. I tried to dig it with my hands, but it doesn't look like it's going to happen, it's very hard here, but if it's an object like iron, I think we can make a hole around it.” Ruiz: - "We don't have a digger like that with us, Bruno, but it's just a giant metal spear stuck right in the middle of one of those stone disks. It's like someone put it here on purpose, but it's going to be hard to get it out. Let's give it a try, maybe you can use it.” Bruno: - "All right, Ruiz, that's what we need, take it out and give it to me right now.” For a while, Ruiz tried to dislodge and remove a giant metal spear in the shape of a cylinder pipe, which was stuck right in the middle of the prophetic calendar with 3 soldiers next to him in back and forth movements. It was not clear what material the metal was made from, it was covered with a radioactive material that emitted radiation, but in the Middle Ages there was no technology to understand it, and none of them were aware of it. But it still looked like the only digger hard object in the room they were in, they had to dislodge it to dig up the base of the sarcophagus. Ruiz, along with 3 others next to him, managed to move the metal in the middle of the stone disc for a while with back and forth movements. After a few moves, they managed to dislodge the cylindrical metal pipe. Although not very large in length and diameter, this metal spear was quite heavy. They carried him into the sarcophagus and landed on the floor next to Bruno. “Bring him in, start scraping around that square block right now, its edge, which is about a mile wide,” Bruno said. "It's like a lid that opens down, I think, if we dig around it with this, I think we can open a space that will hold it manually, and then we will try to move it and lift it.” For a while, they dug around the giant square stone block in the shape of a square with an iron spear. Indeed, there was a groove around the stone, and now it seems that this stone block was the lid of a door that opened down. Bruno: “Okay, here it is, come on, try a little harder, scratch harder. It's almost a place to hold” he said, breathlessly, on the dark floor inside the sarcophagus Tomb. Even breathing became difficult, as the oxygen inside was reduced due to burning torches. After digging around the square block at the base for a while more, Bruno: - "Now, enough to fit in, no matter how many men this place takes. We'll all try to grab this block of stone by the edges and move it and move it, okay?” 3 more soldiers landed at the base of the sarcophagus and "all right, we're coming" they said. Bruno: - "Now I'll count to 3, and when I say 3, we'll all try to move the stone block, okay?” Others: - "All right, Bruno, we're ready.” Bruno: - “1, 2 .. 3 come on. 1, 2 .. 3 lift it again but stronger.” They tried for a while, and the stone moved a little, but it was too heavy, they couldn't lift it on the first attempt. On top of that, Bruno said again: - “1, 2 .. 3 come on. 1, 2 .. 3 lift it again but stronger.” But again they were not successful. In this way, they tried to lift the stone 8-10 times, and eventually: - "Okay, here's what's going on, the stone got up a little bit, lift it up, lift it up, go ahead. Lift harder again" Bruno said, he and 3 people went under the stone and this time supported it with their backs and lifted the stone up well with their strength. The door, consisting of a giant stone block and opening down, was finally opened. Bruno couldn't believe his eyes in the sight he saw: - "God, look at this place! This is incredible. This is the door to a giant tunnel that runs down. Where does this tunnel lead, for God's sake? Ruiz, look at this tunnel stretching hundreds, maybe thousands of feet below the ground. Where does this tunnel lead? It looks like there's no end to it, it's really incredible,” he said. Bruno and the others immediately descended dangling down the door that opened. The sight they saw was incredible. 100 meters below the temple of Ququlcan was a giant network of tunnels, hundreds, perhaps thousands of meters long, extending underground into the Earth. *** Exit from The Tunnel Bruno immediately called out to the others when Ruiz and the 6 soldiers next to him went down the entrance to the tunnel: - "Sofia, Esmeralda and the others, come here immediately. Enter the sarcophagus and come here immediately, dangling one by one from the entrance of the tunnel, taking the items with you. I think we found a way out of the Temple. There's a giant underground tunnel here. I don't know how long it is, but it extends underground in the form of a ramp.” As soon as he heard Bruno's voice, the others who were waiting for them around the sarcophagus above went down to them. In the ceiling of the tunnel, the door to the floor formed the base of the sarcophagus tomb, and there was a height of about 3 meters between the base of the tunnel and the base of the sarcophagus. Bruno warned others to be careful when going down to the floor of the tunnel because there was a 3-foot gap when he jumped down the opening hatch. After they all landed in the tunnel, Bruno returned to Sofia: - "I told you, sister, I said I felt there was a secret way out there, and now it turns out I wasn't wrong, as you can see. Whoever hid the prophecy in this room put the door to a secret network of tunnels for the exit into the sarcophagus Tomb. Look at this place, the walls of the tunnel, this is incredible. I've never saw anything like this in my life. What are these paintings and reliefs; they extend all the way through the tunnel. As if they were written in an extraterrestrial language, what is it all about? I wish we had enough time and power to see how far these tunnels stretch and we could go. But I don't think we have time for that. We need to get out of here to earth as soon as possible and find water and food. Besides, there's very little oxygen here. If we don't want to die here, we have to get to earth as soon as possible, okay?” They started running along the tunnel, but nothing was visible in the dark. Besides, it was no longer lit on torches because there was so little oxygen here. The network of tunnels that went down into the Earth continued and went, but after going down for a while, they saw that there were two more side tunnels that continued to the right and left. These tunnels, unlike the other main tunnels, were two tunnels that continued by climbing up rather than down the ramp. Bruno thought that one of these two tunnels led to the Earth, into a wooded area near the temple. Okay, but which one? The tunnel on the right or the left was the right way? They had to make a choice. Maybe neither of them was on the ground, but they seemed to have no choice but to choose one of them and move on. Bruno: - "Look here, at this point in the tunnel, the road is divided into three. There are two more side tunnels going left and right. Yeah, now we have to decide which way to choose, we're running out of time and power. Sofia, Ruiz, Esmeralda, any ideas? Which way do you think we should go? I'm guessing one of these two is coming to Earth, but which one?” Esmeralda intervened immediately: - "Wait, Bruno, why are you fussing? I think you should follow the path you followed before. Signs! Yeah, let's look at the signs. At this point of separation of tunnels, there must be a sign of this.” Bruno: - "You're right, Esmeralda, my darling! Then someone try to light that torch in my hand, and I have to look at the signs at the entrance to the tunnel.” Sofia intervened immediately: - "No, don't do that, Bruno. Lighting a fire here now could be the end of all of us. Haven't you ever read that there are toxic gases or flammable gases that accumulate underground, and at the slightest spark we can all blow up or get poisoned, it's not a good idea, as far as I'm concerned, don't try it.” said she. Bruno: - "Thank you for the warning, dear sister, I never thought of that. So, I'll grope and try to find something. Maybe, this way you can find a sign of which tunnel is the right way. For a while, Bruno examined the reliefs and shapes on the wall, which was the beginning of the tunnel with his hand. It was like a dark and completely different world. "It's like another world inside the world!" he said and something caught his attention when he was looking through it and groping for a sign in the bas-reliefs at the tunnel entrance. At the entrance to the tunnel, which went to the left, there was a relief figure like this: And at the entrance to the tunnel to the right, there is a relief as follows: Bruno, when I realized that: - "Okay, I found it. We have to continue along the tunnel on the right. It goes underground on the left, just like the main tunnel that goes straight on. Only this tunnel on the right leads to the Earth, this relief showing the pyramid-shaped upward direction indicates that this is the right way out. We'll continue along the right tunnel to get up. Yeah, follow me everybody, this way.” He said, and after everyone ran along the tunnel on the right for a while, they noticed that the tunnel was ramped up. After walking along a road with a ramp for about 2-3 km upstream along the tunnel, another stone door appeared in front of them. Bruno: - "This must be the door of the tunnel to the earth, look, there are similar signs on it that we have encountered before, we must be a little far from the temple. It must be a secret door to somewhere in the forest.” He said excitedly and began to examine the reliefs on the edge of the door again. A sign painting he found caught his attention. The door they had previously entered into the secret room in the temple looked the same as the signs on the entrance. Only these were placed on a smaller stone tablet, and there were 100 symbols on it. Bruno looked at the same combination again: that is, the symbols 22, 76 and 99. This time the symbols were different, but thinking that the password that opened the door was encoded in the same sequence of numbers, he immediately pressed the symbols 22, 76 and 99 in the form of a button and touched them: YING YANG INNER WORLD THE DOOR TO THE OUTSIDE WORLD The 99th symbol that he last touched and opened the door to the earth was very interesting and was familiar to him from somewhere; “The dark and the bright world are like the difference between the good and the bad or the inner and outer world. I can't remember exactly what the name of this symbol was in ancient China, but I think it was Ying-Yang. It's about the energy balance of the earth and the universe, but what's this symbol doing here in a secret tunnel under a Mayan temple on the other side of the world, or let me ask myself, couldn't those who encoded these symbols here have encoded the same information in different parts of the world?" said in through behind the door, which opened by itself and touching the last symbol, there appeared another tunnel in the form of a small square that only a person could pass through, which opened into the forest. At the end of the tunnel, this tunnel, which opened to the Earth through the forest, was more interesting, because it was so wide that only a small person or dwarf could pass through it. I wonder why those who built these giant tunnels built such a small exit door, it was difficult to understand. For a moment, Bruno thought of Alien who gave him all these secrets, maps and notes about Atlantis that night in Spain. Alien was also about 1 meter tall, so he said it was a creature small enough to barely pass through this tunnel. Maybe they built these tunnels all the way to Atlantis. At this time, they were so bewildered, and there was so much more unknown than known; when he arrived towards the exit of the tunnel, Bruno realized once again how little he knew about the world. Bruno: - "Wow, look at this place! The exit is visible, but this tunnel we can walk through is so small, it's like it was made for a dwarf. We'll have a hard time going up, but I still think we can get out of every hole our heads go through, humanity is a flexible being, thank God. I wish he was alive, but if Captain Garcia had come all the way here with us, I'm not sure he would have gotten through this tunnel with his giant size.” He said a little smile and then: - "All right, everybody gets ready. Finally, we came to the exit of the tunnel that leads to the Earth. The tunnel exit is very narrow, but it's still a size that anyone can get out of by forcing it. Everyone will carefully crawl up the tunnel one by one, now is that clear? Be careful when you leave, try not to get stuck inside. And if anyone gets stuck, we'll support them by pushing them up from the bottom, from their feet.” *** Return to Spain After passing through a small tunnel, the Santa Maria crew, who went up to a deserted area in the forest one by one, barely advanced into the forest for a while. Everyone was exhausted from hunger and thirst. They proceeded deep into the forest, well away from Ququlcan, and took a break on the edge of a small stream bed, meeting their water needs, treating and caring for the injured. Just in case, they continued on the road without stopping during the night so that the temple Indians would not follow in their footsteps and reach them again that day. The next day, they reached the wooded area where they left their belongings and set up camp. Their food was intact, and the items were still in place, and so were the camping tents. They camped there again and spent that day and night resting. Bruno kept checking his notes and making corrections and additions. He passed everything he had resolved and everything he had gone through to his notebook. After making the necessary supplies and water supply where they were, they found a path deep in the forest for a week and moved forward. Esmeralda and her father remembered the path they came from well and helped them find the path leading to the Grand Canyon and Death Valley. By the time they reached the path leading to the beaches of Cancun, it was raining heavily. Landslides and small puddles had formed in some parts of the road. But despite this, the road seemed smooth enough to walk. They marched for about 10 days until they reached the valley of death, and when they reached the valley of death, they set up another camp again. After another night of rest, they finally reached the Cancun coast in late April 1512, after a week's journey that continued throughout the Grand Canyon day and night. A few more of the wounded soldiers had died on the way, and since they set out from Spain, about half of the Santa Maria staff, 50 people, had been able to return to Santa Maria alive on this long and dangerous journey. Santa Maria, on the other hand, had been waiting for them where he had anchored for about 2 months. 5 personnel inside were still inside the ship, and Bruno, Captain Garcia and others were looking forward to its return. But things didn't go as they had hoped. There was no more Captain Garcia, and so were many soldiers. About 20 soldiers, along with Bruno, Sofia, Esmeralda, Ruiz and others, went to the beach and saw Santa Maria in the open, almost as if they were going to close to the ground and cry with sadness. They were glad to have returned and found the ship in place, but when they thought about the losses and remembered the memories left behind, they were all tired and sad. Although Bruno was hopeful with the joy of resolving the last prophecy and completing his notes, the bitter death of Captain Garcia and the untimely departure of others in particular had caused everyone to become bitter. Maybe America, that is, this new continent did not seem auspicious to them, maybe it would not come to those who came to this continent after them, this is unknown, but given that Columbus was also in the Losers' Club, at least Bruno had the greatest secrets and maps unknown in the history of the world now. Secrets of Atlantis. After they all knelt and cried on the beach for a while, Esmeralda thought about the homeland and land she had left behind, and as she left, she looked sadly towards the shores of America one last time, crying. Bruno and Sofia and Ruiz remembered their lost comrades and, of course, Captain Garcia. They were all very good, golden-hearted people, and they would never forget them, even if their bodies lay on this land, thousands of miles away from Europe. Bruno barely got up from the sand, where he knelt, tired with his eyes aged, and looked again towards the horizon, towards Santa Maria. From the new world to the old world, to new hopes, perhaps New suffering and tortures, to the Inquisition. I don't know what fate would bring, but there were strange feelings in it. Feelings he's never felt before. He had known love for the first time with Esmeralda in this land, perhaps the best days of his life, but still the joy and sadness filled him together on his way back to Spain. Seeing the crowd gathered on the beach, those on board shouted towards them and shouted joy. They might never have come back, but they did. They immediately lowered the lifeboats into the sea and headed for the beach. The crew of Santa Maria, who met them, took their belongings and boarded the lifeboats, and they all returned to Santa Maria. They told them all about it and the death of Captain Garcia. Now they had to go on without him, and on his will, Ruiz was now captain of the ship. For a week, they stocked the ship with supplies and water, and then sailed from the coast of America, off Cancun, to Europe on a May morning. Santa Maria moved eastward for 1 month. When he arrived off the island of Hispaniola, he encountered a fleet of ships belonging to a Spanish colony there, and a small skirmish and battle took place at sea. The Spanish colony was hit hard by the heavy cannons of Santa Maria, and Santa Maria barely survived the conflict, but some of her sails were smashed, her starboard section was damaged, and she survived the sinking at the last moment. Most of the soldiers died during the fighting on board. It also experienced several major storms in the Atlantic Ocean. However, Santa Maria miraculously survived these seemingly impossible dangers with the help of God and finally managed to continue on her way back to Spain. Exactly 2 years after the day he set out, he again reached the coast of Spain, the Port of Lisbon, on September 11, 1512. Oracle Bruno and his accompanying sister Sofia, his wife Esmeralda, his father and captain Ruiz, and as many as 10 soldiers managed to reach Spain alive. Everyone in Spain was very surprised when the ship docked in Port. They thought they were dead or that the ship had sunk, and stories were being told about it everywhere. Including Queen Isabella and King Carlos of Aragon. No one seemed to have any hope that they would return after 2 years. When Santa Maria docked at the port, its appearance was not good at all, the ship seemed to be literally in ruins, many parts were torn apart, very old and worn out. It seemed like a miracle that he even got here without sinking. It looked like a ghost pirate ship. After the news of the return of Santa Maria in Spain, The King and Queen prepared a welcome ceremony for them, along with a large celebration at the port of Lisbon. After welcoming them with various gifts, they were invited to the palace and there they chatted for a long time along with Bruno, Sofia, Esmeralda and others. Bruno and Sofia, along with Esmeralda, told the King and Queen everything that happened to them at the palace. The impact of this event and news soon spread throughout Spain. By now, Bruno had become known all over Spain. His sister Sofia and his wife Mayan Esmeralda. The news of this whole adventurous trip and miraculous comeback seemed to surprise and delight everyone, but except for one thing: the Inquisition and its affiliated church rulers. They were not happy when they learned the details of this trip and Bruno's work with information leaked from the King and Queen. Because, according to them, if all these rumors were true, and Bruno's rhetoric that he came into contact with extraterrestrial life and found a new continent was true, all this meant contradicting the Church. Because, according to the widely believed Christian belief in the Middle Ages, all this is extraterrestrial life, Atlantis, etc. extremely false and dangerous information, and all of it was unreal, and moreover, the world was not what they claimed. According to the church, the world was flat, and all this meant complete blasphemy against religion. Bruno's claims, on the other hand, showed the opposite. Bruno didn't want to tell anyone about all this without going through the book, but some of the details he told the king had already gone to the church fathers, and they didn't like it. Because, even if Queen Isabella was reliable, there were many Jackal informants around King Carlos of Aragon, and so the name of the king of Aragon was popularly mentioned to Carlos the Jackal. Moreover, this were not limited to this. It is rumored that Bruno made a promise to the King about 2 years ago and also made some promises to repay the merchants of the Port of Almeria, where he borrowed money. Bringing gold and spices from the new continent, bringing new slaves on their way back with them, information about the new continent to join Spain in New Lands, maps of exploration routes, and so on. All these promises were not fulfilled by Bruno. Perhaps Bruno had not deliberately fulfilled them, according to him, all this meant looting, exploitation and using people, forcibly taking away their land and what they had, and it did not seem fair at all. After all, in reality, when Bruno came back, he even lost what he had when he left, except for the notebooks he kept. And all this stood in the hands of the members of the Inquisition as leverage against the King. If he had explained and shared all these views to the public, it would have been difficult for Bruno to pass. *** Writing the Book of Prophecy After living in Lisbon for a while, Bruno returned to Cordoba, with his wife Esmeralda and sister Sofia, to work in his practice again. Here, he worked for years with his sister Sofia to combat the Black Plague, which continued to spread throughout Europe. For a time, he had a happy life in Cordoba with his wife Esmeralda. Esmeralda's father was unable to get used to Europe and died of pneumonia in 1515, about 3 years after her arrival. Bruno moved into a new house near his practice after the break and had a daughter with Esmeralda. From 1512 to 1520, he continued his life happily with his family, although some minor complaints and investigations were opened by the Inquisition that he had abused his position and used non-religious sources as a priest and deceived the public. During this time, thanks to the support of the King, he managed to escape such investigations. Above all, King Carlos of Aragon granted permission and provided financial assistance for the writing and printing of the Great Book of prophecy, which Bruno completed in about 4 years between 1512 and 1516. Bruno decided to put all the results he had achieved and a new story of human history in this book, along with all the incredible information, documents and maps that Alien had given him about Atlantis and the end of the world, along with his own prophecies. He also added to his book all the consequences and prophecies that he achieved about the apocalypse that he achieved the solution of the Mayan calendar and what will happen at the end of the world, even the name of the book was very remarkable: PROPHECIES OF BRUNO ATLANTIS: "Returning to the Lost Paradise" - 1516 - Printing and serial book printing in Europe was found by Gutenberg (1398-1468) in the Middle Ages and was in use for about 50 years. Johannes Gutenberg is a goldsmith, printmaker and publisher who first started printing articles with moving parts in Europe in 1447. Gutenberg's invention was the most important event of the modern era and the beginning of the printing revolution. As such, he is also considered the father of modern printing. This great inventor Johann Gutenberg popularized his practice by bringing the method of letterpress and offset printing to Europe in 1438, which is considered one of the most important developments in the history of communication. This method is a printing method in which cast letters, initially made from wood and later from a lead alloy, are stored for use in another article after printing. This technique has been used in China and Korea for centuries. It was a great opportunity for Bruno to have the opportunity to publish this book in Europe. Because, in this way, he could reproduce and print his book in a short time and deliver it to many more people and easily announce his work to the world thanks to this book. Eventually, the book of prophecies, written by Bruno in 1520, managed to reach important cities and university libraries in Europe, especially in Spain. Bruno's prophecies and the new history of humanity, which he put forward as a thesis in his book, were described in detail in the book where and how the history of humanity actually began and how it would end, and he was amazed everywhere he reached, and of course, he was facing the church every day. *** Arrest of Bruno and Sofia by the Inquisition By 1522, Bruno's book of prophecies had been excommunicated from literature by the church and included among the Forbidden (Apocryphal), i.e. banned books. Bruno's prophetic book began to be slowly collected and burned all over Europe. He described in his book What is the real power that governs and organizes all the secret sects, organizations, and evil in the world, and he also talked about Satan and his influence on the Church. The original of the book was in his office with Bruno, and after all the printed copies had been destroyed, the Inquisition kept a copy for itself. Bruno delivered only one copy of the book to a church in a small village on a mountain in France, and was able to keep it that way. After that, the Inquisition-controlled Church, realizing that he had learned these secrets and thinking that he had gone too far, first excommunicated him from Christianity. Not only that, but a final indictment was issued against Bruno by the Inquisition and an arrest warrant was issued against him. The charge against him was to fabricate an irreligious prophecy, infidelity, and rebellion of the people. Also, not only Bruno, but also Sofia, the sister, received their share of this charge, and an arrest warrant was issued for her. Esmeralda, on the other hand, was found not guilty, but a decision was made to follow her. In the Middle Ages, as arrest by the Inquisition could probably result in a death sentence, Bruno now seemed ready for anything and the inevitable end. He made his final preparations at his practice, painstakingly collecting his important belongings and books, and sent them with his sister Sofia to his wife Esmeralda to hide. An original manuscript and a copy of the book of prophecy were also among these important items. Bruno pulled out a copy of the prophecy book from where he had hidden it, and gave it to her, telling her to go to a mountain village in France, which she had previously told her about. Esmeralda picked up these items and set off with them and their little girl. If she was arrested, the Inquisition could have executed her, too, and in that case they would have no one left alive to take care of their little girls. Also, if this copy of the book was captured with her, the book of prophecy that he had written all his life would have disappeared from the earth forever. Oracle Bruno who came up with a plan at the risk of all this, left a letter to his sister and wife and completed his preparations to leave for the Court of the Inquisition in Central Cordoba. In his last letter, Bruno said: To Sofia: "When you get this book, maybe I'll be dead. I give you the original book written by me. This book is dedicated to the innocent people like us who were killed in the courts of the Inquisition, and to all the innocent people who will die suffering hundreds of disasters and disasters such as war, famine, hunger and disease before the final prophecy comes in the future. God bless all the good people in the world from evil, from war, and most of all from the evil people who have caused them pain, and from the devil who led them, who led us to the expulsion of our Father in Heaven..” Amen (Your Brother Bruno, August 1522) To Esmeralda: "I'm handing you a copy of this book, and when you get it with my other things, maybe I'll be dead. Take them to the mountain village I told you about in France. Live happily in that village with our daughter, and I want you to take good care of her. Don't tell him I'm dead, he's on a long journey, just like we did before. Deliver the book to the church there. This book is dedicated to the innocent people like us who were killed in the courts of the Inquisition, and to all the innocent people who will die suffering hundreds of disasters and disasters such as war, famine, hunger and disease before the final prophecy comes in the future. God bless all the good people in the world from evil, from war, and most of all from the evil people who have caused them pain, and from the devil who led them, who led us to the expulsion of our Father in Heaven..” Amen (Your Husband Bruno, August 1522) *** "Prophecies About the Apocalypse" (The Great End) IT WILL BRING THE END OF HUMANITY AND THE WORLD –22 GREAT PROPHECIES – Ama x-u ch'ux ri Vuch Ve, x-cha ri mama. Ta chi xaquinic Quate ta chi gekumarchic Cahmul xaquin ri mama Ca xaquin-Vuch" ca cha vinak vacamic. [Author: Your Friend from Atlantis, Alien] B runo knew he was now going to be executed, and on Saturday, the day before he died, he opened the last chapter of the Bible. This is the most mysterious part of the Bible, also known as The Book of Revelation (The Book of Revelation is the 66th edition of the Bible, which consists of 66 books and it has 22 chapters) and it was a great prophetic book describing the events that will take place before the Apocalypse of St. John the Apostle (one of the apostles of Jesus Christ), who wrote them while retreating on an island like Atlantis (the island of Patmos), and it was written something like this: The Seven Seals 1 Now I watched when the Lamb opened one of the seven seals, and I heard one of the four living creatures say with a voice like thunder, “Come!” 2 And I looked, and behold, a white horse! And its rider had a bow, and a crown [a] was given to him, and he came out conquering, and to conquer. [a] "Crown" means "Corona" in Latin and Spanish. 3 When he opened the second seal, I heard the second living creature say, “Come!”. 4 And out came another horse, bright red. Its rider was permitted to take peace from the earth, so that people should slay one another, and he was given a great sword. 5 When he opened the third seal, I heard the third living creature say, “Come!” And I looked, and behold, a black horse! And its rider had a pair of scales in his hand. 6 And I heard what seemed to be a voice in the midst of the four living creatures, saying, “A quart of wheat for a denarius, and three quarts of barley for a denarius, and do not harm the oil and wine!” 7 When he opened the fourth seal, I heard the voice of the fourth living creature say, “Come!” 8 And I looked, and behold, a pale horse! And its rider’s name was Death, and Hades followed him. And they were given authority over a fourth of the earth, to kill with sword and with famine and with pestilence and by wild beasts of the earth. 9 When he opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar the souls of those who had been slain for the word of God and for the witness they had borne. 10 They cried out with a loud voice, “O Sovereign Lord, holy and true, how long before you will judge and avenge our blood on those who dwell on the earth?” 11 Then they were each given a white robe and told to rest a little longer, until the number of their fellow servants and their brothers should be complete, who were to be killed as they themselves had been. 12 When he opened the sixth seal, I looked, and behold, there was a great earthquake, and the sun became black as sackcloth, the full moon became like blood, 13 and the stars of the sky fell to the earth as the fig tree sheds its winter fruit when shaken by a gale. 14 The sky vanished like a scroll that is being rolled up, and every mountain and island was removed from its place. 15 Then the kings of the earth and the great ones and the generals and the rich and the powerful, and everyone, slave and free, hid themselves in the caves and among the rocks of the mountains, 16 calling to the mountains and rocks, “Fall on us and hide us from the face of him who is seated on the throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb, 17 for the great day of their wrath has come, and who can stand?” "1 After this I saw four angels standing at the four corners of the earth, holding back the four winds of the earth, that no wind might blow on earth or sea or against any tree. 2 Then I saw another angel ascending from the rising of the sun, with the seal of the living God, and he called with a loud voice to the four angels who had been given power to harm earth and sea, 3 saying, “Do not harm the earth or the sea or the trees, until we have sealed the servants of our God on their foreheads.” 4 And I heard the number of the sealed, 144,000, sealed from every tribe of the sons of Israel: 5 12,000 from the tribe of Judah were sealed, 12,000 from the tribe of Reuben, 12,000 from the tribe of Gad, 6 12,000 from the tribe of Asher, 12,000 from the tribe of Naphtali, 12,000 from the tribe of Manasseh, 7 12,000 from the tribe of Simeon, 12,000 from the tribe of Levi, 12,000 from the tribe of Issachar, 8 12,000 from the tribe of Zebulun, 12,000 from the tribe of Joseph, 12,000 from the tribe of Benjamin were sealed. 9 After this I looked, and behold, a great multitude that no one could number, from every nation, from all tribes and peoples and languages, standing before the throne and before the Lamb, clothed in white robes, with palm branches in their hands, 10 and crying out with a loud voice, “Salvation belongs to our God who sits on the throne, and to the Lamb!” 11 And all the angels were standing around the throne and around the elders and the four living creatures, and they fell on their faces before the throne and worshiped God, 12 saying, “Amen! Blessing and glory and wisdom and thanksgiving and honor and power and might be to our God forever and ever! Amen.” 13 Then one of the elders addressed me, saying, “Who are these, clothed in white robes, and from where have they come?” 14 I said to him, “Sir, you know.” And he said to me, “These are the ones coming out of the great tribulation. They have washed their robes and made them white in the blood of the Lamb. 15 “Therefore they are before the throne of God, and serve him day and night in his temple; and he who sits on the throne will shelter them with his presence. 16 They shall hunger no more, neither thirst anymore; the sun shall not strike them, nor any scorching heat. 17 For the Lamb in the midst of the throne will be their shepherd, and he will guide them to springs of living water, and God will wipe away every tear from their eyes.” *** The Seven Trumpets 1 When the Lamb opened the seventh seal, there was silence in heaven for about half an hour. 2 Then I saw the seven angels who stand before God, and seven trumpets were given to them. 3 And another angel came and stood at the altar with a golden censer, and he was given much incense to offer with the prayers of all the saints on the golden altar before the throne, 4 and the smoke of the incense, with the prayers of the saints, rose before God from the hand of the angel. 5 Then the angel took the censer and filled it with fire from the altar and threw it on the earth, and there were peals of thunder, rumblings, flashes of lightning, and an earthquake. 6 Now the seven angels who had the seven trumpets prepared to blow them. 7 The first angel blew his trumpet, and there followed hail and fire, mixed with blood, and these were thrown upon the earth. And a third of the earth was burned up, and a third of the trees were burned up, and all green grass was burned up. 8 The second angel blew his trumpet, and something like a great mountain, burning with fire, was thrown into the sea, and a third of the sea became blood. 9 A third of the living creatures in the sea died, and a third of the ships were destroyed. 10 The third angel blew his trumpet, and a great star fell from heaven, blazing like a torch, and it fell on a third of the rivers and on the springs of water. 11 The name of the star is Wormwood. A third of the waters became wormwood, and many people died from the water, because it had been made bitter. 12 The fourth angel blew his trumpet, and a third of the sun was struck, and a third of the moon, and a third of the stars, so that a third of their light might be darkened, and a third of the day might be kept from shining, and likewise a third of the night. 13 Then I looked, and I heard an eagle crying with a loud voice as it flew directly overhead, “Woe, woe, woe to those who dwell on the earth, at the blasts of the other trumpets that the three angels are about to blow!” And the fifth angel blew his trumpet, and I saw a star fallen from heaven to earth, and he was given the key to the shaft of the bottomless pit. 2 He opened the shaft of the bottomless pit, and from the shaft rose smoke like the smoke of a great furnace, and the sun and the air were darkened with the smoke from the shaft. 3 Then from the smoke came locusts on the earth, and they were given power like the power of scorpions of the earth. 4 They were told not to harm the grass of the earth or any green plant or any tree, but only those people who do not have the seal of God on their foreheads. 5 They were allowed to torment them for five months, but not to kill them, and their torment was like the torment of a scorpion when it stings someone. 6 And in those days people will seek death and will not find it. They will long to die, but death will flee from them. 7 In appearance the locusts were like horses prepared for battle: on their heads were what looked like crowns of gold; their faces were like human faces, 8 their hair like women’s hair, and their teeth like lions’ teeth; 9 they had breastplates like breastplates of iron, and the noise of their wings was like the noise of many chariots with horses rushing into battle. 10 They have tails and stings like scorpions, and their power to hurt people for five months is in their tails. 11 They have as king over them the angel of the bottomless pit. His name in Hebrew is Abaddon, and in Greek he is called Apollyon.[b] [b] Apolyon" means "Avaddon" or "Armageddon": means devastating destructive end " or Doomsday War. Then the sixth angel blew his trumpet, and I heard a voice from the four horns of the golden altar before God, 14 saying to the sixth angel who had the trumpet, “Release the four angels who are bound at the great river Euphrates.” 15 So the four angels, who had been prepared for the hour, the day, the month, and the year, were released to kill a third of mankind. 16 The number of mounted troops was twice ten thousand times ten thousand; I heard their number. 17 And this is how I saw the horses in my vision and those who rode them: they wore breastplates the color of fire and of sapphire and of sulfur, and the heads of the horses were like lions’ heads, and fire and smoke and sulfur came out of their mouths. 18 By these three plagues a third of mankind was killed, by the fire and smoke and sulfur coming out of their mouths. 15 Then the seventh angel blew his trumpet, and there were loud voices in heaven, saying, “The kingdom of the world has become the kingdom of our Lord and of his Christ, and he shall reign forever and ever.” 16 And the twenty-four elders who sit on their thrones before God fell on their faces and worshiped God, 17 saying, “We give thanks to you, Lord God Almighty, who is and who was, for you have taken your great power and begun to reign. 18 The nations raged, but your wrath came, and the time for the dead to be judged, and for rewarding your servants, the prophets and saints, and those who fear your name, both small and great, and for destroying the destroyers of the earth.” 19 Then God’s temple in heaven was opened, and the ark of his covenant was seen within his temple. There were flashes of lightning, rumblings, peals of thunder, an earthquake, and heavy hail..." The First Beast 1 And I saw a beast rising out of the sea, with ten horns and seven heads, with ten diadems on its horns and blasphemous names on its heads. 2 And the beast that I saw was like a leopard; its feet were like a bear’s, and its mouth was like a lion’s mouth. And to it the dragon gave his power and his throne and great authority. 3 One of its heads seemed to have a mortal wound, but its mortal wound was healed, and the whole earth marveled as they followed the beast. 4 And they worshiped the dragon, for he had given his authority to the beast, and they worshiped the beast, saying, “Who is like the beast, and who can fight against it?” “Is there anything like a monster? Who can fight him?” and they worshipped The Beast. 5 And the beast was given a mouth uttering haughty and blasphemous words, and it was allowed to exercise authority for forty-two months. 6 It opened its mouth to utter blasphemies against God, blaspheming his name and his dwelling, that is, those who dwell in heaven. 7 Also it was allowed to make war on the saints and to conquer them. And authority was given it over every tribe and people and language and nation, 8 and all who dwell on earth will worship it, everyone whose name has not been written before the foundation of the world in the book of life of the Lamb who was slain. 9 If anyone has an ear, let him hear: 10 If anyone is to be taken captive, to captivity he goes; if anyone is to be slain with the sword, with the sword must he be slain. here is a call for the endurance and faith of the saints. The Second Beast 11 Then I saw another beast rising out of the earth. It had two horns like a lamb and it spoke like a dragon. 12 It exercises all the authority of the first beast in its presence, and makes the earth and its inhabitants worship the first beast, whose mortal wound was healed. 13 It performs great signs, even making fire come down from heaven to earth in front of people, 14 and by the signs that it is allowed to work in the presence of the beast it deceives those who dwell on earth, telling them to make an image for the beast that was wounded by the sword and yet lived. 15 And it was allowed to give breath to the image of the beast, so that the image of the beast might even speak and might cause those who would not worship the image of the beast to be slain. 16 Also it causes all, both small and great, both rich and poor, both free and slave, to be marked on the right hand or the forehead, 17 so that no one can buy or sell unless he has the mark, that is, the name of the beast or the number of its name. 18 This calls for wisdom: let the one who has understanding calculate the number of the beast, for it is the number of a man[d], and his number is 666. [d]This Monster, symbolized by the number "666", is this person "Dajjal" or "AntiChrist". Jesus Is Coming And he said to me, “These words are trustworthy and true. And the Lord, the God of the spirits of the prophets, has sent his angel to show his servants what must soon take place.” 6 “And behold, I am coming soon. Blessed is the one who keeps the words of the prophecy of this book.” 7 8 I, John, am the one who heard and saw these things. And when I heard and saw them, I fell down to worship at the feet of the angel who showed them to me, 9 but he said to me, “You must not do that! I am a fellow servant with you and your brothers the prophets, and with those who keep the words of this book. Worship God.” And he said to me, “Do not seal up the words of the prophecy of this book, for the time is near. 11 Let the evildoer still do evil, and the filthy still be filthy, and the righteous still do right, and the holy still be holy.” 10 “Behold, I am coming soon, bringing my recompense with me, to repay each one for what he has done. 13 I am the Alpha and the Omega, the first and the last, the beginning and the end.” 12 (Bible, Book of Revelation, Bap 7-22) *** This Last Prophecy, which Bruno discovered with the help of God in the number of Pi encoded in the Bible and the Great Mayan calendar, would one day be the end of this cruelty and this 500-year-old grand plan of Satan. And not only that, but Bruno's prophecy would reveal a few much bigger truths that would take place in 700 years. He summed it up with a great prophecy on the last page of his book, in which he collected all his prophecies and put them before the archbishop in court before his death: GREAT PROPHECIES BEFORE THE APOCALYPSE: PROPHECY 1: 1522 (BRUNO'S END) PROPHECY 2: 1822 (END OF THE INQUISITION) PROPHECY 3: 1922 (THE END OF KINGS) PROPHECY 4: 2022 (END OF THE CHURCH) PROPHECY 5: 2122 (END OF HUMANITY) PROPHECY 6: 2222 (THE END OF THE WORLD) APOCALYPSE END OF TIME < - - - > RETURN TO HEAVEN END OF SATAN < - - - > RETURN TO HELL These prophecies will take place in 13 stages, respectively: (13 Baktun in the Mayan Doomsday Calendar actually described this too) 1. First the insects will disappear, 2. Then the plants will disappear, 3. Then the trees will disappear, 4. Then the creatures of the Sea will disappear, 5. Then the creatures on land will disappear, 6. Then people will disappear, 7. Then, the sky will disappear, 8. Then, the world will disappear, 9. Then, the Stars will disappear, 10. Then, the universe will disappear, 11. Then, God will resurrect all men, 12. Then, heaven will return, 13. Then hell will come down to earth .. Important Note: "Absolutely do not open this important and sealed page before my death." (Written By: Oracle Bruno) "1522, Spain (The Court of Inquisition)” – Returning to the Lost Paradise – I t was the last Sunday for Bruno, there was no tomorrow and beyond, it wasn't going to happen anymore. In his final moments, when he was clawed to death in the Hall of the Inquisition, it was time for the great secret, the final prophecy, to be revealed. “Repeat what I said" the Archbishop turned to him and shouted furiously: "I am Bruno, am a sinful servant of God, and I deserve to suffer this punishment. I have cursed the Holy Book, the words of our Holy Father in heaven, and I have committed a great sin by trying to publicize and teach the words and prophecies that contain blasphemy that are not in it, and now I am ready to suffer my punishment.” "Why are we turning the life we live into so much hell every day?" Oracle Bruno said to himself and continued: - “However, God created man with the desire to have a life like Paradise, not that we should experience Hell in the world. But I see that we live in a world where those who want to go to Heaven turn it into hell. Although Satan wanted to drag man's foot into hell, this was not supposed to be God's grand plan and purpose.” “This shouldn't have happened, no this shouldn't have happened, nooooooo!" he screamed as loud as he could, and when he ran out of power, his sister Sofia, who was arrested like him, came to his mind for a second. While trying to suppress the blood flowing through the right abdominal cavity with his hand, he began to experience hallucinations and dreams leading up to his childhood. The two were playing in a paradise-like garden, with sacred beings coming before them and accompanying them, offering gifts, toys. These visions of the Oracle Bruno continued for a few more minutes, and again a landscape like the Garden of Eden appeared before his eyes, there were no more people around, there were angels. The archbishop spoke again for the last time: - "Are you still going to deny your guilt? So, in the name of the father, the son, and the Holy, May God forgive his soul and, if he forgives, accept it into heaven. Because you deserve to die in the face of this great sin you have committed, soothsayer Bruno.” Bruno tried to talk, albeit with difficulty: - "Damn it, I don't need your Heaven, and I don't need your prayer. You will be cursed forever for what you have done. God will not forgive you. Remember that, he will never forgive. Heaven is not your property, and sooner or later you will understand it, if not today, but when that day comes, along with you, the Pope and this church will be destroyed. This is the last word.” The hooked torture device made a huge hole in his stomach, and just as he pressed his hand vigorously against his painfully bleeding wound, he shouted again: "I want to go back to Aden, to Heaven!” "To my Father..” That had been his last word, and now he gave his last breath, falling on his face to the ground. But, just before he died, he also said those words: “Those who execute me will be cursed Forever!” “And the Last Prophecy I have revealed, is...” "...will bring the End of the World..” *** Yes, now Bruno was dead, but the Book of Prophecy and notes he left behind would live forever. The idea of humanity getting out of this hellish life we live and returning to Heaven has always existed almost since it first came out of there, that is, throughout the entire history of humanity. In the world, there was a fierce struggle for this. But now a hell that lasted 500 years collapsed on humanity like a black plague, a nightmare in this Medieval Age. But the other interesting thing is that even though it was almost the longest Dark Age in human history, all this was done in the name of religion and God. As if all these flashy courts and these executions and executions carried out in the most famous and famous buildings in almost every country had turned into a Sunday Place set up to kill people, many of whom were innocent. Besides, it's a death feast with an audience and in front of the public. Who would end and destroy 500 years of endless chaos and carnage. That's where the importance of the life of the Oracle Bruno came from. So much so that when the time of this war came, it would no longer be a war between the Church and Humanity, but an apocalyptic war between Humanity and Satan..